2014-Jeep Wrangler Owner's Manual - Fiat

WranglerOPERATING INFORMATION

Table of Contents1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

1

1INTRODUCTION

• INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4• ROLLOVER WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4• IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5• HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6• WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8• VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8• VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

3

INTRODUCTIONCongratulations on selecting your new ChryslerGroup LLC vehicle. Be assured that it repre-sents precision workmanship, distinctive styl-ing, and high quality - all essentials that aretraditional to our vehicles.This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can goplaces and perform tasks that conventionalpassenger cars are not intended. It handles andmaneuvers differently from many passengercars both on-road and off-road, so take time tobecome familiar with your vehicle.The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle wasdesigned for on-road use only. It is not intendedfor off-road driving or use in other severe con-ditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.Before you start to drive this vehicle, read theOwner’s Manual and all the Supplements. Besure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,particularly those used for braking, steering,and transmission and transfer case shifting.Learn how your vehicle handles on differentroad surfaces. Your driving skills will improvewith experience, but as in driving any vehicle,take it easy as you begin. When driving off-road

or working the vehicle, don’t overload it orexpect it to overcome the forces of nature.Always observe local laws wherever you drive.As with other vehicles of this type, failure tooperate this vehicle correctly may result in lossof control or a collision. Be sure to read the“On-Road/ Off-Road Driving Tips” in “StartingAnd Operating” for further information.NOTE:After reviewing the owner information, itshould be stored in the vehicle for conve-nient referencing and remain with the ve-hicle when sold.Failure to operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or a collision.Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds orwhile intoxicated may result in loss of control,collision with other vehicles or objects, going offthe road, or overturning; any of which may leadto serious injury or death. Also, failure to useseat belts subjects the driver and passengers toa greater risk of injury or death.To keep your vehicle running at its best, haveyour vehicle serviced at recommended intervals

by an authorized dealer or distributor who hasthe qualified personnel, special tools and equip-ment to perform all service.The manufacturer and its distributors are vitallyinterested in your complete satisfaction with thisvehicle. If you encounter a service or warrantyproblem which is not resolved to your satisfac-tion, discuss the matter with your authorizeddealer or distributor’s management.Your authorized dealer or distributor will behappy to assist you with any questions aboutyour vehicle.

ROLLOVER WARNINGUtility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles. Thisvehicle has a higher ground clearance and ahigher center of gravity than many passengercars. It is capable of performing better in a widevariety of off-road applications. Driven in anunsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of con-trol. Because of the higher center of gravity andthe narrower track, if this vehicle is out of controlit may roll over when some other vehicles maynot.

4

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers,or other unsafe driving actions that can causeloss of vehicle control. Failure to operate thisvehicle safely may result in a collision, rolloverof the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drivecarefully.

Failure to use the driver and passenger seatbelts provided is a major cause of severe orfatal injury. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

IMPORTANT NOTICEALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLI-CATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFOR-MATION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICA-TION APPROVAL. THE RIGHT IS RESERVEDTO PUBLISH REVISIONS AT ANY TIME.This Owner’s Manual has been prepared withthe assistance of service and engineering spe-cialists to acquaint you with the operation andmaintenance of your new vehicle. It is supple-mented by a Warranty Information Booklet andvarious customer-oriented documents. You areurged to read these publications carefully. Fol-lowing the instructions and recommendations inthis Owner’s Manual will help assure safe andenjoyable operation of your vehicle.After you have read the Owner’s Manual, itshould be stored in the vehicle for convenientreference and remain with the vehicle whensold.The manufacturer reserves the right to makechanges in design and specifications, and/or tomake additions to or improvements in its prod-

ucts without imposing any obligations uponitself to install them on products previouslymanufactured.The Owner’s Manual illustrates and describesthe features that are standard or available asextra cost options. Therefore, some of theequipment and accessories in this publicationmay not appear on your vehicle.NOTE:Be sure to read the Owner’s Manual firstbefore driving your vehicle and before at-taching or installing parts/accessories ormaking other modifications to the vehicle.

In view of the many replacement parts andaccessories from various manufacturers avail-able on the market, the manufacturer cannot becertain that the driving safety of your vehicle willnot be impaired by the attachment or installationof such parts. Even if such parts are officially-approved (for example, by a general operatingpermit for the part or by constructing the part inan officially approved design), or if an individualoperating permit was issued for the vehicle afterthe attachment or installation of such parts, itcannot be implicitly assumed that the driving

Rollover Warning Label

5

safety of your vehicle is unimpaired. Therefore,neither experts nor official agencies are liable.The manufacturer only assumes responsibilitywhen parts, which are expressly authorized orrecommended by the manufacturer, are at-tached or installed at an authorized dealer. Thesame applies when modifications to the originalcondition are subsequently made on the manu-facturer’s vehicles.Your warranties do not cover any part that themanufacturer did not supply. Nor do they coverthe cost of any repairs or adjustments that mightbe caused or needed because of the installationor use of non-manufacturer parts, components,equipment, materials, or additives. Nor do your

warranties cover the costs of repairing damageor conditions caused by any changes to yourvehicle that do not comply with the manufactur-ers specifications.Original Mopar® parts and accessories andother products approved by the manufacturer,including qualified advice, are available at yourauthorized dealer.When it comes to service, remember that yourauthorized dealer knows your vehicle best, hasthe factory-trained technicians and genuineMopar® parts, and is interested in your satis-faction.Copyright © 2013 Chrysler International.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALConsult the Table of Contents to determinewhich section contains the information you de-sire.Since the specification of your vehicle dependson the items of equipment ordered, certaindescriptions and illustrations may differ fromyour vehicle’s equipment.The detailed index at the back of this Owner’sManual contains a complete listing of all sub-jects.Consult the following table for a description ofthe symbols that may be used on your vehicle orthroughout this Owner’s Manual:

6

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONSThis Owners Manual contains WARNINGSagainst operating procedures that could resultin a collision or bodily injury. It also containsCAUTIONS against procedures that could re-sult in damage to your vehicle. If you do notread this entire Owners Manual, you may missimportant information. Observe all Warningsand Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBERThe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) isfound on the left front corner of the instrumentpanel pad, visible from outside of the vehiclethrough the windshield. This number also ap-pears underbody, on the right side of the framerail near the center of the vehicle, as well as on

the Automobile Information Disclosure Labelaffixed to a window on your vehicle. Save thislabel for a convenient record of your vehicleidentification number and optional equipment.

NOTE:It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!Any modifications or alterations to this ve-hicle could seriously affect its roadworthi-ness and safety and may lead to a collisionresulting in serious injury or death.

Vehicle Identification Number

8

2THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTINGYOUR VEHICLE

• A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12• Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12• Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

• STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13• To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13• To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13• Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System . . . . . . . .13

• SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13• Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14• Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

• VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .15• Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15• To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15• To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

• ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16• REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .16

• To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

• Remote Key Unlock On First Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16• To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17• To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17• Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

• DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18• Upper Half Door Window Removal — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .19• Upper Half Door Window Installation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .19• Front Door Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19• Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

• DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22• Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22• Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22• Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . .24

• WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24• Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

• REAR SWING GATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26• OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

• Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28• Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout (Four-DoorModels Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

• Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32• Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32• Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33• Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped . . . . . . .33• Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

10

• Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34• Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) . . . . .34• Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35• Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . .35• Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .38• Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41• Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

• ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56• Additional Requirements For Diesel Engine — If Equipped . . . .56

• SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57• Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57• Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57• Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . .58• Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . .59

11

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYSThe authorized dealer that sold you your newvehicle has the key code numbers for yourvehicle locks. These numbers can be used toorder duplicate keys. Ask your authorizeddealer for these numbers and keep them in asafe place.

Ignition Key Removal1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equippedwith an automatic transmission).2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Acces-sory) position.

3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotatethe key to the LOCK position.4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lockcylinder.

WARNING!• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the

parking brake, shift the transmission intoPARK, and remove the Key Fob from theignition. When leaving the vehicle, alwayslock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-tended is dangerous for a number of rea-sons. A child or others could be seriouslyor fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the shift lever.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-dren. A child could operate power win-dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals insideparked vehicles in hot weather. Interiorheat build-up may cause serious injury ordeath.

Vehicle Key With RKE Transmitter

Ignition Switch Positions

1 — LOCK 3 — ON/RUN2 — ACC (ACCES-SORY)

4 — START

12

CAUTION!An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves.Always remove key from the ignition and lockall doors when leaving the vehicle unat-tended.

Key-In-Ignition ReminderOpening the driver’s door when the key is in theignition sounds a signal to remind you to re-move the key.NOTE:The Key-In-Ignition reminder only soundswhen the ignition key is placed in the LOCKor ACC position.

STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IFEQUIPPEDYour vehicle may be equipped with a passivesteering wheel lock. This lock prevents steeringthe vehicle without the ignition key. If the steer-ing wheel is moved approximately a half turn ineither direction, and the key is not in the ignition,the steering wheel will lock.

To Manually Lock The SteeringWheelWith the engine running, rotate the steeringwheel one–half revolution from the straightahead position, turn off the engine, and removethe key. Rotate the steering wheel slightly inboth directions until the lock engages.

To Release The Steering Wheel LockInsert the key in the ignition, and turn the wheelslightly to the left or right, to disengage the lock.NOTE:If you turned the wheel to the right to engagethe lock, you must turn the wheel slightly tothe right to disengage it. If you turned thewheel to the left to engage the lock, turn thewheel slightly to the left to disengage it.

Automatic Transmission IgnitionInterlock SystemThis system prevents the key from being re-moved unless the shift lever is in PARK. It alsoprevents shifting out of PARK unless the key isin the ON/RUN position, and the brake pedal isdepressed.

SENTRY KEY®The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system preventsunauthorized vehicle operation by disabling theengine. The system does not need to be armedor activated. Operation is automatic, regardlessof whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.The system uses ignition keys which have anembedded electronic chip (transponder) to pre-vent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,only keys that are programmed to the vehiclecan be used to start and operate the vehicle.The system will shut the engine off in twoseconds if someone uses an invalid key to startthe engine.NOTE:A key which has not been programmed isalso considered an invalid key, even if it iscut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder forthat vehicle.During normal operation, after turning on theignition switch, the Vehicle Security Light willturn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If thelight remains on after the bulb check, it indicatesthat there is a problem with the electronics. Inaddition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb

13

check, it indicates that someone used an invalidkey to start the engine. Either of these condi-tions will result in the engine being shut off aftertwo seconds.If the Vehicle Security Light turns on duringnormal vehicle operation (vehicle running forlonger than 10 seconds), it indicates that thereis a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,have the vehicle serviced as soon as possibleby an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is notcompatible with some aftermarket remotestarting systems. Use of these systems mayresult in vehicle starting problems and loss ofsecurity protection.

All of the keys provided with your new vehiclehave been programmed to the vehicle electron-ics.

Replacement KeysNOTE:Only keys that have been programmed tothe vehicle electronics can be used to startthe vehicle. Once a Sentry Key® has beenprogrammed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro-grammed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicleand lock all doors when leaving the vehicleunattended.

At the time of purchase, the original owner isprovided with a four-digit Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure loca-tion. This number is required for authorizeddealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keysconsists of programming a blank key to thevehicle electronics. A blank key is one whichhas never been programmed. See your autho-rized dealer if you require replacement or addi-tional keys for your vehicle.

NOTE:When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizersystem serviced, bring all vehicle keys withyou to the authorized dealer.

Customer Key ProgrammingSee your authorized dealer if you require re-placement or additional keys for your vehicle.

General InformationThe Sentry Key® operates on a carrier fre-quency of 433.92 MHz. The Sentry Key® Im-mobilizer system will be used in the followingEuropean countries, which apply Directive1999/5/EC: Austria, Belgium, Czech Republic,Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece,Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Nether-lands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania,Russian Federation, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden,Switzerland, Slovenia, Croatia, and UnitedKingdom.Operation is subject to the following conditions:• This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence.

14

• This device must accept any interferencethat may be received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —IF EQUIPPEDThe Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicledoors, hood, swing gate, and ignition for unau-thorized operation.If something triggers the alarm, the VehicleSecurity Alarm will sound the horn intermittently,the headlights will turn on, flash the turn signallights, and flash the Vehicle Security Light in thecluster.

Rearming Of The SystemIf something triggers the alarm, and no action istaken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarmwill turn off the horn after 29 seconds, and turnoff all of the visual signals after an additional 31seconds, then the Vehicle Security Alarm willrearm itself.

To Arm The System1. Remove the key from the ignition switch andexit the vehicle.2. Lock the doors and swing gate by pressingthe power door LOCK switch or the LOCKbutton on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.NOTE:The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm ifyou lock the doors with the manual doorlock plungers or the driver’s door lock cyl-inder.3. Close all the doors.The Vehicle Security Light in the instrumentcluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds tosignal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming.During this period, opening any door or theswing gate will cancel the arming process. If theVehicle Security Alarm is successfully set, theVehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rateto indicate the alarm is armed.

To Disarm The SystemEither press the UNLOCK button on the RKEtransmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key® into theignition lock cylinder and turn the key to theON/RUN position.NOTE:

• Unlocking the doors with the manual doorlock plungers or the driver’s door lockcylinder will not disarm the Vehicle Secu-rity Alarm.

• When the Vehicle Security Alarm isarmed, the interior power door lockswitches will not unlock the doors.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to pro-tect your vehicle; however, you can createconditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm willgive you a false alarm. If the previously de-scribed arming sequence has occurred, theVehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless ofwhether you are inside or outside the vehicle. Ifyou remain inside the vehicle and open a door,the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm theVehicle Security Alarm.

15

ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IFEQUIPPEDThe courtesy lights will turn on when you usethe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter tounlock the doors or open any door.This feature also turns on the approach lightingin the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to“Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle” for further information.The lights will fade to off after approximately 30seconds or they will immediately fade to offonce the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUNfrom the OFF position.NOTE:

• The front courtesy overhead console anddoor courtesy lights will turn on if thedimmer control is in the �Dome ON� posi-tion (extreme top position).

• The Illuminated Entry system will not op-erate if the dimmer control is in the“Dome defeat” position (extreme bottomposition).

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY(RKE) — IF EQUIPPEDThis system allows you to lock or unlock thedoors and swing gate from distances approxi-mately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKEtransmitter does not need to be pointed at thevehicle to activate the system.

NOTE:The line of transmission must not beblocked with metal objects.

To Unlock The Doors And Swing GatePress and release the RKE transmitter UN-LOCK button once to unlock the driver’s dooronly, or twice to unlock all the doors and swinggate. When the RKE transmitter UNLOCK but-ton is pressed, the Illuminated Entry will initiateand the turn signal lights will flash twice.

Remote Key Unlock On First PressThis feature lets you program the system tounlock either the driver’s side, or all doors andswing gate on the first press of the UNLOCKbutton on the RKE transmitter.• For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Ve-

hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-ProgrammableFeatures)” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, theRemote Unlock feature can be enabled ordisabled by performing the following steps:

1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a pro-grammed RKE transmitter.

Vehicle Key With RKE Transmitter

16

2. Continue to hold the RKE transmitter LOCKbutton for at least four seconds, but not longerthan 10 seconds, then press and hold the RKEtransmitter UNLOCK button.3. Release both buttons at the same time.4. Test this feature while outside of the vehicleby pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on theRKE transmitter.NOTE:Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK buttonwhile you are inside of the vehicle will acti-vate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening adoor with the Vehicle Security Alarm acti-vated will cause the alarm to sound. Pressthe RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to de-activate the Vehicle Security Alarm.

5. If the desired programming was notachieved or to reactivate this feature, repeat theabove steps.

NOTE:Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE trans-mitter while you are inside the vehicle willactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Openinga door with the Vehicle Security Alarm acti-vated will cause the alarm to sound. Pressthe UNLOCK button to deactivate the Ve-hicle Security Alarm.

To Lock The Doors And Swing GatePress and release the LOCK button on the RKEtransmitter to lock all doors. The turn signals willflash to acknowledge the lock signal.

To Turn Off Flash Lights With LockThis feature will cause the turn signal lights toflash when the doors are locked or unlockedwith the RKE transmitter. This feature can beturned on or turned off. To change the currentsetting, proceed as follows:• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-ProgrammableFeatures)” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC,perform the following steps:

1. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK buttonfor 4 to 10 seconds.2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (afterfour seconds) press the RKE transmitter LOCKbutton. Release both buttons.3. Test the “Flash Lights With Lock” featureoutside of the vehicle by pressing the RKEtransmitter LOCK button with the ignition switchin the LOCK position and the ignition key re-moved.NOTE:Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK buttonwhile you are in the vehicle will activate theVehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door withthe Vehicle Security Alarm activated willcause the alarm to sound. Press the RKEtransmitter UNLOCK button to deactivatethe Vehicle Security Alarm.

The “Flash Lights With Lock” feature can bereactivated by repeating this procedure.

17

Transmitter Battery ReplacementThe recommended replacement battery isCR2032.1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facingdown, use a flat blade screw driver to pry thetwo halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Useextreme care not to damage the seal or internalcomponents.

2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoidtouching the new battery with your fingers. Skinoils may cause battery deterioration. If youtouch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snapthe two halves together.

General InformationTransmitter and receivers operate on a carrierfrequency of 433.92 MHz as required by EECregulations. These devices must be certified toconform to specific regulations in each indi-vidual country. Two sets of regulations are in-volved: ETS (European TelecommunicationStandard) 300–220, which most countries use,and German BZT federal regulation 225Z125,which is based on ETC 300–220 but has addi-tional unique requirements. Other defined re-quirements are noted in ANNEX VI of COMMIS-SION DIRECTIVE 95/56/EC. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:• This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence.• This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

If your Remote Lock Control fails to operatefrom a normal distance, check for these twoconditions.1. Weak battery in transmitter. The expectedlife of the battery is a minimum of three years.2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as aradio station tower, airport transmitter, andsome mobile or CB radios.

DOORS

CAUTION!Careless handling and storage of the remov-able door panels may damage the seals,causing water to leak into the vehicle’s inte-rior.

Separating Case Halves

18

Upper Half Door Window Removal —If EquippedGrasp the half door window and pull upward.

Upper Half Door Window Installation —If Equipped1. Grasp the half door window and line up thepins with the pockets in the lower door.2. Push down to ensure the half door window isfully seated.

Front Door Removal

WARNING!Do not drive your vehicle on public roadswith the doors removed as you will lose theprotection that they can provide. This proce-dure is furnished for use during off-roadoperation only.

1. Roll down the glass window to prevent anydamage.

2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upperand lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx®head driver).NOTE:The hinge pin screws and nuts can bestowed in the rear cargo tray located underthe rear loadfloor.

3. Unplug the wiring harness connector underthe instrument panel by pressing the tab at thetop of the connector and pulling to disconnect.

Upper Half Door Window

Door Removal Warning Label

Hinge Pin Screw

19

NOTE:If the red latch on the connector is locked,pull the red latch down. This will unlock theconnector tab, allowing the tab to bepressed down and enabling the harness tobe disconnected.

4. Unhook the door strap from the body hook.Be careful not to allow the door to swing fullyopen as the mirror may damage the paint.5. With the door open, lift the door to clear thehinge pins from their hinges and remove thedoor.NOTE:Doors are heavy; use caution when remov-ing them.To reinstall the door(s), perform the previoussteps in the opposite order.

Rear Door Removal (Four-DoorModels)

WARNING!Do not drive your vehicle on public roadswith the doors removed as you will lose theprotection that they can provide. This proce-dure is furnished for use during off-roadoperation only.

1. Roll down the glass window to prevent anydamage.2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upperand lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx®head driver).NOTE:The hinge pin screws and nuts can bestowed in the rear cargo tray located underthe rear loadfloor.

Door Strap/Harness Location

1 — Wiring Harness (follow the harness up andunder the instrument panel to the connector)2 — Body Hook3 — Door/Harness Strap

Door Removal Warning Label

20

3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.4. Remove the trim access door from the bot-tom of the B-pillar.

5. Unplug the wiring harness connector.NOTE:If the red latch on the connector is locked,push the red latch to the right until you canonly see the latch on one end (right) of theconnector. This will unlock the connectortab, allowing the tab to be pressed down andenabling the harness to be disconnected.

6. Unhook the door strap from the body hook.7. With the door open, lift the door to clear thehinge pins from their hinges and remove thedoor.NOTE:Doors are heavy; use caution when remov-ing them.To reinstall the door(s), perform the previoussteps in the opposite order.

Hinge Pin Screw Trim Access Door Red Connector Latch

21

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door LocksAll doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door lock lever. To lock a door whenleaving your vehicle, press the rocker leverforward to the LOCK position and close thedoor. To UNLOCK the door press the rockerlever rearward.

NOTE:The ignition key that is used to start thevehicle is used to lock or unlock the doors,swing gate, glove compartment, and con-sole storage.

WARNING!• For personal security reasons and safety

in a collision, lock the vehicle doors whenyou drive, as well as when you park andleave the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• When leaving the vehicle, always remove

the Key Fob from the ignition and lock yourvehicle.



• Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-dren. A child could operate power win-dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Power Door Locks — If EquippedThe power door lock switch is located on eachfront door panel. Press the switch forward tolock the doors, and rearward to unlock thedoors.

Manual Door Lock (Full Frame Doors)

Manual Door Lock (Half Doors)

22

WARNING!• For personal security reasons and safety

in a collision, lock the vehicle doors whenyou drive, as well as when you park andleave the vehicle.

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe Key Fob from the ignition and lock yourvehicle.


(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-

tended is dangerous for a number of rea-sons. A child or others could be seriouslyor fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the shift lever.


Automatic Door Locks — If EquippedThe auto door lock feature default condition isenabled. When enabled, the door locks will lockautomatically when the vehicle’s speed ex-ceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lockfeature can be enabled or disabled by yourauthorized dealer per written request of thecustomer. Please see your authorized dealer forservice.

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — IfEquippedThe doors will unlock automatically on vehicleswith power door locks if:1. The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” fea-ture is enabled.2. The vehicle speed returned to 0 mph(0 km/h) and the transmission shift lever is inNEUTRAL or PARK.3. The driver door is opened.4. The doors were not previously unlocked.Automatic Unlock Doors On ExitProgrammingThe “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” featurecan be enabled or disabled as follows:1. Close all doors and place the key in theignition.2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK andON/RUN and then back to LOCK four timesending up in the LOCK position.3. Press the power door unlock switch to un-lock the doors.

Power Door Lock Switch

23

4. A single chime will indicate the completion ofthe programming.5. Repeat these steps if you want to return thisfeature to its previous setting.NOTE:Use the “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit”feature in accordance with local laws.

Child-Protection Door LockSystem — Rear DoorsTo provide a safer environment for small chil-dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors areequipped with Child-Protection Door Lock sys-tem.To Engage Or Disengage TheChild-Protection Door Lock System1. Open the rear door.2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lockand rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite reardoor.

WARNING!Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in acollision. Remember that the rear doors canonly be opened from the outside when theChild-Protection locks are engaged.

NOTE:For emergency exit with the system en-gaged, move the rocker lever rearward (un-locked position), roll down the window andopen the door with the outside door handle.

WINDOWS

Power Windows — If EquippedThe power window switches are located on theinstrument panel below the radio. Press theswitch downward to open the window and up-ward to close the window.

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

Power Window Switches

24

The top left switch controls the left front windowand the top right switch controls the right frontwindow.NOTE:

• For vehicles not equipped with the Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),the power window switches will remainactive for 45 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the LOCK position.Opening either front door will cancel thisfeature.

• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, thepower window switches will remain activefor up to 10 minutes after the ignitionswitch is turned to the LOCK position.Opening either front door will cancel thisfeature. The time for this feature is pro-grammable. Refer to “Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC)/Personal Set-tings (Customer-Programmable Features)”in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”for further information.

Four-Door ModelsThe lower left switch controls the left rear pas-senger window, and the lower right switch con-trols the right rear passenger window.Auto-DownBoth the driver and front passenger windowswitches have an “Auto-Down” feature. Pressthe window switch past the first detent, release,and the window will go down automatically. Tocancel the Auto-Down movement, operate theswitch in either the up or down direction andrelease the switch.To stop the window from going all the way downduring the Auto-Down operation, pull up on theswitch briefly.To partially open the window, press halfway tothe first detent and release it when you want thewindow to stop.Window Lockout Switch — Four-Door ModelsThe window lockout switch (located betweenthe front window switches) allows you to disablethe rear window switches that are located onthe back of the center floor console. To disable

the window controls, press the window lockoutbutton downward. To enable the window con-trols, press the window lockout button upward.

Rear Power Windows — Four-Door ModelsThe rear passenger window switches are lo-cated on the back of the center floor console.Press the switch downward to open the windowand upward to close the window.

Window Lockout Switch

25

Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be described as the percep-tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-typesound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit windbuffeting with the windows down in certain openor partially open positions. This is a normaloccurrence and can be minimized by adjustingthe window opening.

REAR SWING GATEThe rear swing gate can be unlocked by usingthe key, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-ter, or by activating the power door lockswitches located on the front doors.To open the swing gate, press the button on thegate handle.

NOTE:Close the rear flip-up window before at-tempting to close the swing gate (hard topmodels only).

CAUTION!Do not press on rear wiper blade whenclosing the rear flip-up window, as damage tothe blade will result.

WARNING!Driving with the flip-up window open canallow poisonous exhaust gases into yourvehicle. You and your passengers could beinjured by these fumes. Keep the flip-upwindow closed when you are operating thevehicle.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSSome of the most important safety features inyour vehicle are the restraint systems:• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the

driver and all passengers• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front

passenger

Rear Power Window Switches (Four-DoorModels)

Gate Handle

26

• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SAB) — if equipped

• An energy-absorbing steering column andsteering wheel

• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners

that may enhance occupant protection bymanaging occupant energy during an impactevent

• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s)include Automatic Locking Retractors(ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing intoposition by extending the belt all the way outand then adjusting the belt to the desiredlength to restrain a child seat or secure alarge item in a seat — if equipped

Please pay close attention to the information inthis section. It tells you how to use your restraintsystem properly, to keep you and your passen-gers as safe as possible.If you will be carrying children too small foradult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or theISOFIX feature also can be used to hold infant

and child restraint systems. For more informa-tion, refer to ISOFIX — Child Seat AnchorageSystem.NOTE:The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multi-stage inflator design. This allows the air bagto have different rates of inflation based onseveral factors, including the severity andtype of collision.Here are some simple steps you can take tominimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag:1. Children 12 years old and under shouldalways ride buckled up in a rear seat.

WARNING!• Never place a rear facing infant seat in

front of an air bag. A deploying PassengerAdvanced Front Air Bag can cause deathor serious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rearwardfacing infant seat.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint

in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Children that are not big enough to wear thevehicle seat belt properly (see section on ChildRestraints) should be secured in the rear seat inchild restraints or belt-positioning booster seats.Older children who do not use child restraints orbelt-positioning booster seats should ride prop-erly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allowchildren to slide the shoulder belt behind themor under their arm.

If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rearfacing child seat) must ride in the front passen-ger seat, move the seat as far back as possibleand use the proper child restraint. (Refer to“Child Restraints”)

You should read the instructions provided withyour child restraint to make sure that you areusing it properly.2. All occupants should always wear theirlap and shoulder belts properly.

27

3. The driver and front passenger seatsshould be moved back as far as practical toallow the Advanced Front Air Bags room toinflate.4. Do not lean against the door or window. Ifyour vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-ment occurs, the side air bags will inflateforcefully into the space between you andthe door.5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needsto be modified to accommodate a disabledperson, contact the Customer Center. Phonenumbers are provided under �If You NeedAssistance�.

WARNING!• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrainyou properly. In some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all. Always wear yourseat belts even though you have air bags.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Being too close to the steering wheel or

instrument panel during Advanced FrontAir Bag deployment could cause seriousinjury, including death. Air bags need roomto inflate. Sit back, comfortably extendingyour arms to reach the steering wheel orinstrument panel.

• If the vehicle has SAB, they also needroom to inflate. Do not lean against thedoor or window. Sit upright in the center ofthe seat.

• In a collision, you and your passengerscan suffer much greater injuries if you arenot properly buckled up. You can strike theinterior of your vehicle or other passen-gers, or you can be thrown out of thevehicle. Always be sure you and others inyour vehicle are buckled up properly.

Buckle up even though you are an excellentdriver, even on short trips. Someone on theroad may be a poor driver and cause a collisionthat includes you. This can happen far awayfrom home or on your own street.Research has shown that seat belts save lives,and they can reduce the seriousness of injuriesin a collision. Some of the worst injuries happenwhen people are thrown from the vehicle. Seatbelts reduce the possibility of ejection and therisk of injury caused by striking the inside of thevehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should bebelted at all times.

Lap/Shoulder BeltsAll seating positions in your vehicle areequipped with lap/shoulder belts. The belt web-bing retractor is designed to lock during verysudden stops or collisions. This feature allowsthe shoulder part of the belt to move freely withyou under normal conditions. However, in acollision the belt will lock and reduce the risk ofyou striking the inside of the vehicle or beingthrown out.

28

WARNING!• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped with seatsand seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is danger-ous. Seat belts are designed to go aroundthe large bones of your body. These arethe strongest parts of your body and cantake the forces of a collision the best.

• Wearing your belt in the wrong place couldmake your injuries in a collision muchworse. You might suffer internal injuries, oryou could even slide out of part of the belt.Follow these instructions to wear your seatbelt safely and to keep your passengerssafe, too.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Two people should never be belted into a

single seat belt. People belted togethercan crash into one another in a collision,hurting one another badly. Never use alap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more thanone person, no matter what their size.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sitback and adjust the seat.2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back ofthe front seat, next to your arm in the rear seat.Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slidethe latch plate up the webbing as far as neces-sary to allow the belt to go around your lap.

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert thelatch plate into the buckle until you hear a“click.”

Pulling Out Belt And Latch Plate

29

WARNING!• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle

will not protect you properly. The lap por-tion could ride too high on your body,possibly causing internal injuries. Alwaysbuckle your belt into the buckle nearestyou.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• A belt that is too loose will not protect you

properly. In a sudden stop you could movetoo far forward, increasing the possibility ofinjury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

• A belt that is worn under your arm isdangerous. Your body could strike the in-side surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,increasing head and neck injury. A beltworn under the arm can cause internalinjuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. Wear the belt over your shoulder sothat your strongest bones will take theforce in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will notprotect you from injury during a collision.You are more likely to hit your head in acollision if you do not wear your shoulderbelt. The lap and shoulder belt are meantto be used together.

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs,below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lapbelt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. Toloosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latchplate and pull on the lap belt. A snug beltreduces the risk of sliding under the belt in acollision.NOTE:The Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain onuntil the driver’s seat belt is buckled. TheSeat Belt Reminder Light will remain on untilthe driver and front passenger (if equippedwith front passenger BeltAlert®) seat belt isbuckled. For further information, refer to“Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System(BeltAlert®)”.

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

30

WARNING!• A lap belt worn too high can increase the

risk of injury in a collision. The belt forceswon’t be at the strong hip and pelvicbones, but across your abdomen. Alwayswear the lap part of your seat belt as low aspossible and keep it snug.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• A twisted belt may not protect you properly.

In a collision, it could even cut into you. Besure the belt is straight. If you can’tstraighten a belt in your vehicle, take it toyour authorized dealer immediately andhave it fixed.

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest sothat it is comfortable and not resting on yourneck. The retractor will withdraw any slack inthe belt.6. To release the belt, push the red button onthe buckle. The belt will automatically retract toits stowed position. If necessary, slide the latchplate down the webbing to allow the belt toretract fully.

WARNING!A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in acollision and leave you with no protection.Inspect the belt system periodically, check-

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)ing for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damagedparts must be replaced immediately. Do notdisassemble or modify the system. Seat beltassemblies must be replaced after a collisionif they have been damaged (bent retractor,torn webbing, etc.).

Rear Center Lap/Shoulder BeltRetractor Lockout (Four-DoorModels Only)This feature is designed to lock the retractorwhenever the 60% rear seatback is not fullylatched. This prevents someone from wearingthe rear center lap/shoulder belt when the rearseatback is not fully latched.NOTE:

• If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannotbe pulled out, check that the rear seat-back is fully latched.

Removing Slack From Belt

31

• If the rear seatback is properly latchedand the rear center lap/shoulder belt stillcannot be pulled out, the Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may beactivated. To reset this feature you mustlet all of the belt webbing return into theretractor. You will not be able to pull outmore webbing until all of the webbing hasbeen returned back into the retractor.

WARNING!The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equippedwith a lock-out feature to ensure that the rearseatback is in the fully upright and lockedposition when occupied. If the rear seatbackis not fully upright and locked and the rearcenter lap/shoulder belt can be pulled out ofthe retractor, the vehicle should immediatelybe taken to your authorized dealer for ser-vice. Failure to follow this warning couldresult in serious or fatal injury.

Lap/Shoulder Belt UntwistingProcedureUse the following procedure to untwist a twistedlap/shoulder belt.1. Position the latch plate as close as possibleto the anchor point.2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above thelatch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing180 degrees to create a fold that begins imme-diately above the latch plate.3. Slide the latch plate upward over the foldedwebbing. The folded webbing must enter theslot at the top of the latch plate.4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until itclears the folded webbing.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder BeltAnchorageIn the front seat positions, the shoulder beltanchorage can be adjusted upward or down-ward to position the belt away from your neck.Push in on the anchorage near your outsideshoulder and slide it up or down to reach theposition that serves you best.

WARNING!Position the shoulder belt height adjusters sothat the belt rests across the middle of yourshoulder. Failure to adjust the safety beltproperly could reduce the effectiveness ofthe seat belt and increase the risk of injury ina collision.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, youwill prefer a lower position, and if you are tallerthan average, you will prefer a higher position.

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

32

When you release the anchorage, try to move itup or down to make sure that it is locked inposition.NOTE:The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor-age is equipped with an Easy Up feature.This feature allows the shoulder belt an-chorage to be adjusted in the upward posi-tion without pressing the release button. Toverify the shoulder belt anchorage islatched, pull downward on the shoulder beltanchorage until it is locked into position.

Seat Belts In Passenger SeatingPositionsThe seat belts in the passenger seating posi-tions are equipped with Automatic Locking Re-tractors which are used to secure a child re-straint system. For additional information, referto “Installing Child Restraints Using The VehicleSeat Belt” under the “Child Restraint” section.The chart below defines the type of feature foreach seating position.

Driver Center Passen-ger

First Row N/A N/A ALRSecond

RowALR ALR ALR

• N/A — Not Applicable• ALR — Automatic Locking RetractorIf the passenger seating position is equippedwith an ALR and is being used for normalusage:Only pull the belt webbing out far enough tocomfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALRis activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound asthe belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retractcompletely in this case and then carefully pullout only the amount of webbing necessary tocomfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle untilyou hear a "click."

Automatic Locking Retractor Mode(ALR) — If EquippedIn this mode, the shoulder belt is automaticallypre-locked. The belt will still retract to removeany slack in the shoulder belt. The AutomaticLocking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Modeanytime a child safety seat is installed in aseating position that has a belt with this feature.Children 12 years old and under should alwaysbe properly restrained in a vehicle with a rearseat.How To Engage The Automatic LockingMode1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulderbelt.2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-ward until the entire belt is extracted.3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts,you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates thesafety belt is now in the Automatic LockingMode.

33

How To Disengage The Automatic LockingModeUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt andallow it to retract completely to disengage theAutomatic Locking Mode and activate the ve-hicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!• The belt and retractor assembly must be

replaced if the seat belt assembly Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature orany other seat belt function is not workingproperly when checked according to theprocedures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the belt and retractorassembly could increase the risk of injuryin collisions.

Energy Management FeatureThis vehicle has a safety belt system with anEnergy Management feature in the front seatingpositions to help further reduce the risk of injuryin the event of a head-on collision.

This safety belt system has a retractor assem-bly that is designed to release webbing in acontrolled manner. This feature is designed tohelp reduce the belt force acting on the occu-pant’s chest.

Seat Belt PretensionersThe seat belts for both front seating positions areequipped with pretensioning devices that are de-signed to remove slack from the seat belt in theevent of a collision. These devices may improvethe performance of the seat belt by assuring thatthe belt is tight about the occupant early in acollision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-pants, including those in child restraints.NOTE:These devices are not a substitute forproper seat belt placement by the occupant.The seat belt still must be worn snugly andpositioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. Adeployed pretensioner or a deployed air bagmust be replaced immediately.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use ReminderSystem (BeltAlert®)BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind thedriver and front passenger (if equipped withfront passenger BeltAlert®) to fasten their seatbelts. The feature is active whenever the igni-tion is on. If the driver or front seat passenger isunbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turnon and remain on until both front seat belts arefastened.The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins afterthe vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), byblinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light andsounding an intermittent chime. Once the se-quence starts, it will continue for the entireduration or until the respective seatbelts arefastened. After the sequence completes, theSeat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminateduntil the respective seat belts are fastened. Thedriver should instruct all other occupants tofasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt isunbuckled while traveling at speeds greaterthan 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provideboth audio and visual notification.

34

The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not ac-tive when the front passenger seat is unoccu-pied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when ananimal or heavy object is on the front passengerseat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped).It is recommended that pets be restrained in therear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or petcarriers that are secured by seat belts, andcargo is properly stowed.BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by yourauthorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does notrecommend deactivating BeltAlert®.NOTE:Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated,the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue toilluminate while the driver’s or front passen-ger (if equipped with BeltAlert®) seat beltremains unfastened.

Seat Belts And Pregnant WomenWe recommend that pregnant women use seatbelts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping themother safe is the best way to keep the babysafe.Pregnant women should wear the lap part of thebelt across the thighs and as snug across thehips as possible. Keep the belt low so that itdoes not come across the abdomen. That waythe strong bones of the hips will take the force ifthere is a collision.

Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) — Air BagsThis vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags forboth the driver and right front passenger as asupplement to the seat belt restraint systems.The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mountedin the steering wheel. The passenger AdvancedFront Air Bag is mounted in the instrumentpanel, above the glove compartment. The let-ters SRS are embossed on the air bag covers.

The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistageinflator design. This allows the air bag to havedifferent rates of inflation that are based onseveral factors, including the severity and typeof collision.This vehicle may be equipped with a driverand/or front passenger seat belt buckle switchthat detects whether the driver or front passen-

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — AirBags

1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front AirBags2 — Knee Bolsters

35

ger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckleswitch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-vanced Front Air Bags.This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemen-tal Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to pro-vide enhanced protection for an occupant dur-ing a side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in theoutboard side of the front seats.NOTE:

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in theinterior trim, but they will open during airbag deployment.

• After any accident, the vehicle should betaken to an authorized dealer immedi-ately.

Air Bag System ComponentsYour vehicle may be equipped with the followingair bag system components:• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)• Air Bag Warning Light• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel• Knee Impact Bolsters• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags

(SAB)• Front and Side Impact Sensors• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners and Seat Belt

Buckle SwitchAdvanced Front Air Bag FeaturesThe Advanced Front Air Bag system has multi-stage driver and front passenger air bags. Thissystem provides output appropriate to the se-verity and type of collision as determined by theOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC), whichmay receive information from the front impactsensors.The first stage inflator is triggered immediatelyduring an impact that requires air bag deploy-ment. This low output is used in less severecollisions. A higher energy output is used formore severe collisions.

WARNING!• No objects should be placed over or near

the air bag on the instrument panel, be-cause any such objects could cause harmif the vehicle is in a collision severeenough to cause the air bag to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manu-ally. You may damage the air bags and youcould be injured because the air bags mayno longer be functional. The protectivecovers for the air bag cushions are de-signed to open only when the air bags areinflating.

• If your vehicle is equipped with Supple-mental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SAB), do not use accessory seat coversor place objects between you and theSAB; the performance could be adverselyaffected and/or objects could be pushedinto you, causing serious injury.

(Continued)

36

WARNING! (Continued)• If your vehicle is equipped with SAB, do

not attach cupholders or any other objectson or around the door. The inflating SABcould drive the objects into occupants,causing serious injury.

• Do not cover or place items on the air bagcovers. These items may cause seriousinjury during inflation.

• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the kneebolster in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the kneebolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citi-zen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SAB) — If EquippedSupplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SAB) may provide enhanced protection to helpprotect an occupant during a side impact. TheSAB is marked with an air bag label sewn intothe outboard side of the front seats.

When the air bag deploys, it opens the seambetween the front and side of the seat’s trimcover. Each air bag deploys independently; a leftside impact deploys the left air bag only and aright-side impact deploys the right air bag only.NOTE:

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in theinterior trim, but they will open during airbag deployment.

• Being too close to the SAB during deploy-ment could cause you to be severelyinjured or killed.

The system includes side impact sensors that arecalibrated to deploy the SAB air bag during im-pacts that require air bag occupant protection.SAB air bags are a supplement to the seat beltrestraint system. Occupants, including childrenwho are up against or very close to SAB airbags can be seriously injured or killed. Occu-pants, especially children, should not lean on orsleep against the door, side windows, or areawhere the SAB air bags inflate, even if they arein an infant or child restraint. Always sit uprightas possible with your back against the seatback, use the seat belts properly, and use theappropriate sized child restraint, infant restraintor booster seat recommended for the size andweight of the child.Knee Impact BolstersThe Knee Impact Bolsters help protect theknees of the driver and front passengers, andposition front occupants for the best interactionwith the Advanced Front Air Bags.Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Ad-vanced Front Air Bags work with the kneeimpact bolsters to provide improved protectionfor the driver and front passenger.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air BagLocation

37

Air Bag Deployment Sensors AndControlsOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC)The ORC is part of a regulated safety systemrequired for this vehicle.The ORC determines if deployment of the frontand/or side air bags is required in a frontal orside collision. Based on the impact sensor’ssignals, a central electronic ORC deploys theAdvanced Front Air Bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if equipped,and front seat belt pretensioners, as required,depending on several factors, including theseverity and type of impact.Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to pro-vide additional protection by supplementing theseat belts in certain frontal collisions dependingon several factors, including the severity andtype of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags arenot expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear,side, or rollover collisions.The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy inall frontal collisions, including some that mayproduce substantial vehicle damage — for ex-ample, some pole collisions, truck under rides,

and angle offset collisions. On the other hand,depending on the type and location of impact,Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crasheswith little vehicle front-end damage but thatproduce a severe initial deceleration.The side air bags will not deploy in all sidecollisions. Side air bag deployment will dependon the severity and type of collision.Because air bag sensors measure vehicle de-celeration over time, vehicle speed and damageby themselves are not good indicators ofwhether or not an air bag should have de-ployed.Seat belts are necessary for your protection inall crashes, and also are needed to help keepyou in position, away from an inflating air bag.The ORC also monitors the readiness of theelectronic parts of the air bag system wheneverthe ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUNpositions. If the key is in the LOCK position, inthe ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbag system is not on and the air bags will notinflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supplysystem that may deploy the air bags even if thebattery loses power or it becomes disconnectedprior to deployment.

Also, the ORC turns on the Air BagWarning Light for four to eight sec-onds for a self-check when theignition is first turned on. After theself-check, the Air Bag Warning

Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunc-tion in any part of the system, it turns on the AirBag Warning Light either momentarily or con-tinuously. A single chime will sound if the lightcomes on again after initial startup.It also includes diagnostics that will illuminatethe instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if amalfunction is noted that could affect the air bagsystem. The diagnostics also record the natureof the malfunction.

WARNING!Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in yourinstrument panel could mean you won’t have

(Continued)

38

WARNING! (Continued)the air bags to protect you in a collision. If thelight does not come on as a bulb check whenthe ignition is first turned on, stays on afteryou start the vehicle, or if it comes on as youdrive, have an authorized dealer service theair bag system immediately.

Driver And Passenger Advanced Front AirBag Inflator UnitsThe Driver and Passenger Advanced Front AirBag Inflator Units are located in the center of thesteering wheel and on the right side of theinstrument panel. When the ORC detects acollision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags,it signals the inflator units. A large quantity ofnon-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Ad-vanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflationrates are possible, based on several factors,including the collision type and severity. Thesteering wheel hub trim cover and the upperright side of the instrument panel separate andfold out of the way as the air bags inflate to theirfull size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it

takes to blink your eyes. The air bags thenquickly deflate while helping to restrain thedriver and front passenger.The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is ventedthrough the vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the air bags do not interferewith your control of the vehicle.Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SAB) Inflator Units — If EquippedThe Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air BagsInflator Units (if equipped) are designed toactivate only in certain side collisions.The ORC determines if a side collision requiresthe side air bags to inflate, based on the severityand type of collision.Based on the severity and type of collision, theside air bag inflator on the crash side of thevehicle is triggered, releasing a quantity ofnon-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits throughthe seat seam into the space between theoccupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate inabout 10 milliseconds. The side air bag movesat a very high speed and with such a high forcethat it could injure you if you are not seated

properly, or if items are positioned in the areawhere the side air bag inflates. This especiallyapplies to children.Front And Side Impact SensorsIn front and side impacts, impact sensors canaid the ORC in determining appropriate re-sponse to impact events.Enhanced Accident Response SystemIn the event of an impact causing air bagdeployment, if the communication network re-mains intact, and the power remains intact,depending on the nature of the event the ORCwill determine whether to have the EnhancedAccident Response System perform the follow-ing functions:• Cut off fuel to the engine.• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has

power or until the ignition key is turned off.• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as

long as the battery has power or until theignition key is removed.

• Unlock the doors automatically.

39

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re-sponse System functions after an event, theignition switch must be changed from IGN ON toIGN OFF.If A Deployment OccursThe Advanced Front Air Bags are designed todeflate immediately after deployment.NOTE:Front and/or side air bags will not deploy inall collisions. This does not mean some-thing is wrong with the air bag system.If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any or all of the following may occur:• The nylon air bag material may sometimes

cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to thedriver and front passenger as the air bagsdeploy and unfold. The abrasions are similarto friction rope burns or those you might getsliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.They are not caused by contact with chemi-cals. They are not permanent and normallyheal quickly. However, if you haven’t healedsignificantly within a few days, or if you haveany blistering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate you may see somesmoke-like particles. The particles are a nor-mal by-product of the process that generatesthe non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.These airborne particles may irritate the skin,eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eyeirritation, rinse the area with cool water. Fornose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. Ifthe irritation continues, see your doctor. Ifthese particles settle on your clothing, followthe garment manufacturer’s instructions forcleaning.

• Do not drive your vehicle after the air bagshave deployed. If you are involved in anothercollision, the air bags will not be in place toprotect you.

WARNING!• Deployed air bags and seat belt preten-

sioners cannot protect you in another col-lision. Have the air bags, seat belt preten-sioner, and seat belt retractor assemblyreplaced by an authorized dealer immedi-

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)ately. Also, have the Occupant RestraintController (ORC) system serviced as well.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of yourair bag system. The air bag may inflateaccidentally or may not function properly ifmodifications are made. Take your vehicleto an authorized dealer for any air bagsystem service. If your seat, including yourtrim cover and cushion, needs to be ser-viced in any way (including removal orloosening/tightening of seat attachmentbolts), take the vehicle to your authorizeddealer. Only manufacturer approved seataccessories may be used. If it is necessaryto modify the air bag system for personswith disabilities, contact your authorizeddealer.

40

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!• Modifications to any part of the air bag

system could cause it to fail when youneed it. You could be injured if the air bagsystem is not there to protect you. Do notmodify the components or wiring, includingadding any kind of badges or stickers tothe steering wheel hub trim cover or theupper right side of the instrument panel.Do not modify the front bumper or vehiclebody structure, or add aftermarket sidesteps or running boards.

• You need proper knee impact protection ina collision. Do not mount or locate anyaftermarket equipment on or behind theknee bolsters.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part ofthe air bag system yourself. Be sure to tellanyone who works on your vehicle that ithas an air bag system.

Air Bag Warning Light

You will want to have the air bagsready to inflate for your protectionin a collision. The Air Bag WarningLight monitors the internal circuitsand interconnecting wiring associ-ated with air bag system electrical

components. While the air bag system is de-signed to be maintenance free, if any of thefollowing occurs, have an authorized dealerservice the air bag system immediately.• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on

during the four to eight seconds when theignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUNposition.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on afterthe four to eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter-mittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE:If the speedometer, tachometer, or any en-gine related gauges are not working, theOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may

also be disabled. The air bags may not beready to inflate for your protection. Promptlycheck the fuse block for blown fuses. Referto the label located on the inside of the fuseblock cover for the proper air bag fuses. Seeyour authorized dealer if the fuse is good.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)This vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR isto record, in certain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an air bag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’s systems per-formed. The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safety systemsfor a short period of time, typically 30 secondsor less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:• How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;• Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

41

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in which crashesand injuries occur.NOTE:EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only ifa non-trivial crash situation occurs; no dataare recorded by the EDR under normal drivingconditions and no personal data (e.g., name,gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as law enforce-ment, could combine the EDR data with thetype of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the ve-hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment,can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

Child RestraintsEveryone in your vehicle needs to be buckledup at all times, including babies and children.

Children 12 years or younger should ride prop-erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.According to crash statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatsrather than in the front.There are different sizes and types of restraintsfor children from newborn size to the childalmost large enough for an adult safety belt.Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual tomake sure you have the correct seat for yourchild.

Before buying any restraint system, make surethat it has a label certifying that it meets allapplicable Safety Standards. You should alsomake sure that you can install it in the vehiclewhere you will use it.

WARNING!• “Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward-

facing child restraint on a seat protected byan air bag in front of it!” Refer to visor anddoor shut face mounted labels for informa-tion.

• In a collision, an unrestrained child, even atiny baby, can become a projectile insidethe vehicle. The force required to holdeven an infant on your lap could becomeso great that you could not hold the child,no matter how strong you are. The childand others could be badly injured. Anychild riding in your vehicle should be in aproper restraint for the child’s size.

42

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint

Infants and ToddlersChildren who are two years old or younger

and who have not reached the height orweight limits of their child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible ChildRestraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of

the vehicle

Small ChildrenChildren who are at least two years old or

who have out-grown the height or weight limitof their rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat

of the vehicle

Larger ChildrenChildren who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to

properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicleseat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

Children Too Large for Child RestraintsChildren 12 years old or younger, who haveout-grown the height or weight limit of their

booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat ofthe vehicle

43

Infants And Child RestraintsSafety experts recommend that children riderearward-facing in the vehicle until they are twoyears old or until they reach either the height orweight limit of their rear facing child safety seat.Two types of child restraints can be usedrearward-facing: infant carriers and convertiblechild seats.The infant carrier is only used rearward-facingin the vehicle. It is recommended for childrenfrom birth until they reach the weight or heightlimit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seatscan be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seatsoften have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so theycan be used rearward-facing by children whohave outgrown their infant carrier but are stillless than at least two years old. Children shouldremain rearward-facing until they reach thehighest weight or height allowed by their con-vertible child seat.

WARNING!• Never place a rear facing infant seat in

front of an air bag. A deploying PassengerAdvanced Front Air Bag can cause deathor serious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rearwardfacing infant seat.

• Only use a rearward-facing child restraintin a vehicle with a rear seat.

Older Children And Child RestraintsChildren who are two years old or who haveoutgrown their rear-facing convertible child seatcan ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seatsused in the forward-facing direction are forchildren who are over two years old or who haveoutgrown the rear-facing weight or height limitof their rear-facing convertible child seat. Chil-dren should remain in a forward-facing childseat with a harness for as long as possible, upto the highest weight or height allowed by thechild seat.

All children whose weight or height is above theforward-facing limit for the child seat should usea belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’sseat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit withknees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion whilethe child’s back is against the seatback, theyshould use a belt-positioning booster seat. Thechild and belt-positioning booster seat are heldin the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!• Improper installation can lead to failure of

an infant or child restraint. It could comeloose in a collision. The child could bebadly injured or killed. Follow the childrestraint manufacturer’s directions exactlywhen installing an infant or child restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use,secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt orISOFIX anchorages, or remove it from thevehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.In a sudden stop or accident, it could strikethe occupants or seatbacks and causeserious personal injury.

44

Children Too Large For Booster SeatsChildren who are large enough to wear theshoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs arelong enough to bend over the front of the seatwhen their back is against the seatback, shoulduse the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple5-step test to decide whether the child can usethe vehicle’s seat belt alone:1. Can the child sit all the way back against theback of the vehicle seat?2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably overthe front of the vehicle seat – while they are stillsitting all the way back?3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’sshoulder between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,touching the child’s thighs and not their stom-ach?5. Can the child stay seated like this for thewhole trip?If the answer to any of these questions was“no,” then the child still needs to use a boosterseat in this vehicle. If the child is using thelap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically. Achild’s squirming or slouching can move the beltout of position. If the shoulder belt contacts theface or neck, move the child closer to the centerof the vehicle. Never allow a child to put theshoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.

45

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined Weightof the Child + Child

Restraint

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

ISOFIX – Lower An-chors Only Seat Belt Only

ISOFIX – Lower An-chors + Top Tether

AnchorSeat Belt + TopTether Anchor

Rear-Facing ChildRestraint

Up to 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X X

Rear-Facing ChildRestraint

More than 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X

Forward-Facing ChildRestraint

Up to 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X X

Forward-Facing ChildRestraint

More than 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X

46

Universal Child Seat Position Chart

2 Door Seating Position

Mass GroupSeating Position

FrontPassenger

RearOutboard

0 - Up to10 kg

X U

0+ - Up to13 kg

X U

I - 9 to18 kg

X U

II - 15 to25 kg

X U

III - 22 to36 kg

X U


MassGroup

Seating PositionFrontPas-

senger

RearOut-

board

RearCenter

0 - Upto 10 kg

X U U

0+ - Upto 13 kg

X U U

I - 9 to18 kg

X U U

II - 15 to25 kg

X U U

III - 22to 36 kg

X U U

Key of letters used in the table above:• U = Suitable for “universal” category restraints

approved for use in this mass group.• UF = Suitable for forward-facing “universal”

category restraints approved for use in thismass group.

• L = Suitable for particular child restraintsgiven on attached list. These restraints maybe of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or“semi-universal” categories.

• B = Built-in restraint approved for this massgroup.

• X = Seat position not suitable for children inthis mass group.

47


Mass GroupSize Class Fixture Seating Position

Front Passenger Rear Outboard

0 - Up to 10 kgE ISO/R1 X X

(1) X X

0+ - Up to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X XD ISO/R2 X XC ISO/R3 X X

(1) X X

I - 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X XC ISO/R3 X XB ISO/F2 X IUFB1 ISO/F2X X IUFA ISO/F3 X IUF

(1) X XII - 15 to 25 kg (1) X XIII - 22 to 36 kg (1) X X

48


Mass GroupSize Class Fixture Seating Position

Front Passenger Rear Outboard Rear Center

0 - Up to 10 kgE ISO/R1 X IUF X

(1) X X X

0+ - Up to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X IUF XD ISO/R2 X X XC ISO/R3 X X X

(1) X X X

I - 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X X XC ISO/R3 X X XB ISO/F2 X IUF XB1 ISO/F2X X IUF XA ISO/F3 X IUF X

(1) X X XII - 15 to 25 kg (1) X X XIII - 22 to 36 kg (1) X X X

49

(1) — For the child restraint systems (CRS)which do not carry the ISO/XX size class iden-tification (A to G), for the applicable mass group,the manufacturer will indicate the vehicle spe-cific ISOFIX child restraint system(s) recom-mended for each position.Key of letters used in the table above:• IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child re-

straint systems of “universal” category ap-proved for use in the mass group.

• IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child re-straint systems (CRS) given in the attachedlist. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the“specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.

• X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIXchild restraint systems in this mass groupand/or this size class.

ISOFIX Restraint SystemYour vehicle is equipped with the child restraintanchorage system called ISOFIX. The ISOFIXsystem has three vehicle anchor points forinstalling ISOFIX-equipped child seats. Thereare two lower anchorages located at the back of

the seat cushion where it meets the seatbackand one top tether anchorage located behindthe seating position. These anchorages areused to install ISOFIX-equipped child seatswithout using the vehicle’s seat belts. Someseating positions may have a top tether anchor-age but no lower anchorages. In these seatingpositions, the seat belt must be used with thetop tether anchorage to install the childrestraint.Locating The ISOFIX Anchorages

The lower anchorages are roundbars that are found at the rear ofthe seat cushion where it meets theseatback, below the anchoragesymbols on the seatback. They arejust visible when you lean into the

rear seat to install the child restraint. You willeasily feel them if you run your finger along thegap between the seatback and seat cushion.

ISOFIX Anchorages (Two-Door Models)

ISOFIX Anchorages (Four-Door Models)

50

Locating The ISOFIX Anchorages

In addition, there are tether strapanchors located behind each rearseatback, near to the floor.

ISOFIX child restraint systems will be equippedwith a rigid bar on each side. Each will have aconnector to attach to the lower anchorage anda way to tighten the connection to the anchor-age. Forward-facing child restraints and somerear-facing infant restraints may also beequipped with a tether strap. The tether strapwill have a hook at the end to attach to the toptether anchorage and a way to tighten the strapafter it is attached to the anchorage.

2–Door Center Seat ISOFIX

WARNING!This vehicle does not have a center seatingposition. Do not use the center lower ISOFIXanchorages to install a child seat in thecenter of the back seat.

4–Door Center Seat ISOFIXDo not install child restraints with rigid lowerattachments in the center seating position. Onlyinstall this type of child restraint in the outboardseating positions. Child restraints with flexible,webbing mounted lower attachments can beinstalled in any rear seating position.

WARNING!Never use the same lower anchorage toattach more than one child restraint. If youare installing ISOFIX child restraints next toeach other, you must use the seat belt for thecenter position. You can then use either the

(Continued)

Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)

Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)

51

WARNING! (Continued)ISOFIX anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt forinstalling child seats in the outboard posi-tions. Please refer to “Installing The ISOFIXChild Restraint System” for typical installa-tion instructions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraintmanufacturer when installing your child re-straint. Not all child restraint systems will beinstalled as described here.To install an ISOFIX Child Restraint:1. If the selected seating position has a Swit-chable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seatbelt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-tions below. See the section “Installing ChildRestraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to checkwhat type of seat belt each seating position has.2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower connec-tors and on the tether strap of the child seat sothat you can more easily attach the hooks orconnectors to the vehicle anchorages.

3. Place the child seat between the lower an-chorages for that seating position. For somesecond row seats, you may need to recline theseat and / or raise the head restraint to get abetter fit. If the rear seat can be moved forwardand rearward in the vehicle, you may wish tomove it to its rear-most position to make roomfor the child seat. You may also move the frontseat forward to allow more room for the carseat.4. Attach the connectors of the child restraint tothe lower anchorages in the selected seatingposition.5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, con-nect it to the top tether anchorage. See thesection “Installing Child Restraints Using theTop Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach atether anchor.6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the childrestraint rearward and downward into the seat.Remove slack in the straps according to thechild restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightlyby pulling back and forth on the child seat at thebelt path. It should not move more than 1 inch(25.4 mm) in any direction.How To Stow An Unused ALR SeatbeltWhen using the ISOFIX attaching system toinstall a child restraint, stow all ALR seat beltsthat are not being used by other occupants orbeing used to secure child restraints. An unusedbelt could injure a child if they play with it andaccidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Beforeinstalling a child restraint using the ISOFIXsystem, buckle the seat belt behind the childrestraint and out of the child’s reach. If thebuckled seat belt interferes with the child re-straint installation, instead of buckling it behindthe child restraint, route the seat belt throughthe child restraint belt path and then buckle it.Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind all children inthe vehicle that the seat belts are not toys andthat they should not play with them.

52

WARNING!• Improper installation of a child restraint to

the ISOFIX anchorages can lead to failureof an infant or child restraint. The childcould be badly injured or killed. Follow themanufacturer’s directions exactly when in-stalling an infant or child restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed towithstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly-fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used foradult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-ing other items or equipment to the vehicle

Installing Child Restraints Using TheVehicle Seat BeltThe seat belts in the passenger seating posi-tions are equipped with either a SwitchableAutomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinch-ing latch plate or both. Both types of seat beltsare designed to keep the lap portion of the seatbelt tight around the child restraint so that it isnot necessary to use a locking clip. The ALRretractor can be “switched” into a locked mode

by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractorand then letting the webbing retract back intothe retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make aclicking noise while the webbing is pulled backinto the retractor. For additional information onALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”description under “Occupant Restraints.” Thecinching latch plate is designed to hold the lapportion of the seatbelt tight when webbing ispulled tight and straight through a child re-straint’s belt path.Installing A Child Restraint With ASwitchable Automatic Locking Retractor(ALR)1. Place the child seat in the center of theseating position. For some second row seats,you may need to recline the seat and/or raisethe head restraint to get a better fit. If the rearseat can be moved forward and rearward in thevehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-mostposition to make room for the child seat. Youmay also move the front seat forward to allowmore room for the car seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing fromthe retractor to pass it through the belt path ofthe child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbingin the belt path.3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until youhear a “click.”4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portiontight against the child seat.5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on theshoulder part of the belt until you have pulled allthe seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,allow the webbing to retract back into the retrac-tor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear aclicking sound. This means the seat belt is nowin the Automatic Locking mode.6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. Ifit is locked, you should not be able to pull outany webbing. If the retractor is not locked,repeat step 5.

53

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing totighten the lap portion around the child restraintwhile you push the child restraint rearward anddownward into the vehicle seat.8. If the child restraint has a top tether strapand the seating position has a top tether an-chorage, connect the tether strap to the anchor-age and tighten the tether strap. See the section“Installing Child Restraints Using the Top TetherAnchorage” for directions to attach a tetheranchor.9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightlyby pulling back and forth on the child seat at thebelt path. It should not move more than 1 inch(25.4 mm) in any direction.Any seat belt system will loosen with time, socheck the belt occasionally, and pull it tight ifnecessary.

Installing A Child Restraint With ACinching Latch Plate (CINCH) — IfEquipped1. Place the child seat in the center of theseating position. For some second row seats,you may need to recline the seat and / or raisethe head restraint to get a better fit. If the rearseat can be moved forward and rearward in thevehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-mostposition to make room for the child seat. Youmay also move the front seat forward to allowmore room for the car seat.2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbingfrom the retractor to pass it through the belt pathof the child restraint. Do not twist the beltwebbing in the belt path.3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until youhear a “click.”4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing totighten the lap portion around the child restraintwhile you push the child restraint rearward anddownward into the vehicle seat.

5. If the child restraint has a top tether strapand the seating position has a top tether an-chorage, connect the tether strap to the anchor-age and tighten the tether strap. Refer to “In-stalling Child Restraints Using The Top TetherAnchorage” for directions to attach a tetheranchor.6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightlyby pulling back and forth on the child seat at thebelt path. It should not move more than 1 inch(25.4 mm) in any direction.Any seat belt system will loosen with time, socheck the belt occasionally, and pull it tight ifnecessary.If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is tooclose to the belt path opening of the childrestraint, you may have trouble tightening theseat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latchplate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insertthe latch plate into the buckle with the releasebutton facing out, away from the child restraint.Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to complete theinstallation of the child restraint.

54

If the belt still cannot be tightened after youshorten the buckle, disconnect the latch platefrom the buckle, turn the buckle around one halfturn, and insert the latch plate into the buckleagain. If you still cannot make the child restraintinstallation tight, try a different seating position.Installing Child Restraints Using The TopTether Anchorage1. Look behind the seating position where youplan to install the child restraint to find the tetheranchorage. You may need to move the seatforward to provide better access to the tetheranchorage. If there is no top tether anchoragefor that seating position, move the child restraintto another position in the vehicle if one isavailable.2. Route the tether strap to provide the mostdirect path for the strap between the anchor andthe child seat. If your vehicle is equipped withadjustable rear head restraints, raise the headrestraint, and where possible, route the tether

strap under the head restraint and between thetwo posts. If not possible, lower the head re-straint and pass the tether strap around theoutboard side of the head restraint.3. Attach the tether strap hook of the childrestraint to the top tether anchorage as shownin the diagram.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap accordingto the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

WARNING!• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could

lead to increased head motion and pos-sible injury to the child. Use only the an-chorage position directly behind the childseat to secure a child restraint top tetherstrap.

(Continued)

Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)

Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)

55

WARNING! (Continued)• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear

seat, make sure the tether strap does notslip into the opening between the seat-backs as you remove slack in the strap.

Transporting PetsAir Bags deploying in the front seat could harmyour pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrownabout and possibly injured, or injure a passen-ger during panic braking or in a collision.Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in petharnesses or pet carriers that are secured byseat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-INRECOMMENDATIONSA long break-in period is not required for theengine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) inyour vehicle.Drive moderately during the first 300 miles(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) aredesirable.While cruising, brief full-throttle accelerationwithin the limits of local traffic laws contributesto a good break-in. Wide-open throttle accelera-tion in low gear can be detrimental and shouldbe avoided.The engine oil installed in the engine at thefactory is a high-quality energy conserving typelubricant. Oil changes should be consistent withanticipated climate conditions under which ve-hicle operations will occur. For the recom-mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining YourVehicle”.

CAUTION!Never use Non-Detergent Oil or StraightMineral Oil in the engine or damage mayresult.

NOTE:A new engine may consume some oil duringits first few thousand miles (kilometers) ofoperation. This should be considered a nor-mal part of the break-in and not interpretedas an indication of difficulty.

Additional Requirements For DieselEngine — If EquippedDuring the first 900 miles (1500 km) avoidheavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle. Do notexceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible enginespeed for each gear. Change gear in good time.Do not shift down a gear manually in order tobrake.

56

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting PassengersNEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THECARGO AREA.

WARNING!• Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interiorheat build-up may cause serious injury ordeath.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured or killed.



Exhaust Gas

WARNING!Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They con-tain carbon monoxide (CO), which is color-less and odorless. Breathing it can make youunconscious and can eventually poison you.To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safetytips:• Do not run the engine in a closed garage

or in confined areas any longer thanneeded to move your vehicle in or out ofthe area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that allwindows are closed and the climate con-trol BLOWER switch is set at high speed.DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehiclewith the engine running, adjust your heatingor cooling controls to force outside air intothe vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxideentry into the vehicle body is a properly main-tained engine exhaust system.Whenever a change is noticed in the sound ofthe exhaust system, when exhaust fumes canbe detected inside the vehicle, or when theunderside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,have a competent mechanic inspect the com-plete exhaust system and adjacent body areasfor broken, damaged, deteriorated, or misposi-tioned parts. Open seams or loose connectionscould permit exhaust fumes to seep into thepassenger compartment. In addition, inspectthe exhaust system each time the vehicle israised for lubrication or oil change. Replace asrequired.

57

Safety Checks You Should MakeInside The VehicleSeat BeltsInspect the belt system periodically, checkingfor cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged partsmust be replaced immediately. Do not disas-semble or modify the system.Front seat belt assemblies must be replacedafter a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies mustbe replaced after a collision if they have beendamaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,etc.). If there is any question regarding belt orretractor condition, replace the belt.Air Bag Warning Light

The light should come on and re-main on for four to eight secondsas a bulb check when the ignitionswitch is first turned ON. If the lightis not lit during starting, see yourauthorized dealer. If the light stays

on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have thesystem checked by an authorized dealer.

DefrosterCheck operation by selecting the defrost modeand place the blower control on high speed. Youshould be able to feel the air directed againstthe windshield. See your authorized dealer forservice if your defroster is inoperable.Floor Mat Safety InformationAlways use floor mats designed to fit the foot-well of your vehicle. Use only floor mats thatleave the pedal area unobstructed and that arefirmly secured so that they cannot slip out ofposition and interfere with the pedals or impairsafe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!Pedals that cannot move freely can causeloss of vehicle control and increase the riskof serious personal injury.• Always make sure that floor mats are

properly attached to the floor mat fasten-ers.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Never place or install floor mats or other

floor coverings in the vehicle that cannotbe properly secured to prevent them frommoving and interfering with the pedals orthe ability to control the vehicle.

• Never put floor mats or other floor cover-ings on top of already installed floor mats.Additional floor mats and other coveringswill reduce the size of the pedal area andinterfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regularbasis. Always properly reinstall and securefloor mats that have been removed forcleaning.

• Always make sure that objects cannot fallinto the driver footwell while the vehicle ismoving. Objects can become trapped un-der the brake pedal and accelerator pedalcausing a loss of vehicle control.

(Continued)

58

WARNING! (Continued)• If required, mounting posts must be prop-

erly installed, if not equipped from thefactory.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installa-tion or mounting can cause interference withthe brake pedal and accelerator pedal opera-tion causing loss of control of the vehicle.

Periodic Safety Checks You ShouldMake Outside The VehicleTiresExamine tires for excessive tread wear anduneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,glass, or other objects lodged in the tread orsidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check thetires (including spare) for proper cold inflationpressure.

LightsHave someone observe the operation of brakelights and exterior lights while you work thecontrols. Check turn signal and high beamindicator lights on the instrument panel.Door LatchesCheck for positive closing, latching, and locking.Fluid LeaksCheck area under vehicle after overnight park-ing for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluidleaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or iffuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brakefluid leaks are suspected, the cause should belocated and corrected immediately.

59

3UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOURVEHICLE

• MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66• Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66• Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66• Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67• Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67• Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67• Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

• Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69• Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74• Uconnect® Phone Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75• Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78• Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect® Phone . . . . .79

• VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86• Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86• Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87• Voice Training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

61

• SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89• Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89• Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .90• Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90• Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two-Door Models . . . . . . . .90• Tip n’ Slide Seats — Two-Door Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91• Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92• Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93• Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two-Door Models . . . . . . . . . . . .94• Removing The Rear Seat — Two-Door Models . . . . . . . . . . . . .94• Replacing The Rear Seat — Two-Door Models . . . . . . . . . . . . .95• 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four-Door Models . . . . . . . . . .95

• TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96• LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

• Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97• Headlights And Position Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97• Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97• Headlights With Wipers (Available With Automatic HeadlightsOnly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

• Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98• Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98• Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98• High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99• Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99• Rear Fog Lights — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99• Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99• Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

62

• Headlight Leveling System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .100• WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

• Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102• Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102• Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103• Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

• TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103• ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .104

• To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104• To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105• To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105• To Resume Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105• To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105• To Accelerate For Passing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

• ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106• CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

• Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108• Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

• STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108• Glovebox Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108• Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109• Rear Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

• DUAL TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .109• Removing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models. . . . . . . . . . . .110• Installing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models . . . . . . . . . . . .111

• DUAL TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .112• Removing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models . . . . . . . . . . .112

63

• Installing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114• FREEDOM TOP™ THREE-PIECE MODULAR HARD TOP — IFEQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116• Front Panel(s) Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117• Freedom Top™ Storage Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118• Front Panel(s) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119• Front Panel(s) Installation With Rear Hard Top Removed. . . . . . .120• Rear Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120• Rear Hard Top Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

• DOOR FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122• Door Frame Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123• Door Frame Installation — Two-Door Models-If Equipped . . . . . .124• Door Frame Installation — Four-Door Models-If Equipped . . . . . .125

• SOFT TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127• Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128• Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130• Lowering The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133• Raising The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

• SOFT TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145• Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146• Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148• Folding Down The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151• Putting Up The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

• SUNRIDER® (TWO-DOOR MODELS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163• Opening The Sunrider® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164• Closing The Sunrider® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

64

• SUNRIDER® (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165• Opening The Sunrider® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165• Closing The Sunrider®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

• FOLDING WINDSHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167• Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars . . . . . . .168• Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars . . . . . . . .170

• REAR WINDOW FEATURES — HARD TOP ONLY . . . . . . . . .171• Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .171• Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

65

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night MirrorA single ball joint mirror is provided in thevehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixedposition at the windshield. The mirror installs onthe windshield button with a counterclockwiserotation and requires no tools for mounting. Themirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, andright for various drivers. The mirror should beadjusted to center on the view through the rearwindow.Headlight glare from vehicles behind you canbe reduced by moving the small control underthe mirror to the night position (toward the rearof the vehicle). The mirror should be adjustedwhile the small control under the mirror is set inthe day position (toward the windshield).

Outside MirrorsTo receive maximum benefit, adjust the outsidemirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of trafficwith a slight overlap of the view obtained on theinside mirror.

WARNING!Vehicles and other objects seen in the pas-senger side convex mirror will look smallerand farther away than they really are. Rely-ing too much on your passenger side mirrorcould cause you to collide with another ve-hicle or other object. Use your inside mirrorwhen judging the size or distance of a ve-hicle seen in the passenger side mirror.

Adjusting Rearview Mirror Outside Rearview Mirror

66

Automatic Dimming Mirror — IfEquippedThis mirror automatically adjusts for headlightglare from vehicles behind you. You can turn thefeature on or off by pressing the button at thebase of the mirror. A light to the left of the buttonwill illuminate to indicate when the dimmingfeature is activated. The sensor to the right ofthe button does not illuminate.NOTE:This feature is disabled when the vehicle ismoving in reverse.

CAUTION!To avoid damage to the mirror during clean-ing, never spray any cleaning solution di-rectly onto the mirror. Apply the solution ontoa clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

Power Mirrors — If EquippedThe power mirror switch is located on the centerof the instrument panel, below the climate con-trols. A rotary knob selects the left mirror, rightmirror or off position.

After selecting a mirror, move the knob in thesame direction you want the mirror to move.Use the center off position to guard againstaccidentally moving a mirror position.

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frostor ice. This feature can be activatedwhenever you turn on the rear windowdefroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear

Window Features” in “Understanding The Fea-tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

Vanity MirrorsVanity mirrors are located on the sun visors. Touse the mirrors, rotate the sun visor down andswing the mirror cover upward.

Automatic Dimming Mirror Power Mirror Switch

67

Uconnect® Phone — IFEQUIPPEDNOTE:For Uconnect® Phone with Navigation radio,refer to the Navigation radio Manual’s (sepa-rate booklet) Uconnect® Phone section.Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phonenumber with your mobile phone* using simplevoice commands (e.g., “Call”…“Jim”… “Work”

or “Dial”…“151-1234 -5555"). Your mobilephone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi-cle’s audio system; the system will automati-cally mute your radio when using theUconnect® Phone.* The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobilephone equipped with the Bluetooth®�Hands-Free Profile,� version 1.0 or higher.See Uconnect® website for supported phones.NOTE:For Uconnect® Phone customer support,visit the following website:• www.UconnectPhone.comUconnect® Phone allows you to transfer callsbetween the Uconnect® Phone and your mobilephone as you enter or exit your vehicle andenables you to mute the Uconnect® Phone’smicrophone for private conversation.The Uconnect® Phone is driven through yourBluetooth® “Hands-Free profile” mobile phone.Uconnect® Phone features Bluetooth® technol-ogy - the global standard that enables differentelectronic devices to connect to each other

without wires or a docking station, soUconnect® Phone works no matter where youstow your mobile phone (be it your purse,pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone isturned on and has been paired to the vehicle’sUconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone al-lows up to seven mobile phones to be linked tothe system. Only one linked (or paired) mobilephone can be used with the Uconnect® Phoneat a time. The Uconnect® Phone is available inEnglish, Dutch, French, German, Italian orSpanish languages (as equipped).

WARNING!Any voice commanded system should beused only in safe driving conditions followingall applicable laws, including laws regardingphone use. Your attention should be focusedon safely operating the vehicle. Failure to doso may result in a collision causing seriousinjury or death.

Vanity Mirror

68

• Uconnect® Phone Button

The radio or steering wheel con-trols (if equipped) will contain thetwo control buttons (Uconnect®Phone button and Voice Com-mand button) that will enable

you to access the system. When you press thebutton you will hear the word Uconnect® fol-lowed by a BEEP. The beep is your signal togive a command.NOTE:The driver side upper windshield trim con-tains the microphone for the Uconnect®Phone.

• Voice Command Button

Actual button location may varywith radio. The individual buttonsare described in the “Operation”section.

The Uconnect® Phone can be used withHands-Free Profile certified Bluetooth® mobilephones. Some phones may not support all the

Uconnect® Phone features. Refer to your mo-bile service provider or the phone manufacturerfor details.The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated withthe vehicle’s audio system. The volume of theUconnect® Phone can be adjusted either fromthe radio volume control knob or from thesteering wheel radio control, if so equipped.The radio display will be used for visual promptsfrom the Uconnect® Phone such as "CELL" orcaller ID on certain radios.

OperationVoice commands can be used to operate theUconnect® Phone and to navigate through theUconnect® Phone menu structure. Voice com-mands are required after most Uconnect®Phone prompts. You will be prompted for aspecific command and then guided through theavailable options.• Prior to giving a voice command, one must

wait for the beep, which follows the “Ready”prompt or another prompt.

• For certain operations, compound com-mands can be used. For example, instead ofsaying “Setup” and then “Phone Pairing.” thefollowing compound command can be said:“Setup Phone Pairing.”

• For each feature explanation in this section, onlythe compound form of the voice command isgiven. You can also break the commands intoparts and say each part of the command whenyou are asked for it. For example, you can usethe compound form voice command “Phone-book New Entry”, or you can break the com-pound form command into two voice com-mands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Pleaseremember, the Uconnect® Phone works bestwhen you talk in a normal conversational tone,as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

Natural SpeechYour Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses aNatural Language Voice Recognition (VR) en-gine.

69

Natural speech allows the user to speak com-mands in phrases or complete sentences. Thesystem filters out certain non-word utterancesand sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The systemhandles fill-in words such as “I would like to.”The system handles multiple inputs in the samephrase or sentence such as “make a phone call”and “to Kelly Smith.” For multiple inputs in thesame phrase or sentence, the system identifiesthe topic or context and provides the associatedfollow-up prompt such as “Who do you want tocall?” in the case where a phone call wasrequested but the specific name was not recog-nized.The system utilizes continuous dialog; when thesystem requires more information from the userit will ask a question to which the user canrespond without pressing the Voice Command

button on your steering wheel.Voice Command TreeRefer to “Voice Tree” in this section.Help CommandIf you need assistance at any prompt, or if youwant to know your options at any prompt, say

“Help” following the beep. The Uconnect®Phone will play all the options at any prompt ifyou ask for help.To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle,simply press the button and follow the au-dible prompts for directions. All Uconnect®Phone sessions begin with a press of the

button on the radio control head.Cancel CommandAt any prompt, after the beep, you can say“Cancel” and you will be returned to the mainmenu. However, in a few instances the systemwill take you back to the previous menu.Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone to a MobilePhoneTo begin using your Uconnect® Phone, youmust pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabledmobile phone (refer to “Introduction” section tolearn about the phone type).To complete the pairing process, you will needto reference your mobile phone owner’smanual. The Uconnect® website may also pro-vide detailed instructions for pairing.

The following are general phone to Uconnect®Phone pairing instructions:• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing.”• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a

Phone” and follow the audible prompts.• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal

Identification Number (PIN), which you willlater need to enter into your mobile phone.You can enter any four-digit PIN. You will notneed to remember this PIN after the initialpairing process.

• For identification purposes, you will beprompted to give the Uconnect® Phone aname for your mobile phone. Each mobilephone that is paired should be given a uniquephone name.

• You will then be asked to give your mobilephone a priority level between 1 and 7, with 1being the highest priority. You can pair up toseven mobile phones to your Uconnect®Phone. However, at any given time, only onemobile phone can be in use, connected to

70

your Uconnect® System. The priority allowsthe Uconnect® Phone to know which mobilephone to use if multiple mobile phones are inthe vehicle at the same time. For example, ifpriority 3 and priority 5 phones are present inthe vehicle, the Uconnect® Phone will usethe priority 3 mobile phone when you make acall. You can select to use a lower prioritymobile phone at any time (refer to “AdvancedPhone Connectivity”).

Dial by Saying a Number• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say “Dial.”• The system will prompt you to say the num-

ber you want to call.• For example, you can say “151-1234-5555.”• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone

number and then dial. The number will ap-pear in the display of certain radios.

Call by Saying a Name• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say “Call.”• The system will prompt you to say the name

of the person you want to call.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say the name of the person you wantto call. For example, you can say “John Doe.”where John Doe is a previously stored nameentry in the Uconnect® phonebook or down-loaded phonebook. To learn how to store aname in the phonebook, refer to “Add Namesto Your Uconnect® Phonebook.”

• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the nameand then dial the corresponding phone num-ber, which may appear in the display ofcertain radios.

Phonebook Download – AutomaticPhonebook Transfer from Mobile PhoneIf equipped and specifically supported by yourphone, Uconnect® Phone automatically downloadsnames (text names) and number entries from themobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth®

Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may sup-port this feature. See Uconnect® website for sup-ported phones.• To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect®)

Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call bySaying a Name” section.

• Automatic download and update, if sup-ported, begins as soon as the phoneBluetooth® wireless connection is made tothe Uconnect® Phone. For example, afteryou start the vehicle.

• Maximum of 1000 entries per phone will bedownloaded and updated every time a phoneis connected to the Uconnect® Phone.

• Depending on the maximum number of en-tries downloaded, there may be a short delaybefore the latest downloaded names can beused. Until then, if available, the previouslydownloaded phonebook is available for use.

• Only the phonebook of the currently con-nected mobile phone is accessible.

• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or themobile phones SIM card phonebook isdownloaded.

71

• This downloaded phonebook cannot be ed-ited or deleted on the Uconnect® Phone.These can only be edited on the mobilephone. The changes are transferred andupdated to Uconnect® Phone on the nextphone connection.

Add Names to Your Uconnect® PhonebookNOTE:Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebookis recommended when the vehicle is not inmotion.• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say “Phonebook New Entry”.• When prompted, say the name of the new

entry. Use of long names helps the VoiceCommand and it is recommended. For ex-ample, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” in-stead of “Bob”.

• When prompted, enter the number designa-tion (e.g., “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or“Other”). This will allow you to store multiplenumbers for each phonebook entry, ifdesired.

• When prompted, recite the phone number forthe phonebook entry that you are adding.

After you are finished adding an entry into thephonebook, you will be given the opportunity toadd more phone numbers to the current entry orto return to the main menu.The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter upto 32 names in the phonebook with each namehaving up to four associated phone numbersand designations. Each language has a sepa-rate 32-name phonebook accessible only in thatlanguage. In addition, if equipped and sup-ported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone auto-matically downloads mobile phone’s phone-book.Edit Uconnect® Phonebook EntriesNOTE:Editing phonebook entries is recommendedwhen the vehicle is not in motion.Automatic downloaded phonebook entries can-not be deleted or edited.• Press the button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the followingbeep, say “Phonebook Edit.”

• You will then be asked for the name of thephonebook entry that you wish to edit.

• Next, choose the number designation (home,work, mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.

• When prompted, recite the new phone num-ber for the phonebook entry that you areediting.

After you are finished editing an entry in thephonebook, you will be given the opportunity toedit another entry in the phonebook, call thenumber you just edited, or return to the mainmenu.“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add anotherphone number to a name entry that alreadyexists in the phonebook. For example, the entryJohn Doe may have a mobile and a homenumber, but you can add “John Doe’s” worknumber later using the “Phonebook Edit” fea-ture.

72

Delete Uconnect® Phonebook EntryNOTE:Editing phonebook entries is recommendedwhen the vehicle is not in motion.

• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say “Phonebook Delete.”• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu,

you will then be asked for the name of theentry that you wish to delete. You can eithersay the name of a phonebook entry that youwish to delete or you can say “List Names” tohear a list of the entries in the phonebookfrom which you choose. To select one of theentries from the list, press the buttonwhile the Uconnect® Phone is playing thedesired entry and say “Delete.”

• After you enter the name, the Uconnect®Phone will ask you which designation youwish to delete; home, work, mobile, other, orall. Say the designation you wish to delete.

• Note that only the phonebook entry in thecurrent language is deleted.

• Automatic downloaded phonebook entriescannot be deleted or edited.

Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® PhonebookEntries• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say “Phonebook Erase All.”• The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify

that you wish to delete all the entries from thephonebook.

• After confirmation, the phonebook entries willbe deleted.

• Note that only the phonebook in the currentlanguage is deleted.

• Automatic downloaded phonebook entriescannot be deleted or edited.

List All Uconnect® Phonebook Names• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say “Phonebook List Names.”• The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of

all the phonebook entries, including thedownloaded phonebook entries, if available.

• To call one of the names in the list, press thebutton during the playing of the desired

name, and say “Call.”NOTE:The user can also exercise “Edit” or “De-lete” operations at this point.

• The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt youas to the number designation you wish tocall.

• The selected number will be dialed.

73

Phone Call FeaturesThe following features can be accessed throughthe Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are avail-able on your mobile service plan. For example,if your mobile service plan provides three-waycalling, this feature can be accessed throughthe Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobileservice provider for the features that you have.Answer or Reject an Incoming Call – NoCall Currently in ProgressWhen you receive a call on your mobile phone,the Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicleaudio system, if on, and will ask if you would liketo answer the call. Press the button to ac-cept the call. To reject the call, press and holdthe button until you hear a single beep,indicating that the incoming call was rejected.Answer or Reject an Incoming Call – CallCurrently in ProgressIf a call is currently in progress and you haveanother incoming call, you will hear the samenetwork tones for call waiting that you normallyhear when using your mobile phone. Press the

button to place the current call on hold andanswer the incoming call.

NOTE:The Uconnect® Phone compatible phonesin the market today do not support rejectingan incoming call when another call is inprogress. Therefore, the user can only an-swer an incoming call or ignore it.

Making a Second Call While Current Call inProgressTo make a second call while you are currentlyon a call, press the button and say “Dial” or“Call” followed by the phone number or phone-book entry you wish to call. The first call will beon hold while the second call is in progress. Togo back to the first call, refer to “TogglingBetween Calls.” To combine two calls, refer to“Conference Call.”Place/Retrieve A Call From HoldTo put a call on hold, press the button untilyou hear a single beep. This indicates that thecall is on hold. To bring the call back from hold,press and hold the button until you hear asingle beep.

Toggling Between CallsIf two calls are in progress (one active and oneon hold), press the button until you hear asingle beep, indicating that the active and holdstatus of the two calls have switched. Only onecall can be placed on hold at one time.Conference CallWhen two calls are in progress (one active andone on hold), press and hold the button untilyou hear a double beep indicating that the twocalls have been joined into one conference call.Three-Way CallingTo initiate three-way calling, press the but-ton while a call is in progress, and make asecond phone call, as described under “Makinga Second Call While Current Call in Progress.”After the second call has established, press andhold the button until you hear a double beep,indicating that the two calls have been joinedinto one conference call.

74

Call TerminationTo end a call in progress, momentarily press the

button. Only the active call(s) will be termi-nated and if there is a call on hold, it will becomethe new active call. If the active call is termi-nated by the phone far end, a call on hold maynot become active automatically. This is cellphone-dependent. To bring the call back fromhold, press and hold the button until youhear a single beep.Redial• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say “Redial.”• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last num-

ber that was dialed from your mobile phone.NOTE:This may not be the last number dialed fromthe Uconnect® Phone.

Call ContinuationCall continuation is the progression of a phonecall on the Uconnect® Phone after the vehicleignition has been switched to OFF. Call continu-ation functionality available on the vehicle canbe any one of three types:• After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call

can continue on the Uconnect® Phone eitheruntil the call ends, or until the vehicle batterycondition dictates cessation of the call on theUconnect® Phone and transfer of the call tothe mobile phone.

• After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call cancontinue on the Uconnect® Phone for acertain duration, after which the call is auto-matically transferred from the Uconnect®Phone to the mobile phone.

• An active call is automatically transferred tothe mobile phone after the ignition is cycledto OFF.

Uconnect® Phone FeaturesLanguage SelectionTo change the language that the Uconnect®Phone is using:• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say the name of the language you wishto switch to (English, Dutch, French, Ger-man, Italian, or Spanish, if so equipped).

• Continue to follow the system prompts tocomplete language selection.

After selecting one of the languages, allprompts and voice commands will be in thatlanguage.NOTE:After every Uconnect® Phone language changeoperation, only the language-specific 32-namephonebook is usable. The paired phone nameis not language-specific and usable across alllanguages.

75

Emergency Assistance — If EquippedIf you are in an emergency and the mobilephone is reachable:• Pick up the phone and manually dial the

emergency number for your area.If the phone is not reachable and theUconnect® Phone is operational, you mayreach the emergency number as follows:• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say “Emergency” and the Uconnect®Phone will instruct the paired mobile phoneto call the emergency number.

NOTE:

• The default number is 112. The numberdialed may not be applicable with theavailable mobile service and area.

• If supported, this number may be pro-grammable on some systems. To do this,press the button and say “Setup,” fol-lowed by “Emergency.”

• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly loweryour chances of successfully making aphone call as to that for the mobile phonedirectly.

WARNING!To use you Uconnect® Phone System in anemergency, your mobile phone must be:• turned on,• paired to the Uconnect® System,• and have network coverage.

Breakdown Service — If EquippedIf you need Breakdown service:• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say “Breakdown service.”NOTE:The Breakdown service number has to besetup before using. To setup, press thebutton and say “Setup, Breakdown Ser-

vice” and follow prompts.

PagingTo learn how to page, refer to “Working withAutomated Systems.” Paging works properlyexcept for pagers of certain companies, whichtime out a little too soon to work properly withthe Uconnect® Phone.Voice Mail CallingTo learn how to access your voice mail, refer to“Working with Automated Systems.”Working with Automated SystemsThis method is used in instances where onegenerally has to press numbers on the mobilephone keypad while navigating through an au-tomated telephone system.You can use your Uconnect® Phone to accessa voice mail system or an automated service,such as a paging service or automated cus-tomer service. Some services require immedi-ate response selection. In some instances, thatmay be too quick for use of the Uconnect®Phone.

76

When calling a number with your Uconnect®Phone that normally requires you to enter in atouch-tone sequence on your mobile phonekeypad, you can press the button and saythe sequence you wish to enter followed by theword “Send.” For example, if required to enteryour PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), youcan press the button and say, “3 7 4 6 #Send.” Saying a number, or sequence of num-bers, followed by “Send,” is also to be used fornavigating through an automated customer ser-vice center menu structure, and to leave anumber on a pager.You can also send stored Uconnect® Phone-book entries as tones for fast and easy accessto voice mail and pager entries. To use thisfeature, dial the number you wish to call andthen press the button and say “Send.” Thesystem will prompt you to enter the name ornumber and say the name of the phonebookentry you wish to send. The Uconnect® Phonewill then send the corresponding phone numberassociated with the phonebook entry, as tonesover the phone.

NOTE:

• You may not hear all of the tones due tomobile phone network configurations;this is normal.

• Some paging and voice mail systemshave system time out settings that are tooshort and may not allow the use of thisfeature.

Barge In – Overriding PromptsThe “Voice Command” button can be usedwhen you wish to skip part of a prompt andissue your voice command immediately. Forexample, if a prompt is asking “Would you like topair a phone, clear a…,” you could press the

button and say, “Pair a Phone” to selectthat option without having to listen to the rest ofthe voice prompt.

Turning Confirmation Prompts On/OffTurning confirmation prompts off will stop thesystem from confirming your choices (e.g., theUconnect® Phone will not repeat a phone num-ber before you dial it).• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say:• “Setup Confirmations Prompts On”• “Setup Confirmations Prompts Off”

Phone and Network Status IndicatorsIf available on the radio and/or on a premiumdisplay such as the instrument panel cluster,and supported by your mobile phone, theUconnect® Phone will provide notification toinform you of your phone and network statuswhen you are attempting to make a phone callusing Uconnect® Phone. The status is given forroaming, network signal strength, phone batterystrength, etc.

77

Dialing Using the Mobile Phone KeypadYou can dial a phone number with your mobilephone keypad and still use the Uconnect®Phone (while dialing via the mobile phone key-pad, the user must exercise caution and takeprecautionary safety measures). By dialing anumber with your paired Bluetooth® mobilephone, the audio will be played through yourvehicles audio system. The Uconnect® Phonewill work the same as if you dial the numberusing Voice Command.NOTE:Certain brands of mobile phones do notsend the dial ring to the Uconnect® Phoneto play it on the vehicle audio system, soyou will not hear it. Under this situation,after successfully dialing a number the usermay feel that the call did not go througheven though the call is in progress. Onceyour call is answered, you will hear theaudio.

Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off)When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you willstill be able to hear the conversation comingfrom the other party, but the other party will notbe able to hear you. To mute the Uconnect®Phone:• Press the button.• Following the beep, say “Mute.”To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:• Press the button.• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”

Advanced Phone ConnectivityTransfer Call to and from Mobile PhoneThe Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls tobe transferred from your mobile phone to theUconnect® Phone without terminating the call.To transfer an ongoing call from yourUconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to theUconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the

button and say “Transfer Call.”

Connect or Disconnect Link Between theUconnect® Phone and Mobile PhoneYour mobile phone can be paired with manydifferent electronic devices, but can only beactively connected with one electronic device ata time.If you would like to connect or disconnect theBluetooth® connection between a Uconnect®Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect®Phone, follow the instructions described in yourmobile phone User’s Manual.List Paired Mobile Phone Names• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing.”• When prompted, say “List Phones.”

78

• The Uconnect® Phone will play the phonenames of all paired mobile phones in orderfrom the highest to the lowest priority. To“select” or “delete” a paired phone beingannounced, press the button and say“Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next twosections for an alternate way to “select” or“delete” a paired phone.

Select Another Mobile PhoneThis feature allows you to select and start usinganother phone paired with the Uconnect®Phone.• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say “Setup Select Phone” and followthe prompts.

• You can also press the button at any timewhile the list is being played, and thenchoose the phone that you wish to select.

• The selected phone will be used for the nextphone call. If the selected phone is notavailable, the Uconnect® Phone will return to

using the highest priority phone present in ornear (approximately within 30 ft. (9 m)) thevehicle.

Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired MobilePhones• Press the button to begin.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following

beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing.”• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow

the prompts.• You can also press the button at any

time while the list is being played, and thenchoose the phone you wish to delete.

Things You Should Know AboutYour Uconnect® PhoneUconnect® Phone TutorialTo hear a brief tutorial of the Uconnect® Phonefeatures, press the button and say“Uconnect® Tutorial.”

Voice TrainingFor users experiencing difficulty with theUconnect® Phone recognizing their voice com-mands or numbers, the Uconnect® PhoneVoice Training feature may be used. To enterthis training mode, follow one of the two follow-ing procedures:From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g.,from radio mode)• Press and hold the button for five sec-

onds until the session begins, or,• Press the button and say the “Voice

Training”, “System Training”, “Start VoiceTraining”command.

Repeat the words and phrases when promptedby the Uconnect® Phone. For best results, theVoice Training session should be completedwhen the vehicle is parked with the enginerunning, all windows closed, and the blower fanswitched OFF.This procedure may be repeated with a newuser. The system will adapt to the last trainedvoice only.

79

To restore the Voice Command system to fac-tory default settings, enter the Voice Trainingsession via the above procedure and follow theprompts.Voice Command• For best performance, adjust the rearview

mirror to provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gapbetween the overhead console (if equipped)and the mirror.

• Always wait for the beep before speaking.• Speak normally without pausing, just as you

would speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

• Make sure that no one other than you isspeaking during a Voice Command period.

• Performance is maximized under:• low-to-medium blower setting,

• low-to-medium vehicle speed,• low road noise,• smooth road surface,• fully closed windows,• dry weather condition.• Even though the system is designed for

users speaking in European English, Dutch,French, German, Italian, or Spanish accents,the system may not always work for some.

• When navigating through an automated sys-tem such as voice mail, or when sending apage, at the end of speaking the digit string,make sure to say “Send.”

• Storing names in the phonebook when thevehicle is not in motion is recommended.

• It is not recommended to store similar sound-ing names in the Uconnect® Phonebook.

• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect®Phone Local) name recognition rate is opti-mized when the entries are not similar.

• Numbers must be spoken in single digits.“800” must be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not“eight hundred.”

• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).• Even though international dialing for most

number combinations is supported, someshortcut dialing number combinations maynot be supported.

• In a convertible vehicle, system performancemay be compromised with the convertible topdown.

80

Phone Far End Audio Performance• Audio quality is maximized under:• low-to-medium blower setting,• low-to-medium vehicle speed,• low road noise,• smooth road surface,• fully closed windows,• dry weather conditions, and• operation from the driver seat.• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo,

and loudness to a large degree rely on thephone and network, and not the Uconnect®Phone.

• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes bereduced by lowering the in-vehicle audiovolume.

• In a convertible vehicle, system performancemay be compromised with the convertible topdown.

Bluetooth® Communication LinkMobile phones have been found to lose connec-tion to the Uconnect® Phone. When this hap-pens, the connection can generally be reestab-lished by switching the phone off/on. Yourmobile phone is recommended to remain inBluetooth® ON mode.Power-UpAfter switching the ignition key from OFF toeither the ON or ACC position, or after a lan-guage change, you must wait at least fifteenseconds prior to using the system.

81

Voice CommandsPrimary Alternate (s)zeroonetwothreefourfivesixseveneightnineasterisk (*) starplus (+)hash (#)all all of themBreakdown servicecall

Primary Alternate (s)cancelconfirmationprompts

confirmation

continuedeletedialdownloadDutch NetherlandseditemergencyEnglishdelete all erase allEspanolFrancaisGerman Deutschhelphome

Primary Alternate (s)Italian Italianolanguagelist nameslist phonesmain menu return to main menumobilemutemute offnew entrynootherpair a phonephone pairing pairingphonebook phone bookpreviousredialselect phone select

85

Primary Alternate (s)sendset up phone settings or

phone set uptransfer callUconnect® Tutorialvoice trainingworkyes

VOICE COMMAND — IFEQUIPPED

Voice Command System Operation

The Uconnect® Voice Command sys-tem allows you to control your AM,FM radio, disc player, USB MassStorage Class device, iPod® family ofdevices, Bluetooth® Streaming Audiodevice, and a memo recorder.

NOTE:Take care to speak into the Voice InterfaceSystem as calmly and normally as possible.The ability of the Voice Interface System torecognize user voice commands may benegatively affected by rapid speaking or araised voice level.

WARNING!Any voice commanded system should beused only in safe driving conditions followingall applicable laws, including laws regardingphone use. Your attention should be focusedon safely operating the vehicle. Failure to doso may result in a collision causing seriousinjury or death.

When you press the Voice Command but-ton, you will hear a beep. The beep is yoursignal to give a command.

NOTE:If you do not say a command within a fewseconds, the system will present you with alist of options.

If you ever wish to interrupt the system while itlists options, press the Voice Command

button, listen for the beep, and say yourcommand.Pressing the Voice Command button whilethe system is speaking is known as “barging in.”The system will be interrupted, and after thebeep, you can add or change commands. Thiswill become helpful once you start to learn theoptions.NOTE:At any time, you can say the words “Can-cel,” “Help” or “Main Menu.”

These commands are universal and can beused from any menu. All other commands canbe used depending upon the active application.When using this system, you should speakclearly and at a normal speaking volume.

86

The system will best recognize your speech ifthe windows are closed, and the heater/airconditioning fan is set to low.At any point, if the system does not recognizeone of your commands, you will be prompted torepeat it.To hear the first available Menu, press the VoiceCommand button and say “Help” or “MainMenu.”

CommandsThe Voice Command system understands twotypes of commands. Universal commands areavailable at all times. Local commands areavailable if the supported radio mode is active.Changing The Volume1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Com-mand button.2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob toadjust the volume to a comfortable level whilethe Voice Command system is speaking.Please note the volume setting for Voice Com-mand is different than the audio system.

Main MenuStart a dialogue by pressing the Voice Com-mand button. You may say “Main Menu” toswitch to the main menu.In this mode, you can say the following com-mands:• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®

Streaming mode)• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)Radio AM (Or Radio Long Wave Or RadioMedium Wave — If Equipped)To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “RadioAM.” In this mode, you may say the followingcommands:• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)• “Next Station” (to select the next station)

• “Previous Station” (to select the previousstation)

• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)Radio FMTo switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “RadioFM.” In this mode, you may say the followingcommands:• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)• “Next Station” (to select the next station)• “Previous Station” (to select the previous

station)• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)Disc ModeTo switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In thismode, you may say the following commands:• “Track” (#) (to change the track)• “Next Track” (to play the next track)• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

87

USB ModeTo switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In thismode, you may say the following commands:• “Next Track” (to play the next track)• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)• “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name,

Album Name, Track Name, etc.)Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) ModeTo switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode,say “Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, youmay say the following commands:• “Next Track” (to play the next track)• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)• “List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track,

etc.)Memo ModeTo switch to the voice recorder mode, say“Memo.” In this mode, you may say the follow-ing commands:• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) —

During the recording, you may press the

Voice Command button to stop record-ing. You proceed by saying one of the follow-ing commands:– “Save” (to save the memo)

– “Continue” (to continue recording)

– “Delete” (to delete the recording)• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded

memos) — During the playback you maypress the Voice Command button tostop playing memos. You proceed by sayingone of the following commands:

• “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)• “Next” (to play the next memo)• “Previous” (to play the previous memo)• “Delete” (to delete a memo)• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)System SetupTo switch to system setup, you may say one ofthe following:• “Change to system setup”• “Main menu system setup”

• “Switch to system setup”• “Change to setup”• “Main menu setup” or• “Switch to setup”In this mode, you may say the following com-mands:• “Language English”• “Language French”• “Language Spanish”• “Language Dutch”• “Language Deutsch”• “Language Italian”• “Tutorial”• “Voice Training”NOTE:Keep in mind that you have to press theVoice Command button first and waitfor the beep before speaking the “Barge In”commands.

88

Voice TrainingFor users experiencing difficulty with the systemrecognizing their voice commands or numbersthe Uconnect® Voice “Voice Training” featuremay be used.1. Press the Voice Command button, say“System Setup” and once you are in that menuthen say “Voice Training.” This will train yourown voice to the system and will improve rec-ognition.2. Repeat the words and phrases whenprompted by Uconnect® Voice. For best results,the Voice Training session should be completedwhen the vehicle is parked, engine running, allwindows closed, and the blower fan switchedoff. This procedure may be repeated with a newuser. The system will adapt to the last trainedvoice only.

SEATSSeats are part of the Occupant Restraint Sys-tem of the vehicle.

WARNING!• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped with seatsand seat belts. In a collision, people ridingin these areas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.


Front Seat AdjustmentThe seat can be adjusted forward or rearwardby using a bar located by the front of the seatcushion, near the floor. While sitting in the seat,lift up on the bar located under the seat cushionand move the seat forward or rearward. Re-lease the bar once you have reached the de-sired position. Then, using body pressure, moveforward and rearward on the seat to be sure thatthe seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!• Adjusting a seat while driving may be

dangerous. Moving a seat while drivingcould result in loss of control which couldcause a collision and serious injury ordeath.

• Seats should be adjusted before fasteningthe seat belts and while the vehicle isparked. Serious injury or death could resultfrom a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Manual Seat Adjustment

89

Manual Seat Height Adjustment — IfEquippedThe driver’s seat height can be raised or low-ered by using the ratcheting handle, located onthe outboard side of the seat. Pull upward onthe handle to raise the seat; push downward onthe handle to lower the seat.

Front Seatback ReclineLean forward before lifting the handle, then leanback to the desired position and release thehandle. Lift the handle to return the seatback toan upright position.

WARNING!Do not ride with the seatback reclined so thatthe shoulder belt is no longer resting againstyour chest. In a collision you could slideunder the seat belt, which could result inserious injury or death.

Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat —Two-Door ModelsPull upward on the recline lever (toward the rearof the vehicle) and slide the entire seat forward.

Seat Height Adjustment

Recline Lever

Easy Entry Lever

90

To return the seat to a sitting position, rotate theseatback upright until it locks and push the seatrearward until the track locks.NOTE:

• The front passenger seats have a trackmemory, which returns the seat to justpast the halfway point of the track regard-less of its original position.

• The recliner and easy entry levers shouldnot be used during the automatic return-ing of the seat to its sitting position.

Tip n’ Slide Seats — Two-DoorModelsThis feature allows the front seats to be rotatedtoward the instrument panel to allow easierentry into the rear seats.Driver’s SeatPull upward on the recline lever and bring theseatback to its full forward position.

Rotate the entire seat assembly toward theinstrument panel.

Passenger SeatIn addition to Easy Entry, the front passengerseat is also equipped with Tip n’ Slide. Thisfeature allows for easier entry for rear passen-gers.

Easy Entry Seat

Recline Lever

Tip n’ Slide

91

Pull upward on the recline lever and slide theentire seat forward (Easy Entry).

With the seat forward, pull the entire seat as-sembly toward the instrument panel.

Heated Seats — If EquippedOn some models, the front driver and passen-ger seats may be equipped with heaters in boththe seat cushions and seatbacks.There are two heated seat switches that allowthe driver and passenger to operate the seatsindependently. The controls for each seat arelocated on a switch bank near the bottom centerof the instrument panel.

You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heatsettings. Amber indicator lights in each switchindicate the level of heat in use. Two indicatorlights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW andnone for OFF.

Press the switch once to selectHIGH-level heating. Press theswitch a second time to selectLOW-level heating. Press theswitch a third time to shut the heat-

ing elements OFF.When the HIGH-level setting is selected, theheater will provide a boosted heat level duringthe initial stages of operation. Then, the heatoutput will drop to the normal HIGH-level. If theHIGH-level setting is selected, the system willautomatically switch to LOW-level after approxi-mately 30 minutes of continuous operation. Atthat time, the number of illuminated LEDschanges from two to one, indicating the change.The LOW-level setting will turn OFF automati-cally after approximately 30 minutes.

Easy Entry Lever

Tip n’ Slide

92

NOTE:When a heat setting is selected, heat will befelt within two to five minutes.

WARNING!• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the

skin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or otherphysical condition must exercise carewhen using the seat heater. It may causeburns even at low temperatures, especiallyif used for long periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat orseatback that insulates against heat, suchas a blanket or cushion. This may causethe seat heater to overheat. Sitting in aseat that has been overheated couldcause serious burns due to the increasedsurface temperature of the seat.

Head RestraintsHead restraints are designed to reduce the riskof injury by restricting head movement in theevent of a rear impact. Head restraints shouldbe adjusted so that the top of the head restraintis located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!The head restraints for all occupants must beproperly adjusted prior to operating the ve-hicle or occupying a seat. Head restraintsshould never be adjusted while the vehicle isin motion. Driving a vehicle with the headrestraints improperly adjusted or removedcould cause serious injury or death in theevent of a collision.

Front Head RestraintsTo raise the head restraint, pull upward on thehead restraint. To lower the head restraint,press the adjustment button, located on thebase of the head restraint, and push downwardon the head restraint.

Rear Head RestraintsThe rear seat is equipped with nonadjustablehead restraints. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Ve-hicle” for information on child seat tether rout-ing.

Adjustment Button

93

Fold And Tumble Rear Seat —Two-Door ModelsNOTE:

• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may benecessary to reposition the front seats.

• Be sure that the front seats are fullyupright and positioned forward. This willallow the rear seat to fold down easily.

1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold theseatback forward.

2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.

3. Return the seat to the normal position.4. Raise the rear seatback using the assiststrap and firmly lock the seat into position.

Removing The Rear Seat —Two-Door Models

WARNING!• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo

area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured or killed.



• In a collision, you or others in your vehiclecould be injured if seats are not properlylatched to their floor attachments. Alwaysbe sure that the seats are fully latched.

1. Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1and 2 under “Fold And Tumble Rear Seat” in thissection.

Rear Seat Release

Folding Rear Seat

94

2. Press down on the release bar on each side,and pull the seat out and away from the lowerbracket.3. Remove the seat from the vehicle.

Replacing The Rear Seat —Two-Door ModelsReverse the steps for removing the seat.

WARNING!• To help protect against personal injury,

passengers should not be seated in therear cargo area with the rear seat foldeddown or removed from the vehicle.

• The rear cargo space is intended for loadcarrying purposes only, not for passengerswho should sit in seats and use seat belts.

60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat —Four-Door ModelsTo provide additional storage area, each rearseat can be folded flat to allow for extendedcargo space and still maintain some rear seat-ing room.

NOTE:

• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may benecessary to reposition the front seat toits mid-track position.

• Be sure that the front seats are fullyupright and positioned forward. This willallow the rear seat to fold down easily.

WARNING!• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo

area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured or killed.



Release Bar Location

95

To Fold Down The Rear SeatLocate the release lever (upper outboard side ofseat), and lift it upward until the seatback re-leases.

Slowly fold down the seatback.

To Raise The Rear SeatRaise the seatback and lock it into place. Ifinterference from the cargo area prevents theseatback from fully locking, you will have diffi-culty returning the seat to its proper position.NOTE:If the rear seatback is not fully latched, thecenter shoulder belt will not be able to beextended for use. If you cannot extend thecenter shoulder belt, make sure your seat-back is fully latched.

WARNING!Be certain that the seatback is securelylocked into position. If the seatback in notsecurely locked into position the seat will notprovide the proper stability for child seatsand/or passengers. An improperly latchedseat could cause serious injury.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THEHOODRelease both the hood latches.

Raise the hood and locate the safety latch,located in the middle of the hood opening. Pushthe safety latch to the left side of the vehicle, toopen the hood. You may have to push downslightly on the hood before pushing the safetylatch. Insert the support rod into the slot on thehood.

Release Levers Hood Latch

96

To close the hood, remove the support rod fromthe hood panel and place it in the retaining clip.Lower the hood slowly. Secure both of the hoodlatches.

WARNING!Be sure the hood is fully latched beforedriving your vehicle. If the hood is not fullylatched, it could open when the vehicle is inmotion and block your vision. Failure tofollow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death.

LIGHTS

Multifunction LeverThe multifunction lever controls the operation ofthe position lights, headlights, headlight beamselection, passing lights (flash-to-pass), foglights (if equipped), instrument panel light dim-ming and turn signals. The lever is located onthe left side of the steering column.

Headlights And Position LightsTurn the end of the multifunction lever to the firstdetent for position lights and instrument panellights. Turn to the second detent for headlightoperation.NOTE:Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-spheric conditions. This will usually clear asatmospheric conditions change to allow thecondensation to change back into a vapor.Turning the lamps on will usually acceleratethe clearing process.

Automatic Headlights — If EquippedThis system automatically turns the headlightson or off according to ambient light levels. Toturn the system on, turn the end of the multi-function lever to the AUTO position (third de-tent). When the system is on, the HeadlightTime Delay feature is also on. This means theheadlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds afteryou turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion. To turn the Automatic System off, turn theend of the multifunction lever out of the AUTOposition.

Multifunction Lever Headlight Switch

97

NOTE:The engine must be running before theheadlights will turn on in the Automaticmode.

Headlights With Wipers (AvailableWith Automatic Headlights Only)When this feature is active, the headlights willturn on approximately 10 seconds after thewipers are turned on if the multifunction lever isplaced in the AUTO position. In addition, theheadlights will turn off when the wipers areturned off if they were turned on by this feature.

The Headlights with Wipers feature can beturned on or off through the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC) — if equipped. Referto “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for fur-ther information.

Turn SignalsMove the multifunction lever up or down and thearrows on each side of the instrument clusterflash to show proper operation of the front andrear turn signal lights.

NOTE:

• If either light remains on and does notflash, or there is a very fast flash rate,check for a defective outside light bulb. Ifan indicator fails to light when the lever ismoved, it would suggest that the indicatorbulb is defective.

• A tone will chime if the turn signals areleft on for more than 1 mile (2 km).

Lane Change AssistTap the lever up or down once, without movingbeyond the detent, and the turn signal (right orleft) will flash three times then automatically turnoff.

Lights-On ReminderIf the headlights or parking lights are on after theignition is turned OFF, the high beam indicatorlight will remain illuminated and a chime willsound when the driver’s door is opened.

Headlight Switch

Turn Signal Operation

98

High/Low Beam SwitchPush the multifunction lever away from you toswitch the headlights to high beam. Pull thelever toward you to switch the headlights backto low beam.

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped

The front fog light switch is in the multi-function lever. To activate the front foglights, turn on the position lights or head-lights and pull out the end of the lever.

Rear Fog Lights — If Equipped

To activate the rear fog lights, turn onthe front position lights or headlights,pull out the end of the multifunctionlever and rotate the lever to the lastdetent.

NOTE:The headlights will always be on when therear fog lamps are activated.

Instrument Panel DimmerRotate the center portion of the lever to theextreme bottom position to fully dim the instru-ment panel lights and prevent the interior lightsfrom illuminating when a door is opened.Rotate the center portion of the lever up toincrease the brightness of the instrument panellights when the parking lights or headlights areon.Rotate the center portion of the lever upward tothe next detent position to brighten the odom-eter and radio when the parking lights or head-lights are on.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward tothe last detent to turn on the interior lighting.

Interior LightsThe overhead light will come on when a door isopened. It may also be turned on by rotating thecontrol for the dimmer switch on the multifunc-tion lever fully upward.The overhead light will automatically turn off inapproximately 10 minutes if a door is left openor the dimmer control is left in the dome lightposition. Turn the ignition switch ON to restorethe overhead light operation.

Front Fog Light Switch

Dimmer Control

99

Cargo LampThe courtesy and dome lights will turn on whenthe front doors are opened, by rotating thecontrol for the dimmer switch on the multifunc-tion lever fully upward, or if equipped, when theUNLOCK button is pressed on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.The sports bar reading lights (available onfour-door models) can be turned on by pressingthe switches, located on either side of the lens.Press a switch a second time to turn the light off.

The rear cargo light may be turned on bypressing the lens. Press the lens a second timeto turn the light off.

When a door is open and the interior lights areon, rotating the dimmer control to the extremebottom position will cause all the interior lights toturn off. This is also known as the “Party” modebecause it allows the doors to stay open forextended periods of time without dischargingthe vehicle’s battery.

Headlight Leveling System — IfEquippedThis system allows the driver to maintain properheadlight beam position with the road surfaceregardless of vehicle load. The headlight level-ing switch is located on the lower switch bank(below the climate controls).

To operate: With the low beams on,push the upper side or lower sideof the headlight leveling switch untilthe appropriate number, which cor-responds to the load listed on the

following chart, illuminates on the switch.NOTE:Headlight Leveling will not activate when theparking lights or high beam headlights areon.

Sports Bar Reading Light

Rear Cargo Light

100

0 Driver only, or driver and front passenger.1 All seating positions occupied.2 All seating positions occupied, plus an evenly distributed load in the lug-

gage compartment. The total weight of passengers and load does notexceed the maximum load capacity of the vehicle.

3 Driver, plus an evenly distributed load in the luggage compartment. Thetotal weight of the driver and load does not exceed the maximum loadcapacity of the vehicle.

Calculations based on a passenger weight of 165 lbs (75 kg).

101

WINDSHIELD WIPERS ANDWASHERSThe windshield wiper/washer control lever islocated on the right side of the steering column.The front wipers are operated by rotating aswitch, located at the end of the lever. Forinformation on using the rear window wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

Windshield Wiper OperationRotate the end of the lever upward to the seconddetent past the intermittent settings for low-speedwiper operation. Rotate the end of the leverupward to the third detent past the intermittentsettings for high-speed wiper operation.

CAUTION!In cold weather, always turn off the wiperswitch and allow the wipers to return to thepark position before turning off the engine. If

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)the wiper switch is left on and the wipersfreeze to the windshield, damage to thewiper motor may occur when the vehicle isrestarted.

Intermittent Wiper SystemUse the intermittent wiper when weather condi-tions make a single wiping cycle, with a variablepause between cycles, desirable. Rotate theend of the lever to the first detent position forone of five intermittent settings. The delay cyclecan be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

Front Wiper Control

Front Wiper Control

102

NOTE:The wiper delay times depend on vehiclespeed. If the vehicle is moving less than10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will bedoubled.

Windshield WashersTo use the washer, pull the lever toward you andhold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulledwhile in the delay range, the wiper will start andcontinue to operate for two or three wipe cyclesafter the lever is released, and then resume theintermittent interval previously selected.If the lever is pulled while in the off position, thewipers will operate for two or three wipe cyclesand then turn off.

WARNING!Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-shield could lead to a collision. You might notsee other vehicles or other obstacles. Toavoid sudden icing of the windshield duringfreezing weather, warm the windshield withdefroster before and during windshieldwasher use.

Mist FeaturePush down on the wiper lever to activate asingle wipe to clear off road mist or spray from apassing vehicle. As long as the lever is helddown, the wipers will continue to operate.NOTE:The mist feature does not activate thewasher pump; therefore, no washer fluid willbe sprayed on the windshield. The washfunction must be used in order to spray thewindshield with washer fluid.

TILT STEERING COLUMNThis feature allows you to tilt the steering col-umn upward or downward. The tilt lever islocated on the steering column, below the turnsignal lever.Push down on the lever to unlock the steeringcolumn. With one hand firmly on the steeringwheel, move the steering column up or down,as desired. Pull upwards on the lever to lock thecolumn firmly in place.

Mist Control

103

WARNING!Do not adjust the steering column whiledriving. Adjusting the steering column whiledriving or driving with the steering columnunlocked, could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle. Failure to follow thiswarning may result in serious injury or death.

ELECTRONIC SPEEDCONTROL — IF EQUIPPEDWhen engaged, the Electronic Speed Controltakes over accelerator operations at speedsgreater than 25 mph (40 km/h).The Electronic Speed Control buttons are lo-cated on the right side of the steering wheel.

NOTE:In order to ensure proper operation, theElectronic Speed Control System has beendesigned to shut down if multiple SpeedControl functions are operated at the sametime. If this occurs, the Electronic SpeedControl System can be reactivated by push-ing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFFbutton and resetting the desired vehicle setspeed.

To ActivatePush the ON/OFF button. The Cruise IndicatorLight in the instrument cluster will illuminate. Toturn the system off, push the ON/OFF button asecond time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turnoff. The system should be turned off when not inuse.

WARNING!Leaving the Electronic Speed Control sys-tem on when not in use is dangerous. Youcould accidentally set the system or cause itto go faster than you want. You could lose

(Continued)

Tilt Steering Column Lever

Electronic Speed Control Buttons

1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -

104

WARNING! (Continued)control and have an accident. Always leavethe system OFF when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired SpeedTurn the Electronic Speed Control ON. Whenthe vehicle has reached the desired speed,press the SET (-) button and release. Releasethe accelerator and the vehicle will operate atthe selected speed.NOTE:The vehicle should be traveling at a steadyspeed and on level ground before pressingthe SET (-) button.

To DeactivateA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing theCANCEL button, or normal brake pressurewhile slowing the vehicle will deactivate theElectronic Speed Control without erasing theset speed memory.Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning theignition switch OFF erases the set speedmemory.

To Resume SpeedTo resume a previously set speed, push theRES (+) button and release. Resume can beused at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed SettingWhen the Electronic Speed Control is set, youcan increase speed by pushing the RES (+)button. If the button is continually pressed, theset speed will continue to increase until thebutton is released, then the new set speed willbe established.Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a1 mph (1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in anincrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).To decrease speed while the Electronic SpeedControl is set, push the SET (-) button. If thebutton is continually held in the SET (-) position,the set speed will continue to decrease until thebutton is released. Release the button when thedesired speed is reached, and the new setspeed will be established.

Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a1 mph (1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in a de-crease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To Accelerate For PassingPress the accelerator as you would normally.When the pedal is released, the vehicle willreturn to the set speed.Using Electronic Speed Control On HillsThe transmission may downshift on hills tomaintain the vehicle set speed.NOTE:The Electronic Speed Control system main-tains speed up and down hills. A slightspeed change on moderate hills is normal.On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain mayoccur so it may be preferable to drive withoutElectronic Speed Control.

105

WARNING!Electronic Speed Control can be dangerouswhere the system cannot maintain a con-stant speed. Your vehicle could go too fastfor the conditions, and you could lose controland have an accident. Do not use ElectronicSpeed Control in heavy traffic or on roadsthat are winding, icy, snow-covered or slip-pery.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETThere are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary poweroutlets that can provide power for accessoriesdesigned for use with the standard power outletadapters.The front power outlet is powered from theignition switch. Power is available when theignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.

When the optional cigar lighter heating elementis used in the power outlet, it heats whenpushed in and pops out automatically whenready for use. To preserve the heating ele-ment, do not hold the lighter in the heatingposition.

A second power outlet is located inside thecenter console and is powered directly from thevehicle battery.

CAUTION!• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160

Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceededthe fuse protecting the system will need tobe replaced.

• Power outlets are designed for accessoryplugs only. Do not insert any other object inthe power outlets as this will damage theoutlet and blow the fuse. Improper use ofthe power outlet can cause damage notcovered by your New Vehicle Limited War-ranty.

Front Power Outlet

106

On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer,there is a third power outlet located in the rightrear cargo area.

WARNING!To avoid serious injury or death:• Only devices designed for use in this type

of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Voltoutlet.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Do not touch with wet hands.• Close the lid when not in use and while

driving the vehicle.• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an

electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!• Many accessories that can be plugged in

draw power from the vehicle’s battery,even when not in use (i.e., mobile phones,etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough,the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-ciently to degrade battery life and/or pre-vent the engine from starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), willdegrade the battery even more quickly.Only use these intermittently and withgreater caution.

(Continued)

Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped

Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instru-ment Panel3 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear withSub Woofer (Opt.)

107

CAUTION! (Continued)• After the use of high-power draw accesso-

ries, or long periods of the vehicle notbeing started (with accessories stillplugged in), the vehicle must be driven asufficient length of time to allow the alter-nator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

• Power outlets are designed for accessoryplugs only. Do not hang any type of acces-sory or accessory bracket from the plug.

CUPHOLDERS

Front CupholdersThe front cupholders are located in the centerconsole.

Rear CupholdersThe rear cupholders are located on the back ofthe center console.

STORAGE

Glovebox StorageThe lockable glovebox storage compartment islocated on the passenger side of the lowerinstrument panel. Pull outward on the handle/latch to open the compartment.

Front Cupholders

Rear Cupholders

108

Console Storage CompartmentTo lock or unlock the storage compartment,insert the ignition key and turn. To open thestorage compartment, press the latch and liftthe cover.

There is an extra storage area underneath theconsole lid. The console lid has an integratedpaper clip feature that can hold small items.

Rear Storage CompartmentThe rear cargo area storage compartmentcover is held by a spring-loaded latch. In orderto remove the rear storage compartment cover,use the following procedure:NOTE:The rear storage compartment latch shouldnot be used as cargo tie-down.1. Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular(straight up) to the top surface of the tray.2. Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees,so it is parallel to the slotted hole in the tray.

3. Open the rear compartment cover.

DUAL TOP — TWO-DOORMODELS — IF EQUIPPEDIf your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, youmust remove one of the tops from the ve-hicle. If the soft top is removed, the pivotbrackets must also be removed from thesport bar. The soft top was installed at thefactory for shipping purposes only. The soft topand the hard top are to be used indepen-dently. Removal is mandatory to prevent anypossible wear and tear on the soft top. Yourvehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting

Center Console

Center Console Lid StorageRear Storage Cover

109

from both tops remaining on the vehicle at thesame time for extended periods of time.

Removing The Soft Top — Two-DoorModels1. Locate and remove the two boxes that con-tain the following items:

• Right and left door frames• Four door frame attachment knobs• Right and left quarter windows• Rear window• Two rear window roll up straps• Two Sunrider® secure straps (if equipped)• Two rear swing gate brackets

2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom TopThree-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/RearPanel Removal” in this section.3. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivotbracket screws (two per side) using a #T30 Torx®head driver.

4. Disconnect the knuckles from the left andright metal pivot brackets. Remove the soft topfrom the vehicle and store in a clean, drylocation.NOTE:To aid in disconnecting the knuckles, youmay carefully tap on the knuckles using arubber mallet.

5. Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover toexpose the pivot brackets. Remove the brack-ets using a #T30 Torx® head driver. Recoverand re-zip the sports bar cover. Store the pivotbrackets and screws in a safe place.6. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “FreedomTop Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Installation” in this section.

110

Installing The Soft Top — Two-DoorModelsNOTE:The following procedures are for first timeset up only. For future soft top procedures,refer to “Soft Top” in this section.1. Locate and remove the following items priorto hard top removal:

• Right and left door frames• Door frame attachment knobs (four for

two-door models, six for four-door models)• Right and left quarter windows• Rear window

2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom TopThree-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/RearPanel Removal” in this section.3. Install the door frames. Refer to “DoorFrame” in this section.

4. If the soft top has been removed, followthese steps to reinstall the soft top. If the soft topis on the vehicle, proceed to step #5.

a. If the pivot brackets have been removed,unzip the sport bar covers and attach thepivot brackets to the sports bar with thefour screws that were removed using a#T30 Torx® head driver. Re-cover andre-zip the sport bar covers.

b. Lay the soft top into the rear of thevehicle with the bows pointing forwardand the curved portion of the bows facingupward.

c. Reattach the knuckles onto the metalpivot brackets.

NOTE:To aid in reattaching the knuckles, you maycarefully tap on the knuckles using a rubbermallet.

d. Screw the pivot screws back into placeusing a #T30 Torx® head driver. Securethem until they are snug, being carefulnot to cross-thread the screws or over-tighten.

111

CAUTION!Do not overtighten the screws. You can stripthe screws if they are overtightened.

5. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal barfor bottom of rear window) and set aside.NOTE:Be sure the wire harness in the left rearcorner is not tangled in the soft top bowsbefore you lift the top.6. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover.This cover should be discarded. It was intendedas a protective cover for shipping only.NOTE:A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in thedual top wrap.7. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top —Putting Up The Soft Top” in this section.

DUAL TOP — FOUR-DOORMODELS — IF EQUIPPEDIf your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, youmust remove one of the tops from the ve-hicle. If the soft top is removed, the pivotbrackets must also be removed from thesport bar. The soft top was installed at thefactory for shipping purposes only. The soft topand the hard top are to be used indepen-dently. Removal is mandatory to prevent anypossible wear and tear on the soft top. Yourvehicle warranty will not cover damage resultingfrom both tops remaining on the vehicle at thesame time for extended periods of time.

Removing The Soft Top —Four-Door Models1. Locate and remove the two boxes that con-tain the following items:

• Right and left door frames• Six door frame attachment knobs• Right and left quarter windows

• Rear window• Two rear window roll up straps• Two Sunrider® secure straps (if equipped)• Two rear swing gate brackets

2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom TopThree-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/RearPanel Removal” in this section.3. Unbutton the side bow tether strap (bothsides).

112

4. Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle,slide the tether strap up the side bow (bothsides).

5. The tether strap must be hooked onto thepivot bracket prior to removal of soft top fromvehicle (both sides).

6. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivotbracket bolts (two per side) from the sport barusing a 10.0 mm wrench or socket driver.7. Lift the soft top in a upward motion to releasethe pivot bracket from the sport bar bracket.

113

8. Remove the soft top from the vehicle andstore in a clean, dry location (another personmay be needed to help with this operation).NOTE:If you are doing this alone, use one arm tohold the bundle up, the other to remove thebrackets.

9. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “FreedomTop Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Installation” in this section.

Installing The Soft Top — Four-DoorModelsNOTE:The following procedures are for first timeset up only. For future soft top procedures,refer to “Soft Top” in this section.1. Locate and remove the following items priorto hard top removal:

• Right and left door frames• Six door frame attachment knobs• Right and left quarter windows• Rear window

2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom TopThree-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/RearPanel Removal” in this section.3. Install the door frames. Refer to “DoorFrame” in this section.

4. Install the soft top with the pivot bracketsabove the sport bar brackets, lower the soft topinto the sport bar bracket slots in a downwardmotion to lock tab on soft top. You will need to liftthe top to get the brackets to line up. (Anotherperson may be needed to help with this opera-tion.)NOTE:If you are doing this alone, use one arm tohold the soft top up, the other to align thebrackets.

114

5. Lower the pivot bracket onto the sport barbracket mounting tab in a downward motion tolock into tab.

6. Install the pivot bracket bolts back into placeusing a 10.0 mm wrench or socket driver.Secure them until they are snug, being carefulnot to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.

CAUTION!Do not overtighten the screws. You can stripthe screws if they are overtightened.

7. Remove the tether strap from the pivotbracket.

8. Using the plastic reinforcement as a handleremove the tether strap from the bracket hookby sliding strap up off hook and slide down theside bow (both sides).

115

9. Button the side bow tether strap (both sides).

10. Remove the swing gate bar (black metalbar for bottom of rear window) and set aside.NOTE:Be sure the wire harness in the left rearcorner is not tangled in the soft top bowsbefore you lift the top.11. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover.This cover should be discarded. It was intendedas a protective cover for shipping only.NOTE:A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in thedual top wrap.

12. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top —Putting Up The Soft Top” in this section.

FREEDOM TOP™THREE-PIECE MODULARHARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!• The hard top is not designed to carry any

additional loads such as roof racks, sparetires, building, hunting, or camping sup-plies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was notdesigned as a structural member of thevehicle, and thus cannot properly carryany additional loads other than environ-mental (rain, snow, etc.).

• Do not move your vehicle until the top hasbeen either fully attached to the windshieldframe and body side, or fully removed.

CAUTION!Failure to follow these cautions may causeinterior water damage, stains or mildew:• It is recommended that the top be free of

water prior to panel removal. Removingthe top, opening a door or lowering awindow while the top is wet may allowwater to drip into the vehicles interior.

• The hard top assembly must be positionedproperly to ensure sealing. Improper in-stallation can cause water to leak into thevehicles interior.

• Careless handling and storage of the re-movable roof panels may damage theseals, causing water to leak into the ve-hicles interior.

• The front panel(s) must be positionedproperly to ensure sealing. Improper in-stallation can cause water to leak into thevehicles interior.

116

Front Panel(s) RemovalNOTE:Left panel must be removed before remov-ing right panel.1. Fold down the sun visor, and move it to theside.2. Turn the rear fasteners (knobs) (located onthe overhead speaker bar assembly) counter-clockwise until they can be removed.

3. Turn the center L-shaped locks (two) fromthe center of the roof panel.

4. Turn the rear L-shaped lock (located abovethe shoulder belt anchorage).

5. Unlatch the header panel latch located at thetop of the windshield.

6. Remove the left-hand panel.To remove the right panel, follow the stepsabove except for Step 3.

117

Freedom Top™ Storage BagVehicles equipped with a Freedom Top™ Modu-lar Hard Top, come with a Freedom Top™storage bag that allows you to store your Free-dom Top™ panels. The storage bag containstwo compartments and fits behind the rear seat.Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops andhooks are facing downward. Unzip the bag andfold back the outer flap. Release the Velcro onthe black panel divider and fold it back.NOTE:Ensure the front Freedom Top™ panel latchis closed prior to inserting the panel into theFreedom bag.Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bagwith the latches facing downward.

Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the di-vider is laying flat). Secure the Velcro, located atthe center of the divider.

Insert the left-side Freedom panel into the bagwith the latches facing upward.NOTE:Ensure the front Freedom panel latch isclosed prior to inserting the panel into thebag.

118

Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bagclosed.

Install the seat attachment strap (at the top ofthe bag) through the loops.

Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with thehooks and straps facing the back of the rearseat. Attach the clips at the bottom of the bag tothe child restraint anchorages, located at thebase of the rear seat.

Wrap the upper strap around the rear headrestraints and loop the strap through the buckle.Pull on the strap to tighten the Freedom bagsecurely against the rear seat.

Front Panel(s) InstallationNOTE:Set the panels on the windshield frame sothat there is no overhang. Also, make surethat the panels are sitting flush with thebody.1. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same stepsfor removal in reverse order.

119

Front Panel(s) Installation With RearHard Top Removed1. Turn the left and right panels over and movethe spacer block (located on the rear of thepanel) upward 90 degrees.

NOTE:The front panel(s) must be positioned prop-erly to ensure sealing. Set the panels on thewindshield frame so that there is no over-hang. Also, make sure that the panels aresitting flush with the body.2. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same stepsfor removal in reverse order.

Rear Hard Top Removal1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “FrontPanel(s) Removal” in this section.2. Open both doors.3. Remove the two Torx® head screws thatsecure the hard top at the B-pillar (near the topof the door) using a #40 Torx® head driver(Four–Door Only).

4. Remove the six Torx® head screws thatsecure the hard top to the vehicle (along theinterior bodyside) using a #40 Torx® headdriver.5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensureclearance of the rear window glass. Lift the rearwindow glass.

120

6. Locate the wire harness on the left rearinside corner of the vehicle.

7. Release the red locking tab by pulling out-ward to the right.

8. To remove the wiring harness press the taband pull downward to disconnect.

Wire Harness Connector Red Locking Tab Press Tab To Disconnect

121

9. To remove the washer hose, pinch the gripson hose connector and pull downward.

10. Close the swing gate.11. Remove the hard top from the vehicle.Place the hard top on a soft surface to preventdamage.

CAUTION!The removal of the Freedom Top requires fouradults located on each corner. Failure to followthis caution could damage the Freedom Top.

Rear Hard Top InstallationNOTE:If the door frames are installed from soft topusage, they must be removed prior to instal-lation of the hard top.1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage andreplace if necessary.2. Install the hard top using the same steps forremoval in reverse order.Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush withthe body at the sides and check to ensure thatthere is a uniform gap between the lift glass andhard top.NOTE:

• The Torx™ fasteners that attach the hardtop to the body should be torqued to88 in lb +/- 22 in lb (10 N·m +/- 2.5 N·m).

• It is not necessary to pinch connectionwhen reinstalling washer hose. Push onuntil click is heard.

DOOR FRAME

CAUTION!Failure to follow these cautions may causeinterior water damage, stains or mildew:• Opening a door or lowering a window while

the top is wet may allow water to drip intothe vehicle’s interior.

• Careless handling and storage of the re-movable door frame(s) may damage theseals, causing water to leak into the vehi-cle’s interior.

• The door frame(s) must be positionedproperly to ensure sealing. Improper in-stallation can cause water to leak into thevehicle’s interior.

Pinch Grip On Hose

122

WARNING!• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads

with the door frame(s) removed as you willlose the protection that they can provide.This procedure is furnished for use duringoff-road operation only.

• Do not drive your vehicle on public roadswith the doors removed as you will lose theprotection that they can provide. This pro-cedure is furnished for use during off-roadoperation only.

Door Frame Removal1. Unscrew and remove the door frame attach-ment knobs (two per door).

WARNING!Use both hands to remove the door frames.The door frames will fold and could causeinjury if both hands are not used.

2. Place one hand on the upper rear and onehand on the front of the door frame.3. Pull the frame toward you with your rearwardhand to remove the frame from the vehicle.

123

4. Screw the knobs back into the door frameand fold for storage. Store in a secure location.

WARNING!• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads

with the door frame(s) removed as you willlose the protection that they can provide.This procedure is furnished for use duringoff-road operation only.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads

with the doors removed as you will lose theprotection that they can provide. This pro-cedure is furnished for use during off-roadoperation only.

Door Frame Installation — Two-DoorModels-If Equipped1. Unfold door frame and unscrew thumb-screws.2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top ofthe body side, behind the door opening.

3. After the door frame pin has been set intothe body side hole, carefully set the front of thedoor frame into the rubber seal at the top of thewindshield.4. Starting with the front of the door frame, clipit over the metal side bar and then clip the rear,making sure that the material for the side barcovers is not pinched by the door frame.

124

5. Starting with the front knob, screw in andtighten both knobs. Repeat on the other side.

Door Frame Installation —Four-Door Models-If Equipped1. Install the rear door frame first.2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top ofthe body side, just behind the rear door open-ing.

3. Position the top of the door frame against themetal sport bar and press onto the side barmaking sure not to pinch the material of thesports bar covers and to ensure it is properlypositioned on the seal above the front of therear door.

125

4. Loosely install the rear knob (long knob) tohold the door rail in position.5. Carefully set the front of the front door framein the rubber seal at the top of the windshield.

6. Clip the front of the door rail over the side barmaking sure that the material for the side barcover is not pinched by the door frame.7. Position the rear of the front door frame tolay on top of the front of the rear door frame.Ensure the seals are installed correctly to avoidwater leaks.

8. Loosely install both knobs beginning with thefront knob (long knob). Then, install the middleknob (short knob) through the front and reardoor frames and screw into the top of theB-pillar.9. Tighten the front knob, then the rear mostknob, and then the middle knob. Repeat thisprocedure for the other side.

126

SOFT TOP — TWO-DOORMODELSPlease visit the owners section of Jeep.comfor instructional videos.

CAUTION!The soft top is not designed to carry anyadditional loads such as roof racks, sparetires, building, hunting, or camping supplies,and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not de-signed as a structural member of the vehicleand, thus, cannot properly carry any addi-tional loads other than environmental (rain,snow, etc.).

If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/orthe top has been folded down for a period oftime, the top will appear to have shrunk whenyou raise it, making it difficult to put up. This iscaused by a natural contraction of the vinylcoating on the fabric top.

Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadilyon the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to itsoriginal size and the top can then be installed. Ifthe temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, donot attempt to put the top down or roll therear or side curtains.

CAUTION!• Do not run a fabric top through an auto-

matic car wash. Window scratches andwax build up may result.

• Do not lower the top when the temperatureis below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the topmay result.

• Do not move your vehicle until the top hasbeen either fully attached to the windshieldframe, or fully lowered.

• Do not lower the top with the windows in-stalled. Window and top damage may occur.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)• Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top

Models” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” forfurther information. It contains importantinformation on cleaning and caring for yourvehicle’s fabric top.

• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) topry or force any of the clamps, clips, orretainers securing the soft top. Do not forceor pry the soft top framework when openingor closing. Damage to the top may result.

WARNING!• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear

window curtain up unless the side curtainsare also removed. Dangerous exhaustgases could enter the vehicle causingharm to the driver and passengers.

(Continued)

127

WARNING! (Continued)• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are

designed only for protection against theelements. Do not rely on them to containoccupants within the vehicle or to protectagainst injury during an accident. Remem-ber, always wear seat belts.

CAUTION!Failure to follow these cautions may causeinterior water damage, stains or mildew onthe top material:• It is recommended that the top be free of

water prior to opening it. Operating the top,opening a door or lowering a window whilethe top is wet may allow water to drip intothe vehicle’s interior.

• Careless handling and storage of the softtop may damage the seals, causing waterto leak into the vehicle’s interior.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)• The soft top must be positioned properly to

ensure sealing. Improper installation cancause water to leak into the vehicle’s inte-rior.

Quick Steps To Lowering The SoftTopRefer to “Lowering The Soft Top” in this sectionfor further information.1. Remove the side windows.

2. Remove the back window.

3. Release header latches from the windshieldframe.

128

4. Release the sail panel retainers from thebody side channel at the rear corners of thevehicle.

NOTE:When releasing the sail panel retainers, it ishelpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.

5. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sailpanels so that they rest on top of the soft top.

6. Release the Sunrider® latch (both sides).

7. Open the swing gate and lower the top.NOTE:Ensure fabric does not overhang the sidesof the vehicle.

129

Quick Steps To Raising The Soft TopRefer to “Raising The Soft Top” in this sectionfor further information.1. Open the swing gate and raise the top,engaging the Sunrider® latches (another per-son may be needed to help with this operation).

2. Engage header latches.

3. Install rear corner panels.

4. Install the back window.

130

5. Install the side windows.6. To install the side windows, affix the windowtemporarily by attaching to the Velcro® in therear corner. Start the zipper but close only about1 in (2.5 cm).

7. Insert the front retainer of the window intothe door channel, making sure the retainer isfully seated and properly positioned on the doorframe. Failure to do so can result in wind andwater leaks or damage to the window.

1 — Incorrect Insertion2 — Correct Insertion

131

8. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge ofthe window into the bottom side channel, begin-ning at the front and working to the rear of thevehicle. Finish by closing the zipper completelyand attaching the Velcro® along the top andrear of the window. Repeat this step for theopposite side.

132

Lowering The Soft Top

1 — Header Bow 6 — Quarter Window2 — 2–Bow 7 — Check Strap3 — 3–Bow 8 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window4 — Sail Panel 9 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window5 — Body Side Retainer

133

1 — Zipper Start2 — Zipper Finish3 — Swing Gate Bar4 — Swing Gate Brackets5 — Sail Panels

134

NOTE:Clean side and rear windows before removalto assist in preventing scratching duringremoval of the soft top. If zippers are difficultto operate due to road dust, etc., clean themwith a mild soap solution and a small brush.Cleaning products are available throughyour authorized dealer.1. If your vehicle has half doors, remove eachhalf-door window by opening the door and liftingthe half-door window out.NOTE:Stow the half-door windows carefully out-side of the vehicle, never inside, to avoidscratches.

2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.3. Release the header latches and leave thehooks in the loops on the windshield.

4. Open the swing gate.5. Before unzipping the rear window, releasethe first 3 in (7.6 cm) of both sail panels from thechannel. Remove the swing gate bar by pullingit straight rearward out of the swing gate brack-ets.

135

• Unzip the rear window starting at the rightlower corner of the window. Pull the zipperup, across the top and down to the leftlower corner. Zipper pulls will stay onthe rear window. Pull down on the rearwindow to disengage it from the zipper onthe top cover.

6. Remove the rear window retainer from theswing gate bracket on both the left and rightsides.

7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch-ing.8. Undo the Velcro® that runs along the topand rear edge of the side window.9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, com-pletely unzip the window.

136

10. Once unzipped, remove the side windowretainers from the door channel and body sidechannel. Repeat this step on the opposite side.11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainersfrom the body side channel at the rear cornersof the vehicle.

NOTE:When releasing the sail panel retainers, it ishelpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.

12. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sailpanels so that they rest on top of the soft top.

13. The swing gate brackets do not need to beremoved unless the hard top is being installed.To remove the swing gate brackets, pull thefront of the bracket forward while rolling theentire bracket back in toward the vehicle todisengage.

137

14. Completely release the latches from theloops on the windshield frame. If your vehicleis not equipped with the Sunrider® package,proceed to Step 15.

15. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rear-ward over the Sunrider® link (Sunrider® Modelsonly).

16. Unlatch the side bows from both door rails(Sunrider® Models only).

138

17. Before lowering the top, open the swinggate to prevent possible damage to the rearcenter high-mounted brake light. Move to thefront of the vehicle. Grasp the side bow behindthe header and lift the top, folding it toward therear of the vehicle.NOTE:Help from another person will ease thisoperation.

18. Tuck the fabric and the check straps be-tween the bows and as far inward as possible.This will keep any portion of the top fromflapping outside of the vehicle.

19. Close the front header latches.20. Remove the door frames, if desired. Referto “Door Frame” in this section for further infor-mation.

Raising The Soft Top1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.2. Install door frames, if removed. Refer to“Door Frame” in this section for further informa-tion.3. Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid overSunrider® link (Sunrider® Models only).

139

4. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift thetop by the side bow and the 2–bow (middle bow)up and over the sports bar until the header restson the top of the windshield frame.

5. Make sure the Sunrider® bracket on the sidebows latches to the door rails (Sunrider® Mod-els only).

6. Open the header latches and engage thehook on each side onto the windshield loops (donot close the latches).

140

7. If the swing gate brackets were removed,install them by hooking the rear edge of thebracket on the interior side of the body channel.Then, rotate it rearward and over the channeluntil it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail. Tobe properly located, the bracket must only beclipped to the shortened rail edge.

8. Move to the rear of the vehicle and gentlypull the sail panels over the rear roof bow.

9. Partially install the sail panel retainers intothe body side channel, leaving the last 3 in(7.6 cm) toward the rear window loose (on bothsides). Pulling down on the rear roof bow(3–bow) will aid to reach the channel with theretainers.

141

10. To install the side windows, affix the win-dow temporarily by attaching to the Velcro® inthe rear corner. Start the zipper but close onlyabout 1 in (2.5 cm).



142


13. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide theswing gate bar over the receiver at the bottominside of the rear window. The spongy part ofthe seal should be down and pointed outward toseal with the swing gate when closed.

14. Install the rear window by starting bothzipper ends at the lower left corner of the rearwindow opening. Ensure that the zippers areproperly started and aligned before zipping toprevent damage.

143

15. Run the zipper fully around to the right sideof the window.16. Grasp the swing gate bar and position itinto the swing gate brackets.

17. Insert the rear window retainer into theswing gate bracket on both the left and rightsides.

18. Apply downward pressure on the top cor-ner of the rear soft top bow (3–bow), thencomplete attaching the sail panel retainers intothe body side channel.19. Close the header latches and return thesun visors to their secured position.

144

SOFT TOP — FOUR-DOORMODELSPlease visit the owner’s section of Jeep.comfor instructional videos.

CAUTION!The soft top is not designed to carry anyadditional loads such as roof racks, sparetires, building, hunting, or camping supplies,and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not de-signed as a structural member of the vehicle,and thus cannot properly carry any additionalloads other than environmental (rain, snow,etc.).

If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/orthe top has been folded down for a period oftime, the top will appear to have shrunk whenyou raise it, making it difficult to put up. This iscaused by a natural contraction of the vinylcoating on the fabric top.

Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadilyon the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to itsoriginal size and the top can then be snappedinto place. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C) orbelow, do not attempt to put the top down orroll the rear or side curtains.

CAUTION!• Do not run a fabric top through an auto-

matic car wash. Window scratches andwax buildup may result.

• Do not lower the top when the temperatureis below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the topmay result.

• Do not lower the top when the windows aredirty. Grit may scratch the window.

• Do not move your vehicle until the top hasbeen either fully attached to the windshieldframe, or fully lowered.

• Do not lower the top with the windowsinstalled. Window and top damage mayoccur.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)• Refer to “Appearance Care for Fabric Top

Models” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” forfurther information. It contains importantinformation on cleaning and caring for yourvehicle’s fabric top.

• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) topry or force any of the clamps, clips, orretainers securing the soft top. Do notforce or pry the soft top framework whenopening or closing. Damage to the top mayresult.

WARNING!• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear

window curtain up unless the side curtainsare also open. Dangerous exhaust gaseswhich can kill could enter the vehicle.

(Continued)

145

WARNING! (Continued)• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are

designed only for protection against theelements. Do not rely on them to containoccupants within the vehicle or to protectagainst injury during an accident. Remem-ber, always wear seat belts.

CAUTION!Failure to follow these cautions may causeinterior water damage, stains or mildew onthe top material:• It is recommended that the top be free of


• Careless handling and storage of the softtop may damage the seals, causing waterto leak into the vehicle’s interior.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)• The soft top must be positioned properly to

ensure sealing. Improper installation cancause water to leak into the vehicle’s inte-rior.

NOTE:Do not remove any of the three attachmentknobs unless you are planning on installingthe hard top.

Quick Steps For Lowering The SoftTop1. Remove the side windows.

146

2. Remove the back window.NOTE:Start zipper from the right side to removeback window.

3. Release header latches from the windshieldframe.

4. Release the sail panel retainers from the bodyside channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.

NOTE:When releasing the sail panel retainers, it ishelpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.5. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on topof the soft top.

147

6. Fold header rearward, pulling the fabric tothe rear.

7. Release Sunrider® latch (both sides).

8. Open the swing gate and lower the top.

NOTE:Ensure the fabric does not overhang thesides of the vehicle.

Quick Steps For Raising The SoftTop1. Open the swing gate and raise the top,engaging the Sunrider® latches (another per-son may be needed to help with this operation).

148

2. Install rear corner panels.

3. Rotate the header forward.

4. Engage the header latches.

5. Install the back window.

6. Install the side windows.

149

7. To install the side windows, affix the windowtemporarily by attaching to the Velcro® in therear corner. Start the zipper but close only about1 in (2.5 cm).




150

Folding Down The Soft Top

1 — Header Bow 6 — Body Side Retainer2 — 2–Bow 7 — Quarter Window3 — 3–Bow 8 — Check Strap4 — 4–Bow 9 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window5 — Sail Panel 10 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window

151

1 — Zipper Start2 — Zipper Finish3 — Swing Gate Bar4 — Swing Gate Brackets5 — Sail Panels

152

NOTE:Clean side and rear windows before removalto assist in preventing scratching duringremoval of the soft top. If zippers are difficultto operate due to road dust, etc., clean themwith a mild soap solution and a small brush.Cleaning products are available throughyour authorized dealer.1. If your vehicle has half-doors, remove eachhalf-door window by opening the door and liftingthe half-door window out.NOTE:Stow half-door windows carefully outside ofthe vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.

2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.3. Release the header latches and hooks fromthe loops on the windshield frame.

4. Open the swing gate.5. Before unzipping the rear window, releasethe first 3 in (7.6 cm) of both sail panels from thechannel. Remove the swing gate bar by pullingit straight rearward out of the swing gate brack-ets.

153

• Unzip the rear window starting at the rightlower corner of the window. Pull the zipperup, across the top and down to the leftlower corner. Zipper pulls will stay onthe rear window. Pull down on the rearwindow to disengage it from the zipper onthe top cover.

6. Remove the rear window retainer from theswing gate bracket on both the left and rightsides.

7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch-ing.8. Undo the Velcro® that runs along the topand rear edge of the side window.9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, com-pletely unzip the window.

154

10. Once unzipped, remove the side windowretainers from the door channel and body sidechannel. Repeat this step on the opposite side.11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainersfrom the body side channel at the rear cornersof the vehicle.

NOTE:When releasing the sail panel retainers, it ishelpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.12. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on topof the soft top.

13. The swing gate brackets do not need to beremoved unless the hard top is being installed.To remove the swing gate brackets, pull thefront of the bracket forward while rolling theentire bracket back in toward the vehicle todisengage.

155

14. Grasp the front side bow behind theheader, and lift the top.

15. Fold back the front section of the top,pulling the fabric rearward. Gently rest theheader on top of the rear portion of the deck.

16. Fold the top so that the material forms a"W" as shown. Enter the vehicle and move thematerial into two folds.

156

17. Release the side bows by pressing downon the latch above the front of the rear door.Push the top rearward to disengage. Repeatthis step on the other side.

18. Before lowering the top, open the swinggate to prevent possible damage to the rearcenter high-mounted brake light. Grasp thefolded side bows and slide the top along thedoor frame track to the rear door frame.

19. Gently slide the side bows off the doorframe track and lower the top down into thevehicle.NOTE:Help from another person will ease thisoperation.

157

20. Tuck the fabric and the check straps be-tween the bows as far inside as possible. Thiswill keep any portion of the top from flappingoutside of the vehicle.21. Once the top is fully down, use the Velcro®straps provided to secure the top to the vehicleby wrapping the strap around the side bows andthrough the slot on the body.

22. Close the front header latches.23. Remove the door frames, if desired. Referto “Door Frame” in this section for further infor-mation.

Putting Up The Soft TopNOTE:Be extremely careful when putting up thesoft top to prevent the doors from gettingscratched. It may be helpful to open the reardoors.1. Install the door frames, if removed. Refer to“Door Frame” in this section for further informa-tion.2. Undo the straps used to secure the top in thedown position and store in secure location.3. Open the swing gate.4. Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the topof the rear door frames.NOTE:Help from another person will ease thisoperation.

5. Insert the slider feature of the knuckles intothe door frame tracks and slide the top forward.

158

6. Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider®locking mechanisms that are located above thefront of the rear doors.

7. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.8. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift thetop by the side bow until it rests on the wind-shield frame.

9. Open the header latches and engage thehook on each side onto the windshield loops (donot close the latches).

159

10. If the swing gate brackets were removed,install them by hooking the rear edge of thebracket on the interior side of the body channel.Then, rotate it rearward and over the channeluntil it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail. Tobe properly located, the bracket must only beclipped to the shortened rail edge.

11. Ensure that the straps are positioned cor-rectly before pulling the sail panels over the rearroof bow (4–bow).

Partially install the sail panel retainers into thebody side channel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm)toward the rear window loose (on both sides).Pulling down on the rear roof bow (4–bow) willaid in reaching the channel with the retainers.

12. To install the side windows, affix the win-dow temporarily by attaching it to the Velcro® inthe upper rear corner. Start the zipper but closeonly about 1 in (2.5 cm).

160




161

15. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide theswing gate bar over the receiver at the bottominside of the rear window. The spongy part ofthe seal should be down and pointed outward toseal with the swing gate when closed.

16. Install the rear window by starting bothzipper ends at the lower left corner of the rearwindow opening. Ensure that the zippers areproperly started and aligned before zipping toprevent damage.

17. Run the first zipper fully around to the rightside of the window.18. Grasp the swing gate bar and position itinto the swing gate brackets.

162

19. Insert the rear window retainer into theswing gate bracket on both the left and rightsides.

20. Complete the installation of the sail panelby inserting the rest of the retainer into the bodychannel.21. Close the header latches and return thesun visors to their secured position.

SUNRIDER® (TWO-DOORMODELS)

CAUTION!Operating the top, opening a door or lower-ing a window while the top is wet may allowwater to drip into the vehicle’s interior.

NOTE:If you are going to be driving faster than40 mph (64 km/h) with the Sunrider® featureopen, it is recommended that you removethe rear window of the vehicle.

163

Opening The Sunrider®1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.2. Release the header latches from the loopson the windshield frame.

3. Slide the plastic sleeve forward. 4. Grasp the header and lift the top back. Makesure the material is folded back as shown.NOTE:The Sunrider® latch on the door rail shouldnot be activated for Sunrider® use. If acti-vated, the soft top must be reinstalled start-ing from the sail panels.

164

5. Locate the straps to secure the side bows.Wrap the straps around the bows as shown.Repeat on the other side.

6. Reposition the sun visors.

Closing The Sunrider®1. Remove the straps from the side bows.2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.

3. Grasp the front header and pull it to the frontof the vehicle.4. Hook the header latches to the loops on thewindshield frame, close latches, and return thesun visors to their original positions.5. Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over theSunrider® link.

SUNRIDER® (FOUR-DOORMODELS)

CAUTION!Operating the top, opening a door or lower-ing a window while the top is wet may allowwater to drip into the vehicle’s interior.

NOTE:If you are going to be driving faster than40 mph (64 km/h) with the Sunrider® featureopen, it is recommended that you removethe rear window of the vehicle.

Opening The Sunrider®1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.2. Release the header latches from the loopson the windshield frame.

165

3. Grasp the front side bow behind the header,and lift the top.

4. Fold back the front section of the top andgently rest the header on top of the rear portionof the deck.

5. Fold the top so that the material forms a "W"as shown. Enter the vehicle and move thematerial into two folds.

166

6. Secure the top by using the two providedstraps. Each strap will wrap around the sidebow and Velcro® to itself; use one strap oneach side of the vehicle.

Closing The Sunrider®Perform the above steps in the opposite order.NOTE:Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allowthe material to sag and may block the rear-view mirror.

FOLDING WINDSHIELDThe fold-down windshield and removable sidebars on your vehicle are structural elementsthat can provide some protection in some acci-dents. The windshield also provides some pro-tection against weather, road debris and intru-sion of small branches and other objects.Do not drive your vehicle on-road with thewindshield down and the side bars removed asyou lose the protection these structural ele-ments can provide.If required for certain off-road uses, the sidebars can be removed and the windshield foldeddown. However, the protection afforded bythese features is then lost. If you remove theside bars and fold down the windshield, driveslowly and cautiously. It is recommended thatthe speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph(16 km/h), with low range operation preferred ifyou are driving off-road with the windshieldfolded down.Raise the windshield and reinstall the side barsas soon as the task that required their removalis completed and before you return to on-roaddriving. Both you and your passenger should

wear seat belts at all times, on-road and off-road, regardless of whether the windshield israised or folded down.Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on thedoors. If you choose to remove the doors, seeyour authorized dealer for a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror. Federal law requiresoutside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.

WARNING!Carefully follow these warnings to help pro-tect against personal injury:• Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the

windshield down.• Do not drive your vehicle unless the wind-

shield is securely fastened, either up ordown.

• Eye protection, such as goggles, shouldbe worn at all times when the windshield isdown.

(Continued)

167

WARNING! (Continued)• Be sure that you carefully follow the in-

structions for raising the windshield. Makesure that the folding windshield, windshieldwipers, side bars, and all associated hard-ware and fasteners are correctly andtightly assembled before driving your ve-hicle. Failure to follow these instructionsmay prevent your vehicle from providingyou and your passengers protection insome accidents.

• If you remove the doors, store them out-side the vehicle. In the event of an acci-dent, a loose door may cause personalinjury.

Lowering The Windshield AndRemoving Side Bars1. Lower the fabric top or remove the hard topfollowing the instructions in this manual.

NOTE:To assist in properly reinstalling side bars,mark the original locations prior to remov-ing.2. Remove the two top hex bolts (13 mm), andthe one side hex bolt (13 mm) visible throughthe trim (Do not remove plastic corner trim, sunvisor bolts, or sport bar covering).

3. Remove the sun visor.4. Remove the A-pillar cap.5. Disconnect microphone (if equipped withUconnect® phone).

6. Open the sport bar Velcro covering.7. Remove the one hex bolt (13 mm) visiblethrough the plastic trim on the bottom side of theside bar, one hex bolt (13 mm) on the side of theside bar, and one hex bolt (13 mm) on top of theside bar.NOTE:Pull side bar out horizontally when remov-ing.

168

CAUTION!Do not remove the head impact foam fromthe side bars, as damage to the foam mayresult.

NOTE:Store all of the mounting bolts in their origi-nal threaded holes and tighten for safekeep-ing.8. Remove the side bar assembly, and reattachthe sport bar Velcro® covering.9. To safely store the side bars in your vehicle,use four cinch straps (available from your au-thorized dealer). Attach the straps through theslots located on the floor behind the folded rearseat at the front of the storage bin cover.

WARNING!You or others could be injured if you carry theside bars loose in your vehicle. Remove theside bars from the vehicle or securely store

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)them as described or they may cause per-sonal injury if an accident occurs. See yourauthorized dealer for the cinch straps.

10. Remove the windshield wiper arms by firstpulling the wiper away from the windshield andout to the “lock” position. Unsnap the wiper armnut caps, and remove the retaining nuts. Lift thewiper arms off and store them in the centerconsole or securely behind the rear seat.NOTE:It may be necessary to use a battery terminalpuller tool in order to separate the wiperarms from the shaft after the nuts have beenremoved.11. Remove the lower windshield plates byremoving the six black round-headed Torx®head screws (using a #40 Torx® head driver) oneach side of the base of the windshield.

12. Lower the windshield gently until it contactsthe rubber hood bumpers.13. Secure the windshield by passing a cinchstrap through the footman hoop on the center ofthe hood and on the center of the windshieldframe. Tighten the strap to secure the wind-shield in place.

169

Raising The Windshield AndReplacing Side Bars1. Raise the windshield.2. Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to thesport bar. Refer to Step 4 of “Lowering Wind-shield And Removing Side Bars” earlier in thissection.

• Reattach the sport bar Velcro® covering.

3. Attach the front of the side bar to the wind-shield frame.

• Install the top two hex bolts (13 mm) first,then the lower side hex bolt (13 mm). Thelower side bolt will not align until the toptwo bolts are installed.

4. Tighten all side bar attachment bolts.

5. Install the lower windshield plates with thesix black round-headed Torx® head screws(using a #40 Torx® head driver) on each side ofthe base of the windshield.

6. Reinstall the wiper arms.

170

REAR WINDOW FEATURES —HARD TOP ONLY

Rear Window Wiper/Washer — IfEquippedA rotary switch on the center portion of thecontrol lever (located on the right side of thesteering column) controls the operation of therear wiper/washer function.

Rotate the switch upward to the firstdetent position for rear wiper operation.

Rotate the switch upward past the firstdetent to activate the rear washer. Thewasher pump and the wiper will con-tinue to operate as long as the switch

is held. Upon release, the wiper will cycle two tothree times before returning to the set position.If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition isturned to the LOCK position, the wiper willautomatically return to the “Park” position.When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper willresume function at whichever position theswitch is set at.

Rear Window Defroster — IfEquipped

The rear window defroster button islocated on the bottom right-side of theblower control knob. Press this buttonto turn on the rear window defroster.

An indicator in the button will illuminate whenthe rear window defroster is on. The rear win-dow defroster automatically turns off after ap-proximately 10 minutes. For an additional fiveminutes of operation, press the button a secondtime.

NOTE:To prevent excessive battery drain, use therear window defroster only when the engineis operating.

CAUTION!Failure to follow these cautions can causedamage to the heating elements:• Use care when washing the inside of the

rear window. Do not use abrasive windowcleaners on the interior surface of thewindow. Use a soft cloth and a mild wash-ing solution, wiping parallel to the heatingelements. Labels can be peeled off aftersoaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, orabrasive window cleaners on the interiorsurface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from thewindow.Rear Wiper/Washer Control

171

4UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

• INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178• COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .186

• Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187• Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187• Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

• ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IFEQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190• Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays . . . . . .191• Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192• EVIC Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193• Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped . . .193• Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196• Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196• Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196• System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

173

• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . .197• SOUND SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198• iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

• Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . .199• Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199• Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device Using RadioButtons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

• Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199• List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200• Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

• STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202• Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202• CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

• CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203• RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203• CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

• Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . .203• Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

174

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Outlet 7 — Climate Controls2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Power Outlet3 — Radio 9 — Lower Switch Bank4 — Assist Handle 10 — Power Mirror Switch — If Equipped5 — Glove Compartment 11 — Horn6 — Power Window Switches

175

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE

176

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL

177

INSTRUMENT CLUSTERDESCRIPTIONS1. Fuel Gauge

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fueltank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUNposition.

2. Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the elec-trical charging system. The light shouldcome on when the ignition switch is

first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly asa bulb check. If the light stays on or comes onwhile driving, turn off some of the vehicle’snon-essential electrical devices or increase en-gine speed (if at idle). If the charging systemlight remains on, it means that the vehicle isexperiencing a problem with the charging sys-tem. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See anauthorized dealer.If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump StartingProcedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.

3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when thefront fog lights are on.

4. Low Fuel Warning Light

When the fuel level reaches approxi-mately 2 U.S. Gallons (7.6L) this lightwill come on and remain on until fuel is

added. The “Low Fuel Warning Light” may turnon and off again, especially during and afterhard braking, accelerations, or turns. This oc-curs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank.

5. Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.

6. Front Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped

Indicates when the front axle lockhas been activated.

7. Seat Belt Reminder Light

When the ignition switch is first turnedto ON/RUN, this light will turn on forfour to eight seconds as a bulb check.During the bulb check, if the driver’s

seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. Afterthe bulb check or when driving, if the driver seatbelt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt WarningLight will flash or remain on continuously. Referto “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To KnowBefore Starting Your Vehicle” for furtherinformation.

8. Turn Signal Indicators

The left or right arrow will flash with thecorresponding exterior turn signallights when the turn signal lever is

operated. A chime will sound if the vehicle isdriven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turnsignal on.NOTE:If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate,check for a defective outside light bulb.

178

9. Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light shows low engine oil pres-sure. The light should turn on momen-

tarily when the engine is started; if the bulb doesnot come on, have the system checked by anauthorized dealer. If the light turns on whiledriving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engineas soon as possible. A chime will sound whenthis light turns on.Do not operate the vehicle until the cause iscorrected. This light does not indicate howmuch oil is in the engine. The engine oil levelmust be checked under the hood.

10. High Beam Indicator Light

This light shows that the high beamheadlights are on. Push the multifunc-tion control lever away from you to

switch the headlights to high beam. Pull thelever toward you to switch the headlights backto low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and theheadlights or park lights are left on, the highbeam indicator light will remain illuminated anda chime will sound.

11. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake func-tions, including brake fluid level andparking brake application. If the brake

light turns on it may indicate that the parkingbrake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low,or that there is a problem with the anti-lockbrake system reservoir.If the light remains on when the parking brakehas been disengaged, and the fluid level is atthe full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, itindicates a possible brake hydraulic systemmalfunction or that a problem with the BrakeBooster has been detected by the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Pro-gram (ESP) system. In this case, the light willremain on until the condition has been cor-rected. If the problem is related to the brakebooster, the ABS pump will run when applyingthe brake and a brake pedal pulsation may befelt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reservebraking capacity in the event of a failure to aportion of the hydraulic system. A leak in eitherhalf of the dual brake system is indicated by the

Brake Warning Light which will turn on when thebrake fluid level in the master cylinder hasdropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause iscorrected.NOTE:The light may flash momentarily duringsharp cornering maneuvers which changefluid level conditions. The vehicle shouldhave service performed, and the brake fluidlevel checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair isnecessary.

WARNING!Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on isdangerous. Part of the brake system mayhave failed. It will take longer to stop thevehicle. You could have a collision. Have thevehicle checked immediately.

179

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), are also equipped with Elec-tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In theevent of an EBD failure, the Brake WarningLight will turn on along with the ABS Light.Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the brake warning light can bechecked by turning the ignition switch from theOFF position to the ON/RUN position. The lightshould illuminate for approximately two sec-onds. The light should then turn off unless theparking brake is applied or a brake fault isdetected. If the light does not illuminate, havethe light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parkingbrake is applied with the ignition switch in theON/RUN position.NOTE:This light shows only that the parking brakeis applied. It does not show the degree ofbrake application.

12. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

After the ignition is turned on, theAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS) lightilluminates to indicate function check

at vehicle start-up. If the light remains on afterstart-up or comes on and stays on at roadspeeds, it may indicate that the ABS has de-tected a malfunction or has become inopera-tive. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABSWarning Light are on, see an authorized dealerimmediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System”in “Starting And Operating”.

13. Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four toeight seconds as a bulb checkwhen the ignition switch is firstturned to ON/RUN. If the light iseither not on during starting, stays

on, or turns on while driving, have the systeminspected at an authorized dealer as soon as

possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”for further information.

14. Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped

This light indicates when the rearaxle lock has been activated.

15. Tachometer

Indicates the engine speed in Revolutions PerMinute (RPM x 1000).NOTE:If equipped with a diesel engine and amanual transmission the vehicle will beequipped with a Start/Stop mode. When theengine is off while in Stop/Start mode, ta-chometer needle will be in green bandedzone of tachometer and the EVIC message“Stop/Start Auto StopActive” will display forfive seconds. For further information on theStart/Stop system, refer to “Start/Stop Sys-tem” in “Starting And Operating”.

180

CAUTION!Do not operate the engine with the tachom-eter pointer in the red area. Engine damagewill occur.

16. Coolant Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated en-gine condition. If the light turns onwhile driving, safely pull over and stop

the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off.Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL andidle the vehicle. If the temperature reading doesnot return to normal, turn the engine off imme-diately and call for service.NOTE:As the coolant temperature gauge ap-proaches �H,� this indicator will illuminateand a single chime will sound. Further over-heating will cause the temperature gauge topass �H.� In this case, a continuous chimewill sound, until the engine is allowed tocool.

17. Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when therear fog lights are on.

18. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped

This light will flash at a fast rate forapproximately 15 seconds, whenthe vehicle security alarm is arm-ing, and then will flash slowly untilthe vehicle is disarmed.

19. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolanttemperature. Any reading within the normalrange indicates that the engine cooling systemis operating satisfactorily.The gauge pointer will likely indicate a highertemperature when driving in hot weather, upmountain grades, or when towing a trailer. Itshould not be allowed to exceed the upper limitsof the normal operating range.

CAUTION!Driving with a hot engine cooling systemcould damage your vehicle. If the tempera-ture gauge reads “H” pull over and stop thevehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-tioner turned off until the pointer drops backinto the normal range. If the pointer remainson the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,turn the engine off immediately and call anauthorized dealer for service.

WARNING!A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.You or others could be badly burned bysteam or boiling coolant. You may want tocall an authorized dealer for service if yourvehicle overheats. If you decide to look un-der the hood yourself, see “Maintaining YourVehicle”. Follow the warnings under theCooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.

181

20. Cruise Indicator Light

This light shows when the elec-tronic speed control system isturned on.

21. 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that thevehicle is in the four-wheel drivemode, and the front and rear drive-shafts are mechanically locked to-gether forcing the front and rear

wheels to rotate at the same speed.

22. Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (FuelSaver Indicator) Button

Press this button to change the display fromodometer to either of the two trip odometersettings or the “ECO” display. Trip A or Trip B willappear when in the trip odometer mode. Pressand hold the button for two seconds to reset thetrip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers. Theodometer must be in trip mode to reset.

23. Shift Lever Indicator

The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained withinthe instrument cluster. It displays the gear po-sition of the automatic transmission.

24. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufac-

turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, whenthe low tire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the lowtire pressure telltale. When the system detectsa malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continu-ously illuminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long asthe malfunction exists. When the malfunctionindicator is illuminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tire pressure asintended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including the installation of

182

replacement or alternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle, to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!The TPMS has been optimized for the origi-nal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pres-sures and warning have been established forthe tire size equipped on your vehicle. Un-desirable system operation or sensor dam-age may result when using replacementequipment that is not of the same size, type,and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causesensor damage. Do not use tire sealant froma can or balance beads if your vehicle isequipped with a TPMS, as damage to thesensors may result.

25. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area

The odometer display shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven. The trip odometershows individual trip mileage. Refer to “Odom-eter / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indica-tor) Button” for additional information.Vehicle Odometer Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, the fol-lowing odometer messages will display:ECO . . . . . . . . . . . .Fuel Saver Indicatordoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Door AjargATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Swing Gate AjarLoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . .Low Tire PressureHOTOIL . . . . .Transmission Oil Temperature

Above Normal LimitsgASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fuel Cap FaultnoFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fuse FaultCHAngE OIL . . . . . . .Oil Change Required

ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped

The ECO indicator will illuminate when you aredriving in a fuel efficient manner and can beused to modify driving habits in order to in-crease fuel economy.

LoW tirE

When the appropriate condition exists, theodometer display will toggle between LoW andtirE for three cycles.

“HOTOIL” Transmission Temperature Warn-ing Message

The “HOTOIL” cluster message will appear inthe odometer accompanied with a chime toindicate that there is excessive transmissionfluid temperature that might occur with severeusage such as trailer towing. It may also occurwhen operating the vehicle in a high torqueconverter slip condition, such as 4-wheel driveoperation (e.g., snow plowing, off-road opera-tion). If this “HOTOIL” message turns on, stopthe vehicle and run the engine at idle or fasterwith the transmission in NEUTRAL until themessage turns off.

183

CAUTION!Continuous driving with the TransmissionTemperature “HOTOIL” Warning messageilluminated will eventually cause severetransmission damage or transmission failure.

WARNING!If the Transmission Temperature “HOTOIL”Warning message is illuminated and youcontinue operating the vehicle, in some cir-cumstances you could cause the fluid to boilover, come in contact with hot engine orexhaust components and cause a fire.

gASCAP

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that thefuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, ordamaged, a “gASCAP” message will display in theodometer display area. Tighten the fuel filler capproperly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button toturn off the message. If the problem continues, themessage will appear the next time the vehicle isstarted.

noFUSE

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines thatthe Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperlyinstalled, or damaged, a “noFUSE” messagewill display in the odometer display area. Forfurther information on fuses and fuse locationsrefer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.

CHAngE OIL Message

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oilchange indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL”message will flash in the instrument clusterodometer for approximately 12 seconds after asingle chime has sounded to indicate the nextscheduled oil change interval. The engine oilchange indicator system is duty-cycle based,which means the engine oil change interval mayfluctuate dependent upon your personal drivingstyle.

Unless reset, this message will continue todisplay each time you turn the ignition switch tothe ON/RUN position. To turn off the messagetemporarily, press and release the Trip Odom-eter button on the instrument cluster. To reset

the oil change indicator system (after perform-ing the scheduled maintenance), refer to thefollowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUNposition (do not start the engine).2. Fully depress the accelerator pedalslowly three times within 5 seconds.3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCKposition.

NOTE:If the indicator message illuminates whenyou start the vehicle, the oil change indica-tor system did not reset. If necessary, repeatthis procedure.

26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)is a part of an Onboard DiagnosticSystem called OBD II that monitorsengine and automatic transmission

control systems. The light will illuminate whenthe ignition is in the ON position before enginestart. If the bulb does not come on when turningthe key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condi-tion checked promptly.

184

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missinggas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminatethe light after engine start. The vehicle shouldbe serviced if the light stays on through severaltypical driving styles. In most situations, thevehicle will drive normally and will not requiretowing.

CAUTION!Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indi-cator Light (MIL) on could cause damage tothe engine control system. It also could affectfuel economy and driveability. If the MIL isflashing, severe catalytic converter damageand power loss will soon occur. Immediateservice is required.

WARNING!A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as ref-erenced above, can reach higher tempera-tures than in normal operating conditions.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)This can cause a fire if you drive slowly orpark over flammable substances such as dryplants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could re-sult in death or serious injury to the driver,occupants or others.

27. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indi-cator Light / Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator Light

If the Electronic Stability Program(ESP) / Traction Control System(TCS) Indicator Light begins toflash during acceleration, ease upon the accelerator and apply as

little throttle as possible. This indicator lightstarts to flash as soon as the tires lose tractionand the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) be-comes active. The ESP/TCS Indicator Lightalso flashes when TCS is active. Be sure toadapt your speed and driving to the prevailingroad conditions. If the ESP/TCS Indicator Light

is on solid, the ESP system has been turned offby the driver or a temporary condition exists thatwill not allow full ESP function.

28. O/D (Overdrive) OFF Indicator Light

This light will illuminate when the O/DOFF button has been selected andoverdrive has been turned off. The O/D

OFF button is located on the center console.

29. Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light will illuminate when thefront sway bar is disconnected.

30. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFFIndicator Light — If Equipped

This light indicates the ElectronicStability Control (ESC) is off.

185

31. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light informs you of a problemwith the Electronic Throttle Control(ETC) system. If a problem is de-tected while the engine is running,the light will either stay on or flash

depending on the nature of the problem. Cyclethe ignition key when the vehicle is safely andcompletely stopped and the shift lever is placedin the PARK position. The light should turn off. Ifthe light remains on with the engine running,your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,see an authorized dealer for service as soon aspossible.If the light continues to flash when the engine isrunning, immediate service is required and youmay experience reduced performance, an el-evated / rough idle, or engine stall and yourvehicle may require towing. The light will comeon when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUNand remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the lightdoes not come on during starting, have thesystem checked by an authorized dealer.

32. Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) Display / Compass Mini-Trip Com-puter Display — If Equipped

When the appropriate conditions exist, this dis-play shows the Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) messages. For further information,refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center”.When the appropriate conditions exist, this displayshows the Mini-Trip Computer messages. Refer to“Mini-Trip Computer” for further information.

33. Water In Fuel Indicator Light — Diesel Only

This light indicates water has col-lected in the fuel filter and shouldbe drained immediately. See anauthorized dealer for service.

34. Wait To Start Light — Diesel Only

This light will illuminate when theignition switch is first turned to theON position. Wait until the lightturns off before starting the vehicle.Refer to “Starting Procedures” in

“Starting And Operating”.

COMPASS AND TRIPCOMPUTER — IF EQUIPPEDThe Compass/Trip Computer features a driver-interactive display (displays information on out-side temperature, compass direction, and tripinformation). It is located on the lower left part ofthe cluster below the speedometer.

Compass Display

186

Control ButtonsThe Compass/Temperature control buttons arelocated on the left spoke of the steering wheel.

Press and release the STEP button on thesteering wheel to access the options in theCompass display.

NOTE:The system will display the last known out-side temperature when starting the vehicleand may need to be driven several minutesbefore the updated temperature is dis-played. Engine temperature can also affectthe displayed temperature; therefore, tem-perature readings are not updated when thevehicle is not moving.

Press and release the STEP button to stepthrough each of the following CMTC features:• Compass/Outside Temperature• AVG ECO (Average Fuel Economy)• DTE (Distance to Empty)• ET (Elapsed Time)AVG ECO and ET can be reset. When thefeature is displayed, press and hold the RESETbutton until the feature resets (about 2 sec-onds).

These messages can be cycled through bypressing the STEP button on the steeringwheel. To reset the AVG ECO or ET, press andhold the STEP button for approximately threeseconds.

Compass/Temperature DisplayNOTE:If the vehicle is equipped with a ChryslerUconnect® gps (Navigation Radio), the NAVsystem will provide the compass direction,and the variance and calibration menus willbe unavailable. The compass will performaccurately, based on GPS signals instead ofthe Earth’s magnetic field.Compass VarianceCompass Variance is the difference betweenMagnetic North and Geographic North. To com-pensate for the differences, the variance shouldbe set for the zone where the vehicle is driven,per the zone map. Once properly set, the com-pass will automatically compensate for the dif-ferences and provide the most accurate com-pass heading.

Control Buttons

187

Compass Variance Map

188

To Set The VarianceStart the engine and leave the transmissiongear selector lever in the PARK position. Pressand hold the RESET button on the steeringwheel (for approximately ten seconds) until thecurrent variance zone number is displayed. Tochange the zone, press and release the STEPbutton to increase the variance one step. Re-peat as necessary until the desired variance isachieved.NOTE:The factory default zone is 8. During pro-gramming, the zone value will wrap aroundfrom zone 15 to zone 1.Manual Compass CalibrationIf the compass appears erratic, inaccurate orabnormal, you may wish to calibrate the com-pass. Prior to calibrating the compass, makesure the proper zone is selected.1. Start the engine and leave the transmissionin the PARK position.

2. Press and hold the RESET button (for ap-proximately 10 seconds) until the current vari-ance zone number is displayed.3. Release the RESET button, then press andhold again for approximately 10 seconds, untilthe direction is displayed, with the CAL indicatoron continuously in the display.4. To complete the compass calibration, drivethe vehicle in one or more complete 360–degree circles, under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an areafree from power lines and large metallic objects,until the CAL indicator turns off. The compasswill now function normally.NOTE:

• A good calibration requires a level sur-face and an environment free from largemetallic objects such as buildings,bridges, underground cables, railroadtracks, etc.

• Magnetic materials should be kept awayfrom the top of the center of the instru-ment panel. This is where the compasssensor is located.

Average Fuel Economy / Distance ToEmpty (DTE) / Elapsed Time• Average Fuel Economy

Shows the average fuel economy since the lastreset. When the fuel economy is reset, the digitswill go blank while the history information iserased. The averaging will restart when enoughnew distance and fuel data is accumulated.

• Distance To Empty (DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be trav-eled with the fuel remaining in the tank. Thisestimated distance is determined by a weightedaverage of the instantaneous and average fueleconomy, according to the current fuel tanklevel. DTE cannot be reset.

• Elapsed Time

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since thelast reset. Elapsed time will increment when theignition switch is in the RUN or START posi-tions. The elapsed timer displays minutes:sec-onds. After 59minutes:59seconds, it displayshours:minutes:seconds.

189

Trip ConditionsTrip Odometer (ODO) / ECO (Fuel SaverIndicator) — If EquippedThis display shows the distance traveled sincethe last reset. Press and release the right button(on the instrument cluster) to switch from odom-eter to Trip A or Trip B or to ECO. Press and holdthe right button while the odometer/trip odom-eter is displayed to reset.

Trip AShows the total distance traveled for trip A sincethe last reset.

Trip BShows the total distance traveled for trip B sincethe last reset.ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If EquippedThe ECO indicator will illuminate when you aredriving in a fuel efficient manner and can beused to modify driving habits in order to in-crease fuel economy.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLEINFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)— IF EQUIPPEDThe Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) features a driver-interactive display thatis located in the instrument cluster.

This system conveniently allows the driver toselect a variety of useful information by press-ing the switches mounted on the steeringwheel. The EVIC consists of the following:• System Status• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays• Digital Speedometer• Vehicle Info• Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped)• Stop/Start System Status (if equipped)

Trip Display Button

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

190

• Personal Settings (Customer-ProgrammableFeatures)

• Compass Display• Outside Temperature Display• Trip Computer Functions• Uconnect® gps system screens (if equipped)The system allows the driver to select informa-tion by pressing the following buttons mountedon the steering wheel:

• MENU Button

Press and release the MENU but-ton to scroll through the mainmenus (Fuel Economy, Warnings,Timer, Units, System, PersonalSettings) or to exit sub-menus.

• COMPASS Button

Press and release the COMPASSbutton to display one of eight com-pass readings and the outside tem-perature or to exit sub-menus.

• SELECT Button

Press and release the SELECTbutton for access to main menus,sub-menus or to select a personalsetting in the setup menu.

• DOWN Button

Press and release the DOWN but-ton to scroll downward through thesub-menus.

Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) DisplaysWhen the appropriate conditions exist, theEVIC displays the following messages:• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning

chime)• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single

chime)• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single

chime)• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a

single chime)• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a

single chime)• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle

Not in Park — Automatic Transmission• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle in

Motion — Manual Transmission• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more doors

open, with a single chime if speed is above1 mph (1.6 km/h))

EVIC Buttons

191

• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more doorsopen, with a single chime if speed is above1 mph (1.6 km/h))

• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle isin motion)

• Liftgate Ajar (with a single chime)• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in

“Starting And Operating” for more details)• Service Park Assist System (with a single

chime)• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped• Stop/Start Not Ready — Diesel Manual

Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start Sys-tem” in “Starting And Operating” for moredetails)

• Stop/Start Ready — Diesel Manual Trans-mission Only (refer to “Stop/Start System” in“Starting And Operating” for more details)

• Stop/Start Auto Stop Active — Diesel ManualTransmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start Sys-tem” in “Starting And Operating” for moredetails)

• Stop/Start Key Start Required — DieselManual Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start System” in “Starting And Operating” formore details)

• Service Stop/Start System — Diesel ManualTransmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start Sys-tem” in “Starting And Operating” for moredetails)

• Stop/Start System Push Clutch Or Neutral —Diesel Manual Transmission Only (refer to“Stop/Start System” in “Starting And Operat-ing” for more details)

• Low Tire Pressure• Service TPM System — (refer to “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System” in “Starting andOperating” for more details)

• Premium TPM System Graphic Display

Oil Change RequiredYour vehicle is equipped with an engine oilchange indicator system. The “Oil Change Re-quired” message will flash in the EVIC displayfor approximately 10 seconds after a singlechime has sounded to indicate the next sched-

uled oil change interval. The engine oil changeindicator system is duty cycle based, whichmeans the engine oil change interval may fluc-tuate dependent upon your personal drivingstyle.Unless reset, this message will continue todisplay each time you turn the ignition switch tothe ON position. To turn off the message tem-porarily, press and release the MENU button. Toreset the oil change indicator system (afterperforming the scheduled maintenance), per-form the following procedure:1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.Do not start the engine.2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowlythree times within 10 seconds.3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion.NOTE:If the indicator message illuminates whenyou start the vehicle, the oil change indica-tor system did not reset. If necessary, repeatthis procedure.

192

EVIC Main MenuTo step to each main menu feature press andrelease the MENU button once for each step. Astep from the last item in the list will cause thefirst item in the feature list to be displayed. Thefollowing features are in the Main menu:• Compass, Outside Temperature, and ECO

display• Digital Speedometer• Average Fuel Economy• Distance to Empty• Elapsed Time• Vehicle Information

• Coolant Temp• Oil Pressure• Transmission Temp• Oil Life Remaining (Automatic Oil Change

Indicator)• EVIC Units Selection• System Status• Personal Settings• Tire PSI

NOTE:For features in the EVIC that can be reset(Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time),the EVIC prompts a reset with a SELECTbutton graphic and the word RESET next toit.When the SELECT button is pressed, the se-lected feature will reset and RESET ALL willdisplay next to the SELECT button graphic.Pressing SELECT a second time will reset bothAverage Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time. Afterthree seconds without pressing SELECT, RE-SET ALL will return to RESET and only theselected feature will have been reset.

Compass Display / ECO (Fuel SaverMode) — If EquippedThe compass readings indicate the direction thevehicle is facing. Press and release the COM-PASS button to display one of eight compassheadings, the outside temperature/ECO if theEVIC display is not already displaying thisscreen.

NOTE:The system will display the last known out-side temperature when starting the vehicleand may need to be driven several minutesbefore the updated temperature is dis-played. Engine temperature can also affectthe displayed temperature; therefore, tem-perature readings are not updated when thevehicle is not moving.ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If EquippedThe ECO message will display below the out-side temperature in the EVIC display (if theaudio system is on the ECO indicator will over-ride the audio information display line if the"Display Fuel Saver" personal setting is ON —see "Personal Settings" section). This messagewill appear whenever you are driving in a fuelefficient manner.This feature allows you to monitor when you aredriving in a fuel efficient manner, and it can beused to modify driving habits in order to in-crease fuel economy.

193

Automatic Compass CalibrationThis compass is self-calibrating, which elimi-nates the need to set the compass manually.When the vehicle is new, the compass mayappear erratic and the EVIC will display “CAL”until the compass is calibrated. You may alsocalibrate the compass by completing one ormore 360–degree turns (in an area free fromlarge metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”message displayed in the EVIC turns off. Thecompass will now function normally.NOTE:A good calibration requires a level surfaceand an environment free from large metallicobjects such as buildings, bridges, under-ground cables, railroad tracks, etc.Manual Compass CalibrationIf the compass appears erratic and the “CAL”indicator does not appear in the EVIC display,

you must put the compass into the CalibrationMode manually as follows:1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever inPARK in order to enter the EVIC ProgrammingMenus.2. Press the MENU button until Personal Set-tings (Customer-Programmable Features) dis-plays in the EVIC.3. Press the DOWN button until “CalibrateCompass” displays in the EVIC.4. Press and release the SELECT button tostart the calibration. The “CAL” indicator willdisplay in the EVIC.5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (inan area free from large metal or metallic ob-jects) until the “CAL” indicator turns off. Thecompass will now function normally.

Compass VarianceCompass Variance is the difference betweenMagnetic North and Geographic North. To com-pensate for the differences, the variance shouldbe set for the zone where the vehicle is driven,per the zone map. Once properly set, the com-pass will automatically compensate for the dif-ferences and provide the most accurate com-pass heading.NOTE:Magnetic materials should be kept awayfrom the top of the instrument panel; this iswhere the compass sensor is located.

194

Compass Variance Map

195

To Change The Compass Variance:1. Turn the ignition switch RUN (it is not nec-essary to start the engine).2. Press the MENU button until Personal Set-tings (Customer-Programmable Features) dis-plays in the EVIC.3. Press the DOWN button until “CompassVariance” message and the last variance zonenumber displays in the EVIC.4. Press and release the SELECT button untilthe proper variance zone is selected accordingto the map.5. Press and release the COMPASS button toexit.

Average Fuel EconomyShows the average fuel economy since the lastreset. Average Fuel Economy can be reset bypressing and holding the SELECT button (asprompted in the EVIC display). Upon reset, thehistory information will be erased, and the av-eraging will continue from the last fuel averagereading before the reset.

Distance To Empty (DTE)Shows the estimated distance that can be trav-eled with the fuel remaining in the tank. Thisestimated distance is determined by a weightedaverage of the instantaneous and average fueleconomy, according to the current fuel tanklevel. DTE cannot be reset.NOTE:Significant changes in driving style or ve-hicle loading will greatly affect the actualdrivable distance of the vehicle, regardlessof the DTE display value.

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles(48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTEdisplay will change to a text display of "LOWFUEL”. This display will continue until the ve-hicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significantamount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off theLOW FUEL text and a new DTE value willdisplay.

Elapsed TimeShows the total elapsed time of travel since thelast reset. Elapsed time will increment when theignition switch is in the RUN or START position.

Elapsed time is displayed as follows:• Hours• Minutes• SecondsElapsed time can be reset by pressing andholding the SELECT button (as prompted in theEVIC display). Upon reset all digits will changeto zeros and time will start incrementing again ifthe ignition switch is in RUN or START.

System StatusDisplays SYSTEM OK if there are no activeWarning Messages stored. Pressing and re-leasing the DOWN button when SYSTEM OK isdisplayed will do nothing. Displays SYSTEMWARNINGS PRESENT if there are activeWarning Messages stored. Pressing and re-leasing the DOWN button when SYSTEMWARNINGS PRESENT is displayed will displayeach stored warning for each button press.Press and Release the MENU button to returnto the Main Menu.

196

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)Personal Settings allows the driver to set andrecall features when the vehicle speed is at0 mph (0 km/h) (manual transmission) or whenthe shift lever is in PARK (auto transmission).Press and release the MENU button until Per-sonal Settings displays in the EVIC.Use the DOWN button to display one of thefollowing choices:LanguageWhen in this display you may select one of fivelanguages for all display nomenclature, includ-ing the trip functions and the navigation system(if equipped). Press the SELECT button while inthis display to select English, Espanol or Fran-cais. Then, as you continue, the information willdisplay in the selected language.Auto Lock DoorsWhen this feature is selected, all doors will lockautomatically when the vehicle reaches a speedof 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock featurecan be enabled or disabled, to make yourselection, press and release the SELECT but-ton until a check-mark appears next to the

feature showing the system has been activatedor the check-mark is removed showing thesystem has been deactivated.Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit — IfEquippedWhen ON is selected, all doors will unlock whenthe vehicle is stopped and the transmission is inthe PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’sdoor is opened. To make your selection, pressand release the SELECT button until “On” or“Off” appears.Remote Key UnlockWhen Driver Door 1st Press is selected, onlythe driver’s door will unlock on the first press ofthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterUNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press isselected, you must press the RKE transmitterUNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen-ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press isselected, all of the doors will unlock on the firstpress of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.To make your selection, press and release theSELECT button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or“All Doors 1st Press” appears.

Flash Lights with Remote Key LockWhen on is selected, the front and rear turnsignals will flash when the doors are locked orunlocked with the RKE transmitter. This featuremay be selected with or without the sound hornon lock feature selected. To make your selec-tion, press and release the SELECT button until“On” or “Off” appears.Delay Turning Headlights OffWhen this feature is selected, the driver canchoose to have the headlights remain on for 0,30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.To make your selection, press and release theSELECT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”appears.Delay Power Off to Accessories Until ExitWhen this feature is selected, the power win-dow switches, radio, hands–free system (ifequipped), DVD video system (if equipped),power sunroof (if equipped), and power outletswill remain active for up to 10 minutes after theignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.Opening either front vehicle door will cancel thisfeature. To make your selection, press andrelease the SELECT button until “Off,” “45 sec.,”“5 min.,” or “10 min.” appears.

197

Illumination Approach — If EquippedWhen this feature is selected, the headlights willactivate and remain on for up to 90 secondswhen the doors are unlocked with the RKEtransmitter. To make your selection, press andhold the SELECT button until “Off,” “30 sec,” “60sec,” or “90 sec” appears.Headlamps With Wipers (Available withAuto Headlights Only)When ON is selected, and the multifunctionlever is placed in the AUTO position, the head-lights will turn on approximately 10 secondsafter the wipers are turned ON. The headlightswill also turn off when the wipers are turnedOFF if they were turned ON by this feature. Tomake your selection, press and release theSELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.Nav–Turn By TurnWhen this feature is selected, the navigationsystem utilizes voice commands, guidingthrough the drive route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destination is reached. Tomake your selection, press and release theSELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If EquippedWhen on is selected, the HSA system is active.Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in“Starting And Operating” for system functionand operating information. To make your selec-tion, press and release the SELECT button until“On” or “Off” appears.Display Fuel Saver — If EquippedThe “ECO” message is located in the Compass/Temperature display; this message can beturned on or off. To make your selection, pressand release the SELECT button until “ON” or“OFF” appears.EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display)Displays the units used for the Outside Tem-perature, Average Fuel Economy and Distanceto Empty features. Press and Release the SE-LECT button to toggle units between "U.S." and"METRIC".Compass VarianceRefer to “Compass Display” for more informa-tion.Calibrate CompassRefer to “Compass Display” for more informa-tion.

SOUND SYSTEMSRefer to your Sound Systems Booklet.

iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —IF EQUIPPEDThis feature allows an iPod® or external USBdevice to be plugged into the USB port, locatedin the center console.iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano,5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod®software versions may not fully support theiPod® control features. Please visit Apple’swebsite for software updates.NOTE:

• If the radio has a USB port, refer to theappropriate Uconnect® SupplementManual for iPod® or external USB devicesupport capability.

• Connecting an iPod® or consumer elec-tronic audio device to the AUX port lo-cated in the radio faceplate, plays media,but does not use the iPod® /MP3 controlfeature to control the connected device.

198

Connecting The iPod® Or ExternalUSB DeviceUse the connection cable to connect an iPod®or external USB device to the vehicles USB/AUX connector port which is located in thecenter console.

Once the audio device is connected and syn-chronized to the vehicles iPod®/USB/MP3 con-trol system (iPod® or external USB device maytake a few minutes to connect), the audiodevice starts charging and is ready for use bypressing radio switches, as described below.

NOTE:If the audio device battery is completelydischarged, it may not communicate withthe iPod®/USB/MP3 control system until aminimum charge is attained. Leaving theaudio device connected to the iPod®/USB/MP3 control system may charge it to therequired level.

Using This FeatureBy using an iPod® cable, or an external USBdevice to connect to the USB port:• The audio device can be played on the

vehicle’s sound system, providing metadata(artist, track title, album, etc.) information onthe radio display.

• The audio device can be controlled using theradio buttons to Play, Browse, and List theiPod® contents.

• The audio device battery charges whenplugged into the USB/AUX connector (if sup-ported by the specific audio device).

Controlling The iPod® Or ExternalUSB Device Using Radio ButtonsTo get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control modeand access a connected audio device, eitherpress the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate orpress the VR button and say "USB" or "Switchto USB." Once in the iPod®/USB/MP3 controlmode, audio tracks (if available from audiodevice) start playing over the vehicle’s audiosystem.

Play ModeWhen switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 controlmode, the iPod® or external USB device auto-matically starts Play mode. In Play mode, thefollowing buttons on the radio faceplate may beused to control the iPod® or external USBdevice and display data:• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next

or previous track.• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click,

while playing a track, skips to the next trackor press the VR button and say "Next Track."

Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port

199

• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) byone click, will jump to the previous track inthe list or press the VR button and say"Previous Track."

• Jump backward in the current track by press-ing and holding the << RW button. Holdingthe << RW button long enough will jump tothe beginning of the current track.

• Jump forward in the current track by pressingand holding the FF>> button.

• A single press backward << RW or forwardFF>> will jump backward or forward respec-tively, for five seconds.

• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons tojump to the previous or next track. Pressingthe SEEK >> button during play mode willjump to the next track in the list, or press theVR button and say "Next or Previous Track."

• While a track is playing, press the INFObutton to see the associated metadata (artist,track title, album, etc.) for that track. Pressingthe INFO button again jumps to the nextscreen of data for that track. Once all screens

have been viewed, the last INFO buttonpress will go back to the play mode screen onthe radio.

• Pressing the REPEAT button will change theaudio device mode to repeat the currentplaying track or press the VR button and say"Repeat ON" or "Repeat Off."

• Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play thefirst 10 seconds of each track in the currentlist and then forward to the next song. To stopSCAN mode and start playing the desiredtrack, when it is playing the track, press theSCAN button again. During Scan mode,pressing the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttonswill select the previous and next tracks.

• RND button (available on sales code RESradio only): Pressing this button toggles be-tween Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes forthe iPod® or external USB device, or pressthe VR button and say "Shuffle ON" or"Shuffle Off." If the RND icon is showing onthe radio display, then the shuffle mode isON.

List Or Browse ModeDuring Play mode, pressing any of the buttonsdescribed below, will bring up List mode. Listmode enables scrolling through the list ofmenus and tracks on the audio device.• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob

functions in a similar manner as the scrollwheel on the audio device or external USBdevice.

• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counter-clockwise (backward) scrolls through thelists, displaying the track detail on the radiodisplay. Once the track to be played is high-lighted on the radio display, press the TUNEcontrol knob to select and start playing thetrack. Turning the TUNE control knob fast willscroll through the list faster. During fastscroll, a slight delay in updating the informa-tion on the radio display may be noticeable.

• During all List modes, the iPod® displays alllists in “wrap-around” mode. So if the track isat the bottom of the list, just turn the wheelbackward (counterclockwise) to get to thetrack faster.

200

• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons areused as shortcuts to the following lists on theiPod® or external USB device:

• Preset 1 – Playlists• Preset 2 – Artists• Preset 3 – Albums• Preset 4 – Genres• Preset 5 – Audiobooks• Preset 6 – Podcasts• Pressing a PRESET button will display the

current list on the top line and the first item inthat list on the second line.

• To exit List mode without selecting a track,press the same PRESET button again to goback to Play mode.

• LIST button: The LIST button will display thetop level menu of the iPod® or external USBdevice.

• Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be selected and press theTUNE control knob. This will display the nextsub-menu list item on the audio device, thenfollow the same steps to go to the desiredtrack in that list. Not all iPod® or externalUSB device sub-menu levels are availableon this system.

• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPEbutton is another shortcut button to the genrelisting on your audio device.

CAUTION!• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device

(or any supported device) anywhere in thevehicle in extreme heat or cold can alterthe operation or damage the device. Fol-low the device manufacturer’s guidelines.

• Placing items on the iPod® or externalUSB device, or connections to the iPod®or external USB device in the vehicle, cancause damage to the device and/or to theconnectors.

WARNING!Do not plug in or remove the iPod® orexternal USB device while driving. Failure tofollow this warning could result in an acci-dent.

Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)Music can be streamed from your cellularphone to the Uconnect® phone system.Controlling BTSA Using Radio ButtonsTo enter BTSA mode, press either “AUX” buttonon the radio or press the VR button and say“Bluetooth Streaming Audio.”Play ModeWhen switched to BTSA mode, some audiodevices can start playing music over the vehi-cle’s audio system, but some devices requirethe music to be initiated on the device first, thenit will get streamed to the Uconnect® phonesystem. Seven devices can be paired to theUconnect® phone system, but just one can beselected and played.

201

Selecting A Different Audio Device1. Press the PHONE button to begin.2. After the "Ready" prompt and following thebeep, say "Setup", then say "Select Audio De-vices."3. Say the name of the audio device or ask theUconnect® phone system to list the audio de-vices.Next TrackUse the SEEK UP button, or press the VRbutton on the radio and say “Next Track,” tojump to the next music track on your cellularphone.Previous TrackUse the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VRbutton on the radio and say “Previous Track,” tojump to the previous music track on your cellularphone.BrowseBrowsing is not available on a BluetoothStreaming Audio (BTSA) device. Only the cur-rent song that is playing will display info.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIOCONTROLSThe remote sound system controls are locatedon the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reachbehind the wheel to access the switches.

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switchwith a pushbutton in the center and controls thevolume and mode of the sound system. Press-ing the top of the rocker switch will increase thevolume, and pressing the bottom of the rockerswitch will decrease the volume.

Pressing the center button will make the radioswitch between the various modes available.The left-hand control is a rocker-type switchwith a pushbutton in the center. The function ofthe left-hand control is different depending onwhich mode you are in.The following describes the left-hand controloperation in each mode.

Radio OperationPressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up forthe next listenable station and pressing thebottom of the switch will “Seek” down for thenext listenable station.The button located in the center of the left-handcontrol will tune to the next preset station that youhave programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.

CD PlayerPressing the top of the switch once will go to thenext track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of theswitch once will go to the beginning of thecurrent track, or to the beginning of the previoustrack if it is within one second after the currenttrack begins to play.

Remote Sound System Controls (Back View OfSteering Wheel)

202

If you press the switch up or down twice, it playsthe second track; three times, it will play thethird, etc.The center button on the left side rocker switchhas no function for a single-disc CD player.However, when a multiple-disc CD player isequipped on the vehicle, the center button willselect the next available CD in the player.

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCETo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take thefollowing precautions:1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touchingthe surface.2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with asoft cloth, wiping from center to edge.3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoidscratching the disc.4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thin-ner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.5. Store the disc in its case after playing.6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperaturesmay become too high.NOTE:If you experience difficulty in playing a par-ticular disc, it may be damaged (i.e.,scratched, reflective coating removed, ahair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,or have protection encoding. Try a knowngood disc before considering disc playerservice.

RADIO OPERATION ANDMOBILE PHONESUnder certain conditions, the mobile phonebeing on in your vehicle can cause erratic ornoisy performance from your radio. This condi-tion may be lessened or eliminated by relocat-ing the mobile phone antenna. This condition isnot harmful to the radio. If your radio perfor-mance does not satisfactorily “clear” by therepositioning of the antenna, it is recommendedthat the radio volume be turned down or offduring mobile phone operation when not usingUconnect® (if equipped).

CLIMATE CONTROLSThe air conditioning and heating system isdesigned to make you comfortable in all typesof weather.

Automatic Temperature Control(ATC) — If Equipped

Automatic OperationThe Automatic Temperature Control system au-tomatically maintains the climate in the cabin ofthe vehicle at the comfort levels desired by thedriver and passenger.

Automatic Temperature Control

203

Operation of the system is quite simple.Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) andthe Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.NOTE:The AUTO position performs best for frontseat occupants only.

Temperature Control

Dial in the temperatureyou would like the sys-tem to maintain by rotat-ing the TemperatureControl knob. Once thecomfort level is se-lected, the system willmaintain that level auto-matically using the heat-ing system. Should the

desired comfort level require air conditioning,the system will automatically make theadjustment.You will experience the greatest efficiency bysimply allowing the system to function automati-cally. Selecting the “O” (OFF) position on the

blower control stops the system completely andcloses the outside air intake.The recommended setting for maximum com-fort is 72° F (22° C) for the average person;however, this may vary.NOTE:

• The temperature setting can be adjustedat anytime without affecting automaticoperation.

• Pressing the Air Conditioning Controlbutton while in AUTO mode will cause theLED in the control button to flash threetimes and then turn off. This indicatesthat the system is in AUTO mode andrequesting the air conditioning is notnecessary.

• If your air conditioning performanceseems lower than expected, check thefront of the A/C condenser located in frontof the radiator for an accumulation of dirtor insects. Clean with a gentle waterspray from behind the radiator andthrough the condenser. Fabric front fas-

cia protectors may reduce airflow to thecondenser, reducing air conditioningperformance.

• While operating in AUTO, the system willnot automatically sense the presence offog, mist or ice on the windshield. Thedefrost mode must be manually selectedto clear the windshield and side glass.

Manual OperationThis system offers a full complement of manualoverride features, which consist of Blower Pre-ferred Automatic, Mode Preferred Automatic, orBlower and Mode Preferred Automatic. Thismeans the operator can override the blower, themode, or both. There is a manual blower rangefor times when the AUTO setting is not desired.The blower can be set to any fixed blower speedby rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).NOTE:Please read the Automatic TemperatureControl Operation Chart that follows for de-tails.

204

Blower ControlFor full automatic opera-tion or for automaticblower operation, turnthe knob to the AUTOposition. In manualmode there are sevenblower speeds that canbe individual selected.In off position the blowerwill shut off.

The operator can override the AUTO modesetting to change airflow distribution by rotatingthe Mode Control knob (on the right) to one ofthe following positions.• Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in theinstrument panel. These outlets can beadjusted to direct airflow.

NOTE:The center instrument panel outlets can beaimed so that they are directed toward therear seat passengers for maximum airflowto the rear.

• Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel andfloor outlets.

NOTE:For all settings, except full cold or full hot,there is a difference in temperature betweenthe upper and lower outlets. The warmer airflows to the floor outlets. This feature givesimproved comfort during sunny but coolconditions.

• Floor

Air is directed through the floor outletswith a small amount flowing through thedefrost and side window demist outlets.

• Mix

Air is directed through the floor, de-frost, and side window demist outlets.

This setting works best in cold or snowy condi-tions that require extra heat to the windshield.This setting is good for maintaining comfortwhile reducing moisture on the windshield.

• Defrost

Air is directed through the windshieldand side window demist outlets. Usethis mode with maximum blower and

temperature settings for best windshield andside window defrosting.

• Air Conditioner Control

Press this button to turnon the air conditioningduring manual opera-tion only. When the airconditioning is turnedon, cool dehumidified airwill flow through the out-lets selected with theMode control dial. Press

this button a second time to turn OFF the airconditioning. An LED in the button illuminateswhen manual compressor operation is selected.

206

• Recirculation Control

The system will automatically con-trol recirculation. However, press-ing the Recirculation Control buttonwill temporarily put the system inrecirculation mode. This can be

used when outside conditions such as smoke,odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Acti-vating recirculation will cause the LED in thecontrol button to illuminate.NOTE:

• When the ignition switch is turned to theLOCK position, the recirculation featurewill be cancelled.

• In cold weather, use of the Recirculationmode may lead to excessive window fog-ging. The Recirculation mode is not al-lowed in the defrost mode in order toimprove window clearing. Recirculationwill be disabled automatically if this modeis selected.

• Extended use of recirculation may causethe windows to fog. If the interior of thewindows begins to fog, press the Recir-culation button to return to outside air.Some temp/humidity conditions willcause captured interior air to condenseon windows and hamper visibility. Forthis reason, the system will not allowRecirculation to be selected while in de-frost mode. Attempting to use the recircu-lation while in this mode will cause theLED in the control button to blink andthen turn off.

• Most of the time, when in Automatic Op-eration, you can temporarily put the sys-tem into Recirculation Mode by pressingthe Recirculation button. However, undercertain conditions, while in AutomaticMode, the system is blowing air out thedefrost vents. When these conditions arepresent, and the Recirculation button ispressed, the indicator will flash and thenturn off. This tells you that you are unableto go into Recirculation Mode at this time.

If you would like the system to go intoRecirculation Mode, you must first movethe Mode knob to Panel, Panel/Bi-Leveland then press the Recirculation button.This feature reduces the possibility ofwindow fogging.

Operating TipsNOTE:Refer to the chart at the end of this sectionfor suggested control settings for variousweather conditions.

Summer OperationThe engine cooling system must be protectedwith a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provideproper corrosion protection and to protectagainst engine overheating. A solution of 50%OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant thatmeets the requirements of Chrysler MaterialStandard MS-12106 and 50% water is recom-mended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolantselection.

207

Winter OperationUse of the air Recirculation Mode during wintermonths is not recommended because it maycause window fogging.Vacation StorageAnytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out ofservice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,run the air conditioning system at idle for aboutfive minutes in the fresh air and high blowersettings. This will ensure adequate system lu-brication to minimize the possibility of compres-sor damage when the system is started again.Window FoggingInterior fogging on the windshield can be quicklyremoved by turning the mode selector to De-frost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used tomaintain a clear windshield and provide suffi-

cient heating. If side window fogging becomes aproblem, increase blower speed. Vehicle win-dows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainyor humid weather.NOTE:Recirculate without A/C should not be usedfor long periods as fogging may occur.

Side Window DemistersA side window demister outlet is located at eachend of the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct air toward the sidewindows when the system is in the FLOOR,MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed atthe area of the windows through which you viewthe outside mirrors.

Outside Air IntakeMake sure the air intake, located directly in frontof the windshield, is free of obstructions such asleaves. Leaves collected in the air intake mayreduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum,they could plug the water drains. In wintermonths, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,slush, and snow.A/C Air Filter — If EquippedThe A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollenfrom entering the cabin. The filter acts on aircoming from outside the vehicle and recircu-lated air within the passenger compartment.Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main-taining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter serviceinformation or see your authorized dealer forservice. Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” forfilter service intervals.

208

Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions

209

5STARTING AND OPERATING

• STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215• Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215• Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215• Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215• Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C) . . . . . . . . . .216• If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216• After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217• Normal Starting — Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

• STOP/START SYSTEM — DIESEL MODELS WITH MANUALTRANSMISSION ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219• Automatic Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

• ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .221• AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .222

• Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223• Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . .223• Five-Speed Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . .223• Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

• AUTOSTICK®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227• Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

211

• MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228• Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228• Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229• Reverse Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

• FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION (COMMAND-TRAC I® ORROCK-TRAC®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230• Operating Instructions/Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230• Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231• Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

• AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK®) — RUBICON MODELS . . . . . . . . . . .233• ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .233• ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234• OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

• Side Step Removal — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235• The Basics Of Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235• When To Use 4L (Low) Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236• Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236• Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236• Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points). . . . . . . . . .237• Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238• Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240• After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

• POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242• Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

• PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243• ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

212

• ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .245• Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245• Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246• Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246• Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246• Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249• ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFFIndicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254• Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .254

• TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255• Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255• Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256• Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .256• Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257• Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257• Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258• Spare Tires — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258• Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259• Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260• Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260• Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

• TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262• TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262• TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . .263

• Base System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265213

• Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266• TPMS Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

• FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINES . . . . . . . . . . . .269• Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270• Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270• Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270• MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270• Materials Added to Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

• FUEL REQUIREMENTS — DIESEL ENGINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271• ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272

• Locking Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272• TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

• Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273• Breakaway Cable Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274• Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . .276• Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277• Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278• Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282• Trailer Hitch Attaching Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283

• RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . .284• Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284• Recreational Towing — Four — Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . .285

214

STARTING PROCEDURESBefore starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,adjust both inside and outside mirrors, andfasten your seat belts.

WARNING!• When leaving the vehicle, always remove

the key fob from the ignition and lock yourvehicle.



(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-dren, and do not leave the ignition of avehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A childcould operate power windows, other con-trols, or move the vehicle.

Manual Transmission — If EquippedApply the parking brake, place the shift lever inNEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before start-ing the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with aclutch interlocking ignition system. It will not startunless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.4WD Models OnlyIn 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless ofwhether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to thefloor. This feature enhances off-road perfor-mance by allowing the vehicle to start when in4L without having to press the clutch pedal. The“4WD Indicator Light” will illuminate when thetransfer case has been shifted into this mode.

Automatic Transmission — IfEquippedStart the engine with the shift lever in theNEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brakebefore shifting to any driving range.

Normal Starting — Gasoline EngineNOTE:Normal starting of either a cold or a warmengine is obtained without pumping orpressing the accelerator pedal.Turn the ignition switch to the START positionand release when the engine starts. If theengine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn theignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”procedure.Tip Start Feature — AutomaticTransmission OnlyTurn the ignition switch to the START positionand release it as soon as the starter engages.The starter motor will continue to run, but willautomatically disengage itself when the engineis running. If the engine fails to start, the starterwill disengage automatically in 10 seconds.

215

If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to theLOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, thenrepeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°For –29°C)To ensure reliable starting at these tempera-tures, use of an externally powered electricengine block heater (available from your autho-rized dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids

into the throttle body air inlet opening in anattempt to start the vehicle. This couldresult in a flash fire causing serious per-sonal injury.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle

to get it started. Vehicles equipped with anautomatic transmission cannot be startedthis way. Unburned fuel could enter thecatalytic converter and, once the enginehas started, ignite and damage the con-verter and vehicle.

• If the vehicle has a discharged battery,booster cables may be used to obtain astart from a booster battery or the batteryin another vehicle. This type of start can bedangerous if done improperly. Refer to“Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emer-gencies” for further information.

Without Tip Start (Manual TransmissionOnly)If the engine fails to start after you have followedthe “Normal Starting” or “Extreme ColdWeather” procedures, it may be flooded. Pushthe accelerator pedal all the way to the floor andhold it there while cranking the engine. Thisshould clear any excess fuel in case the engineis flooded.

CAUTION!To prevent damage to the starter, do notcrank the engine for more than 15 secondsat a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before tryingagain.

216

If the engine has been flooded, it may start torun, but not have enough power to continuerunning when the key is released. If this occurs,continue cranking with the accelerator pedalpushed all the way to the floor. Release theaccelerator pedal and the key once the engineis running smoothly.If the engine shows no sign of starting after two15–second periods of cranking with the accel-erator pedal held to the floor, repeat the “NormalStarting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-dures.With Tip Start (Automatic Transmission Only)If the engine fails to start after you have followedthe “Normal Starting” or “Extreme ColdWeather” procedures, it may be flooded. Toclear any excess fuel, push the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then,turn the ignition switch to the START positionand release it as soon as the starter engages.The starter motor will disengage automaticallyin 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release theaccelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the

LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, thenrepeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

CAUTION!To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to15 seconds before trying again.

After StartingThe idle speed will automatically decrease asthe engine warms up.

Normal Starting — Diesel Engine1. The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL orPARK position before you can start the engine.2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.3. Watch for the “Wait To Start Light” in theinstrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster”in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther review. It will glow for two to ten secondsor more, depending on engine temperature.When the “Wait To Start Light” goes out, theengine is ready to start.

4. Tip Start Feature (Automatic Transmis-sion Only)

Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignitionkey to the START position and then release it.The starter motor will continue to run, and it willautomatically disengage when the engine isrunning. If the engine fails to start, the starterwill disengage automatically in 25 seconds. Ifthis occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCKposition, wait 25 to 30 seconds, then repeat the“Normal Starting” procedure.NOTE:The starter motor may run up to 30 secondsin very cold conditions until the engine isstarted. The starter can be disengaged byturning the ignition key to the OFF position,if required.

217

5. Without Tip Start Feature (Manual Trans-mission Only)

Turn the ignition switch to the START positionand release when the engine starts. If theengine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn theignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”procedure.6. After the engine starts, allow it to idle forapproximately 30 seconds before driving. Thisallows oil to circulate and lubricate the turbo-charger.Engine Warm-UpAvoid full throttle operation when the engine iscold. When starting a cold engine, bring theengine up to operating speed slowly to allow theoil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.NOTE:High-speed, no-load running of a cold en-gine can result in excessive white smokeand poor engine performance. No-load en-gine speeds should be kept under 1,200 rpmduring the warm-up period, especially incold, ambient temperature conditions.

If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operatethe engine at moderate speeds for five minutesbefore full loads are applied.Engine Idling – In Cold WeatherAvoid prolonged idling in ambient temperaturesbelow 0°F (-18°C). Long periods of idling maybe harmful to your engine because combustionchamber temperatures can drop so low that thefuel may not burn completely. Incomplete com-bustion allows carbon and varnish to form onpiston rings and injector nozzles. Also, theunburned fuel can enter the crankcase, dilutingthe oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.Stopping the EngineThe following chart should be used as a guide indetermining the amount of engine idle timerequired to sufficiently cool down the turbo-

charger before shut down, depending upon thetype of driving and the amount of cargo.Before turning off your turbo diesel engine,always allow the engine to return to normalidle speed and run for several seconds. Thisassures proper lubrication of the turbo-charger. This is particularly necessary afterany period of hard driving.Idle the engine a few minutes before routineshutdown. After full load operation, idle theengine three to five minutes before shutting itdown. This idle period will allow the lubricatingoil and coolant to carry excess heat away fromthe combustion chamber, bearings, internalcomponents, and turbocharger. This is espe-cially important for turbocharged, charge aircooled engines.

218

TURBOCHARGER "COOL DOWN" CHARTDriving

ConditionsLoad Turbocharger

TemperatureIdle Time (In Minutes)

Before Shut DownStop & Go Empty Cool Less than 1Stop & Go Medium Warm 1

Highway Speeds Medium Warm 2City Traffic Max. GCWR Warm 3

Highway Speeds Max. GCWR Warm 4Uphill Grade Max. GCWR Hot 5

STOP/START SYSTEM —DIESEL MODELS WITHMANUAL TRANSMISSION ONLYThe Stop/Start function is developed to savefuel and reduce emissions. The system will stopthe engine automatically during a vehicle stop ifthe required conditions are met. Pressing theclutch pedal will automatically re-start the ve-hicle.

Automatic ModeThe Stop/Start feature is enabled after everynormal customer engine start. It will remain inSTOP/START NOT READY until you drive for-ward with a vehicle speed greater than 3 mph(5 km/h). At that time, the system will go intoSTOP/START READY and if all other conditionsare met, can go into an STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE mode.

To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOPACTIVE Mode, The Following Must Occur:1. The system must be in STOP/STARTREADY state. A STOP/START READY mes-sage will be displayed in the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC). Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for further in-formation.2. Vehicle speed must be less 3 mph (5 km/h).

219

3. Shifter must be in the NEUTRAL positionand the clutch pedal must be fully releasedThe engine will shut down, the tachometer willfall to the Stop/Start position, the STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE message will ap-pear, and the heater/air conditioning (HVAC) airflow will be reduced.Possible Reasons The Engine Does NotAUTO STOPPrior to engine shut down, the system will checkmany safety and comfort conditions to see ifthey are fulfilled. In following situations theengine will not stop:• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled• Outside temperature is less than 1°F (–17°C)

or greater than 104°F (40°C)• Actual cabin temperature is significantly dif-

ferent than temperature set on Auto HVAC• HVAC is set to full defrost mode• Engine has not reached normal operating

temperature• Battery discharged• When driving in REVERSE

• Hood is open• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case modeIt may be possible for the vehicle to be drivenseveral times without the STOP/START systemgoing into a STOP/START READY state undermore extreme conditions of the items listedabove.To Start The Engine While In TheSTOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE ModeWhen the shift lever is in NEUTRAL, the enginewill start when the clutch pedal is pressed. Thevehicle will go into STOP/START SYSTEM NOTREADY mode until the vehicle speed is greaterthan 3 mph (5 km/h).Conditions that will cause the engine to startautomatically while in STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE modeThe Engine Will Start Automatically When:• Actual cabin temperature is significantly dif-

ferent than temperature set on Auto HVAC• HVAC is set to full defrost mode• STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time ex-

ceeds 5 minutes

• Battery voltage drops too low• Low brake vacuum e.g. after several brake

pedal applications• Vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h)• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed• 4WD system is put into 4LO modeConditions that force a manual key cyclestart while in STOP/START AUTO STOPACTIVE mode:The Engine Will Not Start Automatically If:• The driver’s seatbelt was unbuckled• The engine hood has been opened• A STOP/START system error occursThe engine may then only be restarted with anignition key cycle. The STOP/START KEYSTART REQUIRED message will appear in theElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)under these conditions. Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for further in-formation.

220

To Manually Turn Off The Start StopSystem1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (locatedon the switch bank). The light on the switch willilluminate.

2. The STOP/START OFF message will appearin Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off theSTOP/START system) the engine will not bestopped.

4. If the STOP/START system is manuallyturned off. the engine can only be started andstopped by cycling the ignition switch5. The STOP/START system will reset itselfback to an ON condition every time the key isturned off and back on.To Manually Turn On The Start StopSystem1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (locatedon the switch bank).2. The light on the switch will turn off.System MalfunctionIf there is a malfunction in the STOP/STARTsystem, the system will not shut down theengine. A SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEMmessage will appear in the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC). Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for further in-formation.The system will need to be checked by yourauthorized dealer.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IFEQUIPPEDThe engine block heater warms the engine, andpermits quicker starts in cold weather. Connectthe cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electricaloutlet with a grounded, three-wire extensioncord.The engine block heater must be plugged in atleast one hour to have an adequate warmingeffect on the engine.The engine block heater cord is found under thehood bundled in front of the battery tray.

WARNING!Remember to disconnect the engine blockheater cord before driving. Damage to the110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could causeelectrocution.

STOP/START OFF Switch

221

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!Damage to the transmission may occur if thefollowing precautions are not observed:• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has

come to a complete stop.• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the

vehicle has come to a complete stop andthe engine is at idle speed.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine isabove idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure yourfoot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

NOTE:You must press and hold the brake pedalwhile shifting out of PARK.

WARNING!• Unintended movement of a vehicle could

injure those in or near the vehicle. As withall vehicles, you should never exit a ve-hicle while the engine is running. Beforeexiting a vehicle, always apply the parkingbrake, shift the transmission into PARK,turn the engine OFF, and remove the igni-tion key. Once the key is removed, thetransmission is locked in PARK, securingthe vehicle against unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe ignition key and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle. Allow-ing children to be in a vehicle unattendedis dangerous for a number of reasons. Achild or others could be seriously or fatallyinjured. Children should be warned not totouch the parking brake, brake pedal or theshift lever.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Do not leave the ignition key/key fob in or

near the vehicle, or in a location accessibleto children. A child could operate powerwindows, other controls, or move the ve-hicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higherthan idle speed. If your foot is not firmlypressing the brake pedal, the vehicle couldaccelerate quickly forward or in reverse.You could lose control of the vehicle andhit someone or something. Only shift intogear when the engine is idling normallyand your foot is firmly pressing the brakepedal.

222

Key Ignition Park InterlockThis vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition ParkInterlock which requires the transmission to bein PARK before the ignition switch can be turnedto the LOCK position. The key can only beremoved from the ignition when the ignition is inthe LOCK position, and the transmission islocked in PARK whenever the ignition switch isin the LOCK position.NOTE:If a malfunction occurs, the system will trapthe key in the ignition switch to warn youthat this safety feature is inoperable. Theengine can be started and stopped but thekey cannot be removed until you obtainservice.

Brake/Transmission Shift InterlockSystemThis vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis-sion Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds theshift lever in PARK unless the brakes are ap-plied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, theignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUNposition (engine running or not) and the brakepedal must be pressed.

Five-Speed Automatic Transmission– If EquippedThe transmission gear position display (locatedin the instrument cluster) indicates the transmis-sion gear range. You must press the brakepedal to move the shift lever out of PARK (referto “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System”in this section). To drive, move the shift leverfrom PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.The electronically-controlled transmission pro-vides a precise shift schedule. The transmissionelectronics are self-calibrating; therefore, thefirst few shifts on a new vehicle may be some-what abrupt. This is a normal condition, andprecision shifts will develop within a few hun-dred miles (kilometers).Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSEwhen the accelerator pedal is released and thevehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot onthe brake pedal when shifting between thesegears.

The transmission shift lever has only PARK,REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift posi-tions. Manual shifts can be made using theAutostick® shift control (refer to "AutoStick®" inthis section). Moving the shift lever to the left orright (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will manu-ally select the transmission gear and will displaythe current gear in the instrument cluster as 5,4, 3, 2, 1.

Shift Lever

223

Gear RangesDO NOT race the engine when shifting fromPARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.NOTE:

• After selecting any gear range, wait amoment to allow the selected gear toengage before accelerating. This is espe-cially important when the engine is cold.

• If there is a need to restart the engine, besure to cycle the ignition to the LOCKposition before restarting. Transmissiongear engagement may be delayed afterrestarting the engine if the ignition is notcycled to the LOCK position first.

PARK (P)This range supplements the parking brake bylocking the transmission. The engine can bestarted in this range. Never attempt to usePARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply theparking brake when leaving the vehicle in thisrange.When parking on a level surface, you may shiftthe transmission into PARK first, and then applythe parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brakebefore shifting the transmission to PARK, oth-erwise the load on the transmission lockingmechanism may make it difficult to move theshift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution,turn the front wheels toward the curb on adownhill grade and away from the curb on anuphill grade.NOTE:On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure thatthe transfer case is in a drive position.

WARNING!• Never use the PARK position as a substi-

tute for the parking brake. Always applythe parking brake fully when parked toguard against vehicle movement and pos-sible injury or damage.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Your vehicle could move and injure you

and others if it is not completely in PARK.Check by trying to move the shift lever outof PARK with the brake pedal released.Make sure the transmission is in PARKbefore leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higherthan idle speed. If your foot is not firmlypressing the brake pedal, the vehicle couldaccelerate quickly forward or in reverse.You could lose control of the vehicle andhit someone or something. Only shift intogear when the engine is idling normallyand your foot is firmly pressing the brakepedal.

(Continued)

224

WARNING! (Continued)• Unintended movement of a vehicle could

injure those in or near the vehicle. As withall vehicles, you should never exit a ve-hicle while the engine is running. Beforeexiting a vehicle, always apply the parkingbrake, shift the transmission into PARK,and remove the ignition key. Once theignition key is removed, the transmission islocked in PARK, securing the vehicleagainst unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe ignition key and lock your vehicle.


(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Do not leave the ignition key/key fob in or

near the vehicle, or in a location accessibleto children. A child could operate powerwindows, other controls, or move the ve-hicle.

CAUTION!• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK,

you must place the ignition from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, andalso press the brake pedal. Otherwise,damage to the shift lever could result.

• DO NOT race the engine when shiftingfrom PARK or NEUTRAL into another gearrange, as this can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used toensure that you have engaged the transmissioninto the PARK position:• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the

shift lever all the way forward and to the leftuntil it stops and is fully seated.

• Look at the transmission gear position dis-play and verify that it indicates the PARKposition.

• With brake pedal released, verify that theshift lever will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE (R)This range is for moving the vehicle backward.Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle hascome to a complete stop.NEUTRAL (N)Use this range when the vehicle is standing forprolonged periods with the engine running. Theengine may be started in this range. Apply theparking brake and shift the transmission intoPARK if you must leave the vehicle.

225

WARNING!Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn offthe ignition to coast down a hill. These areunsafe practices that limit your response tochanging traffic or road conditions. You mightlose control of the vehicle and have a colli-sion.

CAUTION!Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving forany other reason with the transmission inNEUTRAL can cause severe transmissiondamage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in“Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Dis-abled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergen-cies” for further information.

DRIVE (D)This range should be used for most city andhighway driving. It provides the smoothest up-shifts and downshifts, and the best fueleconomy. The transmission automatically up-shifts through underdrive first, second, and third

gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifthgear. The DRIVE position provides optimumdriving characteristics under all normal operat-ing conditions.When frequent transmission shifting occurs(such as when operating the vehicle underheavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, travel-ing into strong head winds, or while towingheavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift control(refer to “AutoStick®” in this section) to select alower gear. Under these conditions, using alower gear will improve performance and ex-tend transmission life by reducing excessiveshifting and heat buildup.Transmission Limp Home ModeTransmission function is monitored electroni-cally for abnormal conditions. If a condition isdetected that could result in transmission dam-age, Transmission Limp Home Mode is acti-vated. In this mode, the transmission remains inthe current gear until the vehicle is brought to astop. After the vehicle has stopped, the trans-mission will remain in second gear regardless ofwhich forward gear is selected. PARK, RE-VERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-ate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may

be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows thevehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer forservice without damaging the transmission.In the event of a momentary problem, thetransmission can be reset to regain all forwardgears by performing the following steps:1. Stop the vehicle.2. Shift the transmission into PARK.3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.5. Restart the engine.6. Shift into the desired gear range. If theproblem is no longer detected, the transmissionwill return to normal operation.NOTE:Even if the transmission can be reset, werecommend that you visit your authorizeddealer at your earliest possible conve-nience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-tic equipment to determine if the problemcould recur. If the transmission cannot bereset, authorized dealer service is required.

226

Overdrive OperationThe automatic transmission includes an elec-tronically controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). Thetransmission will automatically shift into Over-drive if the following conditions are present:• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.• The driver is not heavily pressing the

accelerator.

AUTOSTICK®AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmissionfeature providing manual shift control, givingyou more control of the vehicle. AutoStick®allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi-nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, andimprove overall vehicle performance.This system can also provide you with morecontrol during passing, city driving, cold slipperyconditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, andmany other situations.

OperationWhen the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,the transmission will operate automatically,shifting between the five available gears. Toengage AutoStick®, simply tap the shift lever tothe right or left (+/-) while in the DRIVE position.Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick® mode will down-shift the transmission to the next lower gear,while using (+) to enter AutoStick® mode willretain the current gear. When AutoStick® isactive, the current transmission gear is dis-played in the instrument cluster.In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shiftup or down when (+/-) is manually selected bythe driver, unless an engine lugging or over-speed condition would result. It will remain inthe selected gear until another upshift or down-shift is chosen, except as described below.• The transmission will automatically upshift

when necessary to prevent engine over-speed.

• Heavily pressing the accelerator pedal willgenerate an automatic downshift (for im-proved acceleration) when reasonable.

• The transmission will automatically downshiftas the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lug-ging) and will display the current gear.

• The transmission will automatically downshiftto first gear when coming to a stop. After astop, the driver should manually upshift (+) thetransmission as the vehicle is accelerated.

• You can start out, from a stop, in first orsecond gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allowstarting in second gear. Starting out in sec-ond gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions.

• The system will ignore attempts to upshift attoo low of a vehicle speed.

• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick®is engaged.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeablewhen AutoStick® is engaged.

NOTE:When the transfer case is in the 4L (Low)range, the transmission will shift automati-cally (but no higher than the displayed gear).

227

To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shiftlever to the right (+) until "D" is once againdisplayed in the instrument cluster. You can shiftin or out of the AutoStick® mode at any timewithout taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.

WARNING!Do not downshift for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheelscould lose their grip and the vehicle couldskid, causing a collision or personal injury.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IFEQUIPPED

WARNING!You or others could be injured if you leave thevehicle unattended without having the parkingbrake fully applied. The parking brake shouldalways be applied when the driver is not in thevehicle, especially on an incline.

CAUTION!Never drive with your foot resting on theclutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicleon a hill with the clutch pedal partially en-gaged, as this will cause abnormal wear onthe clutch.

NOTE:During cold weather, you may experienceincreased effort in shifting until the trans-mission fluid warms up. This is normal.

ShiftingFully press the clutch pedal before shiftinggears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightlypress the accelerator pedal.You should always use first gear when startingfrom a standing position.Recommended Vehicle Shift SpeedsTo utilize your manual transmission efficientlyfor both fuel economy and performance, itshould be upshifted as listed in recommendedshift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speedslisted for acceleration. When heavily loaded orpulling a trailer these recommended up-shiftspeeds may not apply.

Shift Pattern

228

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6

3.6LAccel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)

NOTE:Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above arefor 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4Lwould be significantly less.

DownshiftingMoving from a high gear down to a lower gear isrecommended to preserve brakes when drivingdown steep hills. In addition, downshifting at theright time provides better acceleration when youdesire to resume speed. Downshift progres-sively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeedingthe engine and clutch.

WARNING!Do not downshift for additional engine brakingon a slippery surface. The drive wheels couldlose their grip, and the vehicle could skid.

CAUTION!• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower

gears at higher vehicle speeds can damagethe engine and clutch systems, Any attemptto shift into lower gear with clutch pedaldepressed may result damage to the clutchsystem. Shifting into lower gear and releas-ing the clutch may result in engine damage.

• When descending a hill, be very careful todownshift one gear at a time to preventoverspeeding the engine which can causeengine damage, and/or clutch damage,even if the clutch pedal is pressed. Iftransfer case is in low range the vehiclespeeds to cause engine and clutch dam-age are significantly lower.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)• Failure to follow the maximum recom-

mended downshifting speeds may causethe engine damage and/or damage theclutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.

• Descending a hill in low range with clutchpedal depressed could result in clutchdamage

Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds

CAUTION!Failure to follow the maximum recommendeddownshifting speeds may cause the engine tooverspeed and/or damage the clutch disc,even if the clutch pedal is pressed.

229

Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1

Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)

NOTE:Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above arefor 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4Lwould be significantly less.

Reverse ShiftingTo shift into REVERSE, bring the vehicle to acomplete stop. Press the clutch and pausebriefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating.Beginning from the NEUTRAL position, movethe shift lever in one quick, smooth motionstraight across and into the REVERSE area(the driver will feel a firm “click” as the shifterpasses the “knock-over”). Complete the shift bypulling the shift lever into REVERSE.The “knock-over” provides a resistance to thedriver from accidentally entering the REVERSEshift area and warns the driver that they areabout to shift the transmission into REVERSE.Due to this feature, a slow shift to REVERSEcan be perceived as a high shift effort.

FOUR–WHEEL DRIVEOPERATION (COMMAND-TRAC I® OR ROCK-TRAC®)

WARNING!Failure to engage a transfer case positioncompletely can cause transfer case damage orloss of power and vehicle control. You couldhave a collision. Do not drive the vehicleunless the transfer case is fully engaged.

Operating Instructions/PrecautionsThe transfer case provides four mode positions:• 2H (Two-wheel drive high range)• 4H (Four-wheel drive high range)• N (Neutral)• 4L (Four-wheel drive low range)

The transfer case is intended to be driven in the2H position for normal street and highway con-ditions such as hard-surfaced roads.In the event that additional traction is required,the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can beused to lock the front and rear driveshaftstogether, forcing the front and rear wheels torotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L

Four-Wheel Drive Shift Controls

230

positions are intended for loose, slippery roadsurfaces only and not intended for normal driv-ing. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions onhard-surfaced roads will cause increased tirewear and damage to the driveline components.Refer to “Shifting Procedures” in this section forfurther information on shifting into 4H or 4L.The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instru-ment cluster) alerts the driver that the vehicle isin four-wheel drive, and the front and reardriveshafts are locked together. The light willilluminate when the transfer case is shifted intothe 4H position.NOTE:Do not attempt to shift when only the front orrear wheels are spinning. The transfer caseis not equipped with a synchronizer, and thefront and rear driveshaft speeds must beequal for a shift to take place. Shifting whileonly the front or rear wheels are spinningcan cause damage to the transfer case.

When operating your vehicle in 4L, the enginespeed will be approximately three times (fourtimes for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4Hpositions at a given road speed. Take care notto overspeed the engine.Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehiclesdepends on tires of equal size, type, and cir-cumference on each wheel. Any difference willadversely affect shifting and cause damage tothe transfer case.Because four-wheel drive provides improvedtraction, there is a tendency to exceed safeturning and stopping speeds. Do not go fasterthan road conditions permit.

WARNING!You or others could be injured if you leavethe vehicle unattended with the transfer casein the NEUTRAL (N) position without firstfully engaging the parking brake. The trans-fer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengagesboth the front and rear drive shaft from the

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to moveregardless of the transmission position. Theparking brake should always be appliedwhen the driver is not in the vehicle.

Shift PositionsFor additional information on the appropriateuse of each 4WD system mode position, seethe information below:2H PositionThis range is used for normal street and high-way driving on hard-surfaced roads.4H PositionThis range locks the front and rear driveshaftstogether, forcing the front and rear wheels torotate at the same speed. This range (4H)provides additional traction for loose, slipperyroad surfaces and should not be used on drypavement.The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instru-ment cluster) will illuminate when the transfercase is shifted into the 4H position.

231

N (Neutral) PositionThis range disengages the front and rear drive-shafts from the powertrain. It is to be used forflat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to“Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operat-ing” for further information.4L PositionThis range locks the front and rear driveshaftstogether, forcing the front and rear wheels torotate at the same speed. This range (4L)provides additional traction and maximum pull-ing power for loose, slippery road surfaces only.Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instru-ment cluster) will illuminate when the transfercase is shifted into the 4L position.NOTE:When in 4WD, the “ESC Off Indicator Light”will display in the instrument cluster.

Shifting Procedure2H to 4H or 4H to 2HShifting between 2H and 4H can be made withthe vehicle stopped or in motion. With thevehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release theaccelerator pedal after completing the shift.Apply a constant force when shifting the trans-fer case lever.4H to 4L or 4L to 4HWith the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission intoNEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on amanual transmission. While the vehicle iscoasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift thetransfer case lever firmly to the desired position.Do not pause with the transfer case in N (Neu-tral). Once the shift is completed, place theautomatic transmission into DRIVE or releasethe clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

NOTE:Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with thevehicle completely stopped; however, diffi-culty may occur due to the mating teeth notbeing properly aligned. Several attemptsmay be required for clutch teeth alignmentand shift completion to occur. The preferredmethod is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting toengage or disengage 4L with the vehiclemoving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

WARNING!Failure to engage a transfer case positioncompletely can cause transfer case damageor loss of power and vehicle control. Youcould have a collision. Do not drive thevehicle unless the transfer case is fully en-gaged.

232

AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK®) —RUBICON MODELSThe AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instru-ment panel (to the left of the steering column).

This feature will only activate when the followingconditions are met:• Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or

less.

To activate the system, press the bottom of theAXLE LOCK switch once to lock the rear axleonly (the “Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light” willilluminate), press the bottom of the switch againto lock the front axle (the “Front Axle LockIndicator Light” will illuminate). When the rearaxle is locked, pressing the switch again willlock or unlock the front axle.NOTE:The indicator lights will flash until the axlesare fully locked or unlocked.To unlock the axles, press the top of the AXLELOCK switch.Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is takenout of 4L (Low) range, or the ignition switch isturned to the OFF position.

ELECTRONIC SWAY BARDISCONNECT — IF EQUIPPEDYour vehicle may be equipped with an elec-tronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. Thissystem allows greater front suspension travel inoff-road situations.

This system is controlled by the SWAY BARswitch located on the instrument panel (to theleft of the steering column).

Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate thesystem. Press the switch again to deactivatethe system. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light”(located in the instrument cluster) will illuminatewhen the bar is disconnected. The “Sway BarIndicator Light” will flash during activation tran-sition, or when activation conditions are notmet. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain inon-road mode during normal driving conditions.

Axle Lock Switch

Sway Bar Switch

233

WARNING!Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and driveon hard-surfaced roads or at speeds above18 mph (29 km/h); you may lose control ofthe vehicle, which could result in seriousinjury. The front stabilizer bar enhances ve-hicle stability and is necessary for maintain-ing control of the vehicle. The system moni-tors vehicle speed and will attempt toreconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by aflashing or solid “Sway Bar Indicator Light.”Once vehicle speed is reduced below14 mph (22 km/h), the system will once againattempt to return to off-road mode.

To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift toeither 4H or 4L and press the SWAY BAR switchto obtain the off-road position. Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Oper-ating” for further information. The “Sway BarIndicator Light” will flash until the stabilizer/swaybar has been fully disconnected.

NOTE:The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque lockeddue to left and right suspension height differ-ences. This condition is due to driving surfacedifferences or vehicle loading. In order for thestabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect,the right and left halves of the bar must bealigned. This alignment may require that thevehicle be driven onto level ground or rockedfrom side to side.To return to on-road mode, press the SWAYBAR switch again.

WARNING!If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return toon-road mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator Light”will flash in the instrument cluster and vehiclestability is greatly reduced. Do not attempt todrive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h).Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) maycause loss of control of the vehicle, whichcould result in serious injury. Contact yourlocal authorized dealer for assistance.

ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPSUtility vehicles have higher ground clearanceand a narrower track to make them capable ofperforming in a wide variety of off-road applica-tions. Specific design characteristics give thema higher center of gravity than ordinary cars.An advantage of the higher ground clearance isa better view of the road, allowing you toanticipate problems. They are not designed forcornering at the same speeds as conventionaltwo-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform sat-isfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all pos-sible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.As with other vehicles of this type, failure tooperate this vehicle correctly may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover.

234

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

Side Step Removal — If EquippedNOTE:Prior to off-road usage, the side stepsshould be removed to prevent damage.1. Remove the two nuts from the bodyside.

2. Remove one bolt from the underside of thevehicle.

3. Remove the side step assembly.

The Basics Of Off-Road DrivingYou will encounter many types of terrain drivingoff-road. You should be familiar with the terrainand area before proceeding. There are manytypes of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt,gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice.Every surface has a different effect on yourvehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Con-trolling your vehicle is one of the keys to suc-cessful off-road driving, so always keep a firmgrip on the steering wheel and maintain a gooddriving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations,

turns or braking. In most cases, there are noroad signs, posted speed limits or signal lights.Therefore, you will need to use your own goodjudgment on what is safe and what is not. Whenon a trail, you should always be looking aheadfor surface obstacles and changes in terrain.The key is to plan your future driving route whileremembering what you are currently drivingover.

CAUTION!Never park your vehicle over dry grass orother combustible materials. The heat fromyour vehicle exhaust system could cause afire.

WARNING!Always wear your seat belt and firmly tiedown cargo. Unsecured cargo can becomeprojectiles in an off-road situation.

235

When To Use 4L (Low) RangeWhen off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) foradditional traction and control on slippery ordifficult terrain, ascending or descending steephills, and to increase low speed pulling power.This range should be limited to extreme situa-tions such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines,or sand where additional low speed pullingpower is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4L(Low) range.

CAUTION!Do not use 4L (Low) range when operatingthe vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hard-ware damage can result.

Simultaneous Brake And ThrottleOperationMany off-road driving conditions require thesimultaneous use of the brake and throttle(two-footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs,or other stepped objects, using light brake pres-sure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from

jerking or lurching. This technique is also usedwhen you need to stop and restart a vehicle ona steep incline.

Driving In Snow, Mud And SandSnowIn heavy snow or for additional control andtraction at slower speeds, shift the transmissioninto a low gear and the transfer case into 4L(Low) if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gearthan necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels andtraction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop,try turning your steering wheel no more than a1/4 turn quickly back and forth, while still apply-ing throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh"bite" and help maintain your momentum.

CAUTION!On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift athigh engine RPM or vehicle speeds, be-cause engine braking may cause skiddingand loss of control.

MudDeep mud creates a great deal of suctionaround the tires and is very difficult to getthrough. You should use second gear (manualtransmission), or DRIVE (automatic transmis-sion), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low)position to maintain your momentum. If youstart to slow to a stop, try turning your steeringwheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back andforth for additional traction. Mud holes pose anincreased threat of vehicle damage and gettingstuck. They are normally full of debris fromprevious vehicles getting stuck. As a good prac-tice before entering any mud hole, get out anddetermine how deep it is, if there are any hiddenobstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recov-ered if stuck.SandSoft sand is very difficult to travel through withfull tire pressure. When crossing soft, sandyspots in a trail, maintain your vehicle’s momen-tum and do not stop. The key to driving in softsand is using the appropriate tire pressure,accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuversand maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If youare going to be driving on large soft sandy areas

236

or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a mini-mum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greatertire surface area. Reduced tire pressure willdrastically improve your traction and handlingwhile driving on the soft sand, but you mustreturn the tires to normal air pressure beforedriving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Besure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior toreducing the pressure.

CAUTION!Reduced tire pressures may cause tire un-seating and total loss of air pressure. Toreduce the risk of tire unseating, while at areduced tire pressure, reduce your speedand avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Crossing Obstacles (Rocks AndOther High Points)While driving off-road, you will encounter manytypes of terrain. These varying types of terrainbring different types of obstacles. Before pro-ceeding, review the path ahead to determinethe correct approach and your ability to safelyrecover the vehicle if something goes wrong.

Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bringthe vehicle to a complete stop and then inch thevehicle forward until it makes contact with theobject. Apply the throttle lightly while holding alight brake pressure and ease the vehicle upand over the object.

WARNING!Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steer-ing system loading which could cause you toloose control of your vehicle.

Using A SpotterThere are many times where it is hard to see theobstacle or determine the correct path. Deter-mining the correct path can be extremely diffi-cult when you are confronting many obstacles.In these cases have someone guide you over,through, or around the obstacle. Have the per-son stand a safe distance in front of you wherethey can see the obstacle, watch your tires andundercarriage, and guide you through.Crossing Large RocksWhen approaching large rocks, choose a pathwhich ensures you drive over the largest of

them with your tires. This will lift your undercar-riage over the obstacle. The tread of the tire istougher and thicker than the side wall and isdesigned to take the abuse. Always look aheadand make every effort to cross the large rockswith your tires.

CAUTION!• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is

large enough to strike your axles or under-carriage.

• Never attempt to drive over a rock which islarge enough to contact the door sills.

Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, WashoutOr RutWhen crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout ora large rut, the angled approach is the key tomaintaining your vehicle’s mobility. Approachthese obstacles at a 45-degree angle and leteach tire go through the obstacle independently.You need to use caution when crossing largeobstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt tocross any large obstacle with steep sides at anangle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of

237

a rollover. If you get caught in a rut, dig a smalltrench to the right or left at a 45-degree angleahead of the front tires. Use the removed dirt tofill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.You should now be able to drive out followingthe trench you just created at a 45-degreeangle.

WARNING!There is an increased risk of rollover whencrossing an obstacle, at any angle, withsteep sides.

Crossing LogsTo cross a log, approach it at a slight angle(approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allowsone front tire to be on top of the log while theother just starts to climb the log. While climbingthe log, modulate your brake and accelerator toavoid spinning the log out from under your tires.Then ease the vehicle off the log using yourbrakes.

CAUTION!Do not attempt to cross a log with a greaterdiameter than the running ground clearanceor the vehicle will become high-centered.

Getting High-CenteredIf you get hung up or high-centered on anobject, get out of the vehicle and try to deter-mine what the vehicle is hung up on, where it iscontacting the underbody and what is the bestdirection to recover the vehicle. Depending onwhat you are in contact with, jack the vehicle upand place a few rocks under the tires so theweight is off of the high point when you let thevehicle down. You can also try rocking thevehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.

CAUTION!Winching or rocking the vehicle off hardobjects increases the risk of underbody dam-age.

Hill ClimbingHill climbing requires good judgment and agood understanding of your abilities and yourvehicle’s limitations. Hills can cause seriousproblems. Some are just too steep to climb andshould not be attempted. You should alwaysfeel confident with the vehicle and your abilities.You should always climb hills straight up anddown. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.Before Climbing A Steep HillAs you approach a hill, consider its grade orsteepness. Determine if it is too steep. Look tosee what the traction is on the hill side trail. Isthe trail straight up and down? What is on topand the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,branches or other obstacles on the path? Canyou safely recover the vehicle if something goeswrong? If everything looks good and you feelconfident, shift the transmission into a lowergear with 4L (Low) engaged, and proceed withcaution, maintaining your momentum as youclimb the hill.Driving Up HillOnce you have determined your ability to pro-ceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear,line your vehicle up for the straightest possible

238

run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttleand apply more power as you start up the hill.Do not race forward into a steep grade; theabrupt change of grade could cause you to losecontrol. If the front end begins to bounce, easeoff the throttle slightly to bring all four tires backon the ground. As you approach the crest of thehill, ease off the throttle and slowly proceed overthe top. If the wheels start to slip as youapproach the crest of a hill, ease off the accel-erator and maintain headway by turning thesteering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quicklyback and forth. This will provide a fresh "bite"into the surface and will usually provide enoughtraction to complete the climb. If you do notmake it to the top, place the vehicle in RE-VERSE and back straight down the grade usingengine resistance along with the vehicle brakes.

WARNING!Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle orturn around on a steep grade. Driving acrossan incline increases the risk of a rollover,which may result in severe injury.

Driving DownhillBefore driving down a steep hill, you need todetermine if it is too steep for a safe descent.What is the surface traction? Is the grade toosteep to maintain a slow, controlled descent?Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Isthere plenty of distance at the base of the hill toregain control if the vehicle descends to fast? Ifyou feel confident in your ability to proceed,then make sure you are in 4L (Low) and pro-ceed with caution. Allow engine braking to con-trol the descent and apply your brakes, if nec-essary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL.Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with en-gine braking. Descending a grade too fastcould cause you to lose control and beseriously injured or killed.

Driving Across An InclineIf at all possible, avoid driving across an incline.If it is necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities.Driving across an incline places more weight onthe downhill wheels, which increases the pos-sibilities of a downhill slide or rollover. Makesure the surface has good traction with firm andstable soils. If possible, transverse the incline atan angle heading slightly up or down.

WARNING!Driving across an incline increases the risk ofa rollover , which may result in severe injury.

If You Stall Or Begin To Lose HeadwayIf you stall or begin to lose headway whileclimbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to cometo a stop and immediately apply the brake.Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE.Back slowly down the hill allowing engine brak-ing to control the descent and apply yourbrakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires tolock.

239

WARNING!If the engine stalls or you lose headway orcannot make it to the top of a steep hill orgrade, never attempt to turn around. To do somay result in tipping and rolling the vehicle,which may result in severe injury. Alwaysback carefully straight down a hill in RE-VERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRALusing only the vehicle brakes. Never drivediagonally across a hill, always drive straightup or down.

Driving Through WaterExtreme care should be taken crossing anytype of water. Water crossings should beavoided, if possible, and only be attemptedwhen necessary in a safe, responsible manner.You should only drive through areas which aredesignated and approved. You should treadlightly and avoid damage to the environment.You should know your vehicle’s abilities and beable to recover it if something goes wrong. Youshould never stop or shut a vehicle off whencrossing deep water unless you ingested water

into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, donot attempt to restart it. Determine if it hasingested water first. The key to any crossing islow and slow. Shift into first gear (manual trans-mission), or DRIVE (automatic transmission),with the transfer case in the 4L (Low) positionand proceed very slowly with a constant slowspeed {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum} andlight throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not tryto accelerate through the crossing. After cross-ing any water higher than the bottom of the axledifferentials, you should inspect all of the ve-hicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.

CAUTION!• Water ingestion into the axles, transmis-

sion, transfer case, engine or vehicle inte-rior can occur if you drive too fast orthrough too deep of water. Water cancause permanent damage to engine,driveline or other vehicle components, andyour brakes will be less effective once wetand/or muddy.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)• This vehicle is capable of crossing through

water at a depth of 30 inches (76 cm) atspeeds no greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).Water ingestion can occur causing dam-age to your vehicle.

Before You Cross Any Type Of WaterAs you approach any type of water, you need todetermine if you can cross it safely and respon-sibly. If necessary, get out and walk through thewater or probe it with a stick. You need to besure of its depth, approach angle, current andbottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddywaters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sureyou will not be intruding on any wildlife, and youcan recover the vehicle if necessary. The key toa safe crossing is the water depth, current andbottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehiclewill sink in, effectively increasing the water levelon the vehicle. Be sure to consider this whendetermining the depth and the ability to safelycross.

240

Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded AreasOr Other Standing WaterPuddles, pools, flooded or other standing waterareas normally contain murky or muddy waters.These water types normally contain hiddenobstacles and make it difficult to determine anaccurate water depth, approach angle, andbottom condition. Murky or muddy water holesare where you want to hook up tow straps priorto entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner andeasier vehicle recovery. If you are able to deter-mine you can safely cross, than proceed usingthe low and slow method.

CAUTION!Muddy waters can reduce the cooling sys-tem effectiveness by depositing debris ontothe radiator.

Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow RiversOr Other Flowing WaterFlowing water can be extremely dangerous.Never attempt to cross a fast running stream orriver even in shallow water. Fast moving watercan easily push your vehicle downstream,

sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallowwater, a high current can still wash the dirt outfrom around your tires putting you and yourvehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk ofpersonal injury and vehicle damage with slowerwater currents in depths greater than the vehi-cle’s running ground clearance. You shouldnever attempt to cross flowing water which isdeeper than the vehicle’s running ground clear-ance. Even the slowest current can push theheaviest vehicle downstream and out of controlif the water is deep enough to push on the largesurface area of the vehicle’s body. Before youproceed, determine the speed of the current,the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom con-dition and if there are any obstacles. Then crossat an angle heading slightly upstream using thelow and slow technique.

WARNING!Never drive through fast moving deep water. Itcan push your vehicle downstream, sweepingit out of control. This could put you and yourpassengers at risk of injury or drowning.

After Driving Off-RoadOff-road operation puts more stress on yourvehicle than does most on-road driving. Aftergoing off-road, it is always a good idea to checkfor damage. That way you can get any problemstaken care of right away and have your vehicleready when you need it.• Completely inspect the underbody of your

vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,suspension, and exhaust system for dam-age.

• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris andclean as required.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, par-ticularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-nents, steering, and suspension. Retightenthem, if required, and torque to the valuesspecified in the Service Manual.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush.These things could be a fire hazard. Theymight hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.

241

• After extended operation in mud, sand, wa-ter, or similar dirty conditions, have the radia-tor, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings,and axle yokes inspected and cleaned assoon as possible.

WARNING!Abrasive material in any part of the brakesmay cause excessive wear or unpredictablebraking. You might not have full brakingpower when you need it to prevent a colli-sion. If you have been operating your vehiclein dirty conditions, get your brakes checkedand cleaned as necessary.

• If you experience unusual vibration after driv-ing in mud, slush or similar conditions, checkthe wheels for impacted material. Impactedmaterial can cause a wheel imbalance andfreeing the wheels of it will correct thesituation.

POWER STEERINGThe standard power steering system will giveyou good vehicle response and increased easeof maneuverability in tight spaces. The systemwill provide mechanical steering capability ifpower assist is lost.If for some reason the power assist is inter-rupted, it will still be possible to steer yourvehicle. Under these conditions, you will ob-serve a substantial increase in steering effort,especially at very low vehicle speeds and dur-ing parking maneuvers.NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of thesteering wheel travel are considered nor-mal and do not indicate that there is aproblem with the power steering system.

• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, thepower steering pump may make noise fora short amount of time. This is due to thecold, thick fluid in the steering system.This noise should be considered normal,and it does not in any way damage thesteering system.

WARNING!Continued operation with reduced powersteering assist could pose a safety risk toyourself and others. Service should be ob-tained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!Prolonged operation of the steering systemat the end of the steering wheel travel willincrease the steering fluid temperature and itshould be avoided when possible. Damageto the power steering pump may occur.

Power Steering Fluid CheckChecking the power steering fluid level at adefined service interval is not required. The fluidshould only be checked if a leak is suspected,abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the sys-tem is not functioning as anticipated. Coordi-nate inspection efforts through an authorizeddealer.

242

CAUTION!Do not use chemical flushes in your powersteering system as the chemicals can dam-age your power steering components. Suchdamage is not covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

WARNING!Fluid level should be checked on a levelsurface and with the engine off to preventinjury from moving parts and to ensure ac-curate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Useonly manufacturer’s recommended powersteering fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the properindicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe anyspilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids,Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MaintainingYour Vehicle” for further information.

PARKING BRAKEBefore leaving the vehicle, make sure that theparking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain toleave an automatic transmission in PARK, ormanual transmission in REVERSE or first gear.The parking brake lever is located in the centerconsole. To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up as firmly as possible. To release theparking brake, pull the lever up slightly, pressthe center button, then lower the lever com-pletely.

When the parking brake is applied with theignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” inthe instrument cluster will illuminate.NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and theautomatic transmission is placed in gear,the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. Ifvehicle speed is detected, a chime willsound to alert the driver. Fully release theparking brake before attempting to movethe vehicle.

• This light only shows that the parkingbrake is applied. It does not show thedegree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn thefront wheels toward the curb on a downhillgrade and away from the curb on an uphillgrade. For vehicles equipped with an automatictransmission, apply the parking brake beforeplacing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise theload on the transmission locking mechanismmay make it difficult to move the shift lever outof PARK. The parking brake should always beapplied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

Parking Brake

243

WARNING!• Never use the PARK position on an auto-

matic transmission as a substitute for theparking brake. Always apply the parkingbrake fully when parked to guard againstvehicle movement and possible injury ordamage.

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe key fob from the ignition and lock yourvehicle.



(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-

gaged before driving; failure to do so canlead to brake failure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake whenleaving your vehicle or it may roll and causedamage or injury. Also, be certain to leave anautomatic transmission in PARK, a manualtransmission in REVERSE or first gear. Fail-ure to do so may cause the vehicle to rolland cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on withthe parking brake released, a brake systemmalfunction is indicated. Have the brakesystem serviced by an authorized dealerimmediately.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMThe Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designedto aid the driver in maintaining vehicle controlunder adverse braking conditions. The systemoperates with a separate computer to modulatehydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up andhelp avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.All vehicle wheels and tires must be the samesize and type, and tires must be properly in-flated to produce accurate signals for the com-puter.

WARNING!Significant over or under-inflation of tires, ormixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehiclecan lead to loss of braking effectiveness.

The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a lowspeed self-test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If forany reason your foot is on the brake when thevehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h), this checkwill be delayed until 25 mph (40 km/h).

244

The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runsduring the self-test, and during an ABS stop, toprovide the regulated hydraulic pressure. Themotor pump makes a low humming noise duringoperation; this is normal.

WARNING!• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will di-

minish their effectiveness and may lead toa collision. Pumping makes the stoppingdistance longer. Just press firmly on yourbrake pedal when you need to slow downor stop.

• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannotprevent the natural laws of physics fromacting on the vehicle, nor can they in-crease braking or steering efficiency be-yond that afforded by the condition of thevehicle brakes and tires or the tractionafforded.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, includ-

ing those resulting from excessive speedin turns, following another vehicle tooclosely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped ve-hicle must never be exploited in a recklessor dangerous manner which could jeopar-dize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers.

CAUTION!The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject topossible detrimental effects of electronic in-terference caused by improperly installedaftermarket radios or telephones.

NOTE:During severe braking conditions, a pulsingsensation may occur and a clicking noisewill be heard. This is normal, indicating thatthe Anti-Lock Brake System is functioning.

ELECTRONIC BRAKECONTROL SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with an advancedelectronic brake control system that includesAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Con-trol System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS),Hill Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll Mitigation(ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and Hill DescentControl (HDC). All of these systems work to-gether to enhance vehicle stability and controlin various driving conditions, and are commonlyreferred to as ESC.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)This system aids the driver in maintaining ve-hicle control under adverse braking conditions.The system controls hydraulic brake pressureto prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skid-ding on slippery surfaces during braking.

245

WARNING!The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws ofphysics from acting on the vehicle, nor can itincrease the traction afforded by prevailingroad conditions. The ABS cannot preventcollisions, including those resulting from ex-cessive speed in turns, driving on very slip-pery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabili-ties of an ABS-equipped vehicle must neverbe exploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner which could jeopardize the user’ssafety or the safety of others.

Traction Control System (TCS)This system monitors the amount of wheel spinof each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin isdetected, brake pressure is applied to the slip-ping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced toprovide enhanced acceleration and stability.A feature of the TCS system, Brake LimitedDifferential (BLD), functions similar to a limitedslip differential and controls the wheel spinacross a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven

axle is spinning faster than the other, the sys-tem will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.This will allow more engine torque to be appliedto the wheel that is not spinning. This featureremains active even if TCS and ESC are ineither the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. Referto “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in thissection for further information.

Brake Assist System (BAS)The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’sbraking capability during emergency brakingmaneuvers. The system detects an emergencybraking situation by sensing the rate andamount of brake application and then appliesoptimum pressure to the brakes. This can helpreduce braking distances. The BAS comple-ments the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Apply-ing the brakes very quickly results in the bestBAS assistance. To receive the benefit of thesystem, you must apply continuous brakingpressure during the stopping sequence. Do notreduce brake pedal pressure unless braking isno longer desired. Once the brake pedal isreleased, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot pre-vent the natural laws of physics from actingon the vehicle, nor can it increase the trac-tion afforded by prevailing road conditions.The BAS cannot prevent collisions, includingthose resulting from excessive speed inturns, driving on very slippery surfaces, orhydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited ina reckless or dangerous manner which couldjeopardize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)The HSA system is designed to assist the driverwhen starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill.HSA will maintain the level of brake pressurethe driver applied for a short period of time afterthe driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal.If the driver does not apply the throttle duringthis short period of time, the system will releasebrake pressure and the vehicle will roll down thehill. The system will release brake pressure in

246

proportion to amount of throttle applied as thevehicle starts to move in the intended directionof travel.

WARNING!If the clutch pedal (manual transmissiononly) remains pressed during the applicationof the throttle, the HSA will disengage allow-ing the vehicle to roll down the incline. Thiscould cause a collision with another vehicleor object. To avoid this, do not apply throttlewhile pressing the clutch pedal until you areready to release the clutch. Always remem-ber the driver is responsible for braking thevehicle.

HSA Activation CriteriaThe following criteria must be met in order forHSA to activate:• Vehicle must be stopped• Vehicle must be on an 8% (approximately) or

greater incline (approximately 3% for manualtransmission equipped vehicles)

• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direc-tion (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forwardgear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSEgear).

WARNING!There may be situations on minor hills with aloaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailerwhere the system will not activate and slightrolling may occur, which could cause a colli-sion with another vehicle or object. Alwaysremember the driver is responsible for brak-ing the vehicle.

The system will only work if the intended direc-tion of the vehicle and vehicle gear match. Forexample, if the intended direction is forward upa hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE (automatictransmission equipped vehicle), and the activa-tion criteria are met, HSA will activate.

HSA On Automatic Transmission VehiclesThe system will work in REVERSE, and allforward gears on vehicles equipped with anautomatic transmission. The system will notactivate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL.HSA On Manual Transmission VehiclesThe system will work in REVERSE, forwardgears, and NEUTRAL on manual transmissionequipped vehicles. The system does not recog-nize NEUTRAL on manual vehicles, thus it willhold the vehicle on an incline for a short periodwhile in NEUTRAL, regardless of clutch posi-tion. To prevent this, do not attempt to roll downa hill simply by putting the transmission inNEUTRAL and letting gravity act on the vehicle,as the HSA will prevent the vehicle from rolling.Instead, use the appropriate gear for moving inthe desired direction.

247

Towing With HSAHSA will provide assistance when starting on agrade when pulling a trailer.

WARNING!• If you use a trailer brake controller with

your trailer, your trailer brakes may beactivated and deactivated with the brakeswitch. If so, when the brake pedal isreleased there may not be enough brakepressure to hold the vehicle and trailer ona hill and this could cause a collision withanother vehicle or object behind you. Inorder to avoid rolling down the hill whileresuming acceleration, manually activatethe trailer brake prior to releasing thebrake pedal. Always remember the driveris responsible for braking the vehicle.

• HSA is not a parking brake. Always applythe parking brake fully when leaving yourvehicle. Also, be certain to leave the trans-mission in PARK.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Failure to follow these warnings may

cause the vehicle to roll down the inclineand could collide with another vehicle,object or person, and cause serious orfatal injury. Always remember to use theparking brake while parking on a hill andthat the driver is responsible for brakingthe vehicle.

NOTE:The HSA system may also be turned on andoff if the vehicle is equipped with the Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Re-fer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

HSA OffIf you wish to turn off the HSA system, followthis procedure:1. Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK(automatic transmission) or NEUTRAL withclutch out (manual transmission) with wheelsstraight. Apply parking brake on manual trans-mission vehicle.2. Start the engine.3. With the engine running, the brake applied,and the clutch out, rotate the steering wheel180° counterclockwise from center.4. Press the ESC OFF switch four times withintwenty seconds.5. Rotate the steering wheel 360° clockwise(180° clockwise from center).6. Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON.7. If the sequence was completed properly, the“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” willblink several times to confirm HSA is off.Steps 1-7 must be completed within 90 secondsto turn off HSA. Repeat steps 1-7 to re-enableHSA functionality.

248

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)This system anticipates the potential for wheellift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheelinput and the speed of the vehicle. When ERMdetermines that the rate of change of the steer-ing wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are suffi-cient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies theappropriate brake and may reduce enginepower to lessen the chance that wheel lift willoccur. ERM will only intervene during very se-vere or evasive driving maneuvers.Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) can only re-duce the chance of wheel lift occurring duringsevere or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannotprevent wheel lift due to other factors such asroad conditions, leaving the roadway or strikingobjects or other vehicles.NOTE:Anytime the ESC system is in the “Full Off”mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to ElectronicStability Control (ESC) for a complete expla-nation of the available ESC modes.

WARNING!Many factors, such as vehicle loading, roadconditions and driving conditions, influencethe chance that wheel lift or rollover mayoccur. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) can-not prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, espe-cially those that involve leaving the roadwayor striking objects or other vehicles. Thecapabilities of an ERM-equipped vehiclemust never be exploited in a reckless ordangerous manner which could jeopardizethe user’s safety or the safety of others.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)This system enhances directional control andstability of the vehicle under various drivingconditions. The ESC corrects for over/understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake ofthe appropriate wheel to assist in counteractingthe over/under steer condition. Engine powermay also be reduced to help the vehicle main-tain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determinethe vehicle path intended by the driver andcompares it to the actual path of the vehicle.When the actual path does not match theintended path, ESC applies the brake of theappropriate wheel to assist in counteracting theoversteer or understeer condition.• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more

than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-tion.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning lessthan appropriate for the steering wheelposition.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”(located in the instrument cluster), starts to flashas soon as the tires lose traction and the ESCsystem becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes whenTCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/MalfunctionIndicator Light” begins to flash during accelera-tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as littlethrottle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speedand driving to the prevailing road conditions.

249

WARNING!Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannotprevent the natural laws of physics fromacting on the vehicle, nor can it increase thetraction afforded by prevailing road condi-tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, includ-ing those resulting from excessive speed inturns, driving on very slippery surfaces, orhydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent ac-cidents resulting from loss of vehicle controldue to inappropriate driver input for the con-ditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillfuldriver can prevent accidents. The capabili-ties of an ESC equipped vehicle must neverbe exploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner which could jeopardize the user’ssafety or the safety of others.

The ESC system has three available operatingmodes in 4H range. The system has one oper-ating mode in 4L range. Two-wheel drive ve-hicles and four-wheel drive vehicles in 2H rangehave two operating modes.

4H Range (4WD Models)OnThis is the normal operating mode for ESC in4H range.Partial OffThis mode is entered by momentarily pressingthe ESC OFF switch. When in "Partial Off"mode, the TCS portion of ESC (except for thelimited slip feature described in the TCS sec-tion), has been disabled and the "ESC OffIndicator Light" will be illuminated.This mode is intended to be used if the vehicleis in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions andmore wheel spin than ESC would normallyallow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC onagain, momentarily press the ESC OFF switch.This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode ofoperation.

NOTE:To improve the vehicle’s traction when driv-ing with snow chains, or starting off in deepsnow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable toswitch to the “Partial Off” mode by pressingthe ESC OFF switch. Once the situationrequiring ESC to be switched to the “PartialOff” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on bymomentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch.This may be done while the vehicle is inmotion.

WARNING!• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-

tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slipfeature described in the TCS section), hasbeen disabled and the “ESC Off IndicatorLight” will be illuminated. When in “PartialOff” mode, the engine power reductionfeature of TCS is disabled, and the en-hanced vehicle stability offered by the ESCsystem is reduced.

(Continued)

250

WARNING! (Continued)• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled

when the ESC system is in the "Partial Off"mode.

ESC OffThis mode is entered by pressing and holdingmomentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch for 5seconds.In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torquereduction and stability features are disabled.Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability of-fered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergencyevasive maneuver, the ESC system will notengage to assist in maintaining stability. “ESCOff” mode is intended for off-highway or off-roaduse only.

When in ESC Off mode, ESC and TCS, exceptfor the Brake Limited Differential (BLD) featuredescribed in the TCS section, are turned off untilthe vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph(64 km/h). For speeds at or exceeding 40 mph(64 km/h) the ESC goes into partial off. Whenthe vehicle speed drops below 35 mph(56 km/h), the ESC system goes back to off. Toturn ESC on again, momentarily press the ESCOFF switch. This will restore normal “ESC On”mode of operation. The "ESC Off IndicatorLight” will always be illuminated when ESC is offand partial off.

WARNING!With the ESC in "Full Off" mode, the enginetorque reduction and stability features of-fered by ESC and ERM are disabled. In anemergency evasive maneuver, the ESC andERM systems will not engage to assist inmaintaining stability. The “Full Off” ESCmode is intended for off-road use only.

4L Range (4WD Models)ESC OffThis is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4Lrange. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4Lrange, or the transfer case (if equipped) isshifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L range,the ESC system will be in this mode. In 4Lrange, ESC and TCS, except for the BrakeLimited Differential (BLD) feature described inthe TCS section, are turned off until the vehiclereaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). Forspeeds at or exceeding 40 mph (64 km/h) theESC goes into partial off. When the vehiclespeed drops below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESCsystem shuts off. The ESC is off at low vehicle

ESC OFF Switch

251

speeds in 4L range so that it will not interferewith off-road driving, but the ESC function re-turns to provide the stability feature at speedsabove 40 mph (64 km/h). The “ESC OFF Indi-cator Light” will always be illuminated in 4Lrange when ESC is off.NOTE:The “ESC OFF” message will display andthe audible chime will sound when the shiftlever is placed in the PARK position fromany position other than PARK, and thenmoved out of the PARK position. This willoccur even if the message was previouslycleared.

WARNING!In the ESC "Full Off" mode, the enginetorque reduction and stability features aredisabled. In an emergency evasive maneu-ver, the ESC system will not engage to assistin maintaining stability. "ESC Off" mode isintended for off-highway or off-road use only.

2H Range (4WD Models) Or 2WD ModelsOnThis is the normal operating mode for ESC in2H range and on 2WD vehicles.Partial OffWhen in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS portion ofESC (except for the limited slip feature describedin the TCS section), has been disabled and the"ESC Off Indicator Light" will be illuminated.This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle isin deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions andmore wheel spin than ESC would normally allowis required to gain traction. To turn ESC on again,momentarily press the ESC OFF switch. This willrestore the normal "ESC On" mode of operation.NOTE:To improve the vehicle’s traction when drivingwith snow chains, or starting off in deep snow,sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switchto the �Partial Off� mode by pressing the ESC

OFF switch. Once the situation requiring ESCto be switched to the �Partial Off� mode isovercome, turn ESC back on by momentarilypressing the ESC OFF switch. This may bedone while the vehicle is in motion.

The ESC will restore to normal ESC On modeafter each key on.NOTE:To improve the vehicle’s traction when driv-ing with snow chains, or starting off in deepsnow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable toswitch to the “Partial Off” mode by pressingthe ESC OFF switch. Once the situationrequiring ESC to be switched to the “PartialOff” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on bymomentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch.This may be done while the vehicle is inmotion.

252

WARNING!• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-

tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slipfeature described in the TCS section), hasbeen disabled and the “ESC Off IndicatorLight” will be illuminated. When in “PartialOff” mode, the engine power reductionfeature of TCS is disabled, and the en-hanced vehicle stability offered by the ESCsystem is reduced.

• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabledwhen the ESC system is in the "Partial Off"mode.

ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorLight And ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/MalfunctionIndicator Light” in the instrumentcluster will come on when the igni-tion switch is cycled to the ONposition. It should go out with theengine running. If the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comeson continuously with the engine running, amalfunction has been detected in the ESCsystem. If this light remains on after severalignition cycles, and the vehicle has been drivenseveral miles (kilometers) at speeds greaterthan 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorizeddealer as soon as possible to have the problemdiagnosed and corrected.The “ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorLight” (located in the instrument cluster) startsto flash as soon as the tires lose traction and theESC system becomes active. The “ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” alsoflashes when TCS is active. If the “ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins toflash during acceleration, ease up on the accel-

erator and apply as little throttle as possible. Besure to adapt your speed and driving to theprevailing road conditions.NOTE:

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the“ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorLight” come on momentarily each timethe ignition switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is cycled ON, theESC system will be ON even if it wascycled off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing orclicking sounds when it is active. This isnormal; the sounds will stop when ESCbecomes inactive following the maneuverthat caused the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” in-dicates the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) is partially off or fulloff.

253

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognizean excessively swaying trailer and will take theappropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.The system may reduce engine power andapply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) tocounteract the sway of the trailer. TSC willbecome active automatically once an exces-sively swaying trailer is recognized. TSC cannotstop all trailers from swaying. Always use cau-tion when towing a trailer and follow the tongueweight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Tow-ing” in “Starting and Operating” for further infor-mation. When TSC is functioning, the “ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash,the engine power may be reduced and you mayfeel the brakes being applied to individualwheels to attempt to stop the trailer from sway-ing. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is inthe “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.

WARNING!If TSC activates while driving, slow the ve-hicle down, stop at the nearest safe location,and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailersway.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — IfEquippedHDC is only intended for low speed off-roaddriving. HDC maintains vehicle speed whiledescending hills in off-road driving conditions byapplying the brakes when necessary.

The symbol indicates the status ofthe Hill Descent Control (HDC) fea-ture. The lamp will be on solidwhen HDC is armed. HDC can onlybe armed when the transfer case isin the “4WD LOW” position and the

vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). Ifthese conditions are not met while attempting touse the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light willflash on/off.

When enabled, HDC senses the terrain andactivates when the vehicle is descending a hill.HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver tosuit the driving conditions. The speed corre-sponds to the transmission gear selected.

Gear Approximate HDCSet Speed

1st 1 mph (1.5 km/h)2nd 2.5 mph (4 km/h)3rd 4 mph (6.5 km/h)4th 5.5 mph (9 km/h)DRIVE 7.5 mph (12 km/h)REVERSE 1 mph (1.5 km/h)

However, the driver can override HDC opera-tion by applying the brake to slow the vehicledown below the HDC control speed. If morespeed is desired during HDC control, the accel-erator pedal will increase vehicle speed in theusual manner. When either the brake or theaccelerator is released, HDC will control thevehicle at the original set speed.

254

Enabling HDC1. Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range.Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Start-ing and Operating” for further information.2. Press the “Hill Descent” button. The “HillDescent Control Indicator Light” in the instru-ment cluster will turn on solid.NOTE:

• If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOWrange, the “Hill Descent Control IndicatorLight” will flash for five seconds and HDCwill not be enabled.

• If the ESC senses that the brakes areoverheating the “Hill Descent Control In-dicator Light” will flash for five secondsand HDC will become deactivated untilthe brakes have cooled.

Disabling HDCPress the “Hill Descent” button or shift thetransfer case out of 4WD LOW range. The “HillDescent Control Indicator” light in the instru-ment cluster will turn off.

TIRES — GENERALINFORMATION

Tire PressureProper tire inflation pressure is essential to thesafe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.Three primary areas are affected by impropertire pressure:Safety

WARNING!• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous

and can cause collisions.• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and

can result in over-heating and tire failure.• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to

cushion shock. Objects on the road andchuckholes can cause damage that resultin tire failure.

• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires canaffect vehicle handling and can fail sud-denly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering

problems. You could lose control of yourvehicle.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side ofthe vehicle to the other can cause thevehicle to drift to the right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to therecommended cold tire inflation pressure.

EconomyImproper inflation pressures can cause unevenwear patterns to develop across the tire tread.These abnormal wear patterns will reduce treadlife resulting in a need for earlier tire replace-ment. Under-inflation also increases tire rollingresistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.Ride Comfort And Vehicle StabilityProper tire inflation contributes to a comfortableride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and un-comfortable ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle andcan produce a feeling of sluggish response orover responsiveness in the steering.

255

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to sidemay cause erratic and unpredictablesteering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side maycause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Tire Inflation PressuresThe proper cold tire inflation pressure is listedon the driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of thedriver’s side door.At least once a month:• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good

quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do notmake a visual judgement when determiningproper inflation. Tires may look properly in-flated even when they are under-inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visibledamage.

CAUTION!After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.This will prevent moisture and dirt from en-tering the valve stem, which could damagethe valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard arealways “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tireinflation pressure is defined as the tire pressureafter the vehicle has not been driven for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)after a three hour period. The cold tire inflationpressure must not exceed the maximum infla-tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.Check tire pressures more often if subject to awide range of outdoor temperatures, as tirepressures vary with temperature changes.Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperaturechange. Keep this in mind when checking tirepressure inside a garage, especially in thewinter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) thenthe cold tire inflation pressure should be in-creased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outsidetemperature condition.Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOTreduce this normal pressure build up or your tirepressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High SpeedOperationThe manufacturer advocates driving at safespeeds and within posted speed limits. Wherespeed limits or conditions are such that thevehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintain-ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced ve-hicle loading may be required for high-speedvehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tiredealer or original equipment vehicle dealer forrecommended safe operating speeds, loadingand cold tire inflation pressures.

256

WARNING!High speed driving with your vehicle undermaximum load is dangerous. The addedstrain on your tires could cause them to fail.You could have a serious collision. Do notdrive a vehicle loaded to the maximum ca-pacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph(120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!Combining radial ply tires with other types oftires on your vehicle will cause your vehicleto handle poorly. The instability could causea collision. Always use radial ply tires in setsof four. Never combine them with other typesof tires.

Tire RepairIf your tire becomes damaged, it may be re-paired if it meets the following criteria:• The tire has not been driven on when flat.• The damage is only on the tread section of

your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).• The puncture is no greater than ¼" (6 mm).Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairsand additional information.Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires thathave experienced a loss of pressure should bereplaced immediately with another Run Flat tireof identical size and service description (LoadIndex and Speed Code).

Tire TypesAll Season Tires — If EquippedAll Season tires provide traction for all seasons(spring, summer, fall and winter). Traction levelsmay vary between different all season tires. Allseason tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use

all season tires only in sets of four; failure to doso may adversely affect the safety and handlingof your vehicle.Summer Or Three Season Tires — IfEquippedSummer tires provide traction in both wet anddry conditions, and are not intended to bedriven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle isequipped with summer tires, be aware thesetires are not designed for winter or cold drivingconditions. For more information, contact a au-thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain theall season designation or mountain/snowflakesymbol on the tire sidewall.Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure todo so may adversely affect the safety andhandling of your vehicle.Snow TiresSome areas of the country require the use ofsnow tires during the winter. Snow tires can beidentified by a mountain/snowflake symbol onthe tire sidewall.If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent insize and type to the original equipment tires.

257

Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to doso may adversely affect the safety and handlingof your vehicle.Snow tires generally have lower speed ratingsthan what was originally equipped with yourvehicle and should not be operated at sustainedspeeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speedsabove 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to originalequipment or an authorized tire dealer for rec-ommended safe operating speeds, loading andcold tire inflation pressures.While studded tires improve performance onice, skid and traction capability on wet or drysurfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studdedtires; therefore, local laws should be checkedbefore using these tire types.

Run Flat Tires — If EquippedRun Flat tires allow you the capability to drive50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after arapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss ofinflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. ARun Flat mode occurs when the tire inflationpressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once aRun Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has

limited driving capabilities and needs to bereplaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is notrepairable.It is not recommended driving a vehicle loadedat full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is inthe run flat mode.See the tire pressure monitoring section formore information.

Spare Tires — If EquippedNOTE:For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT insteadof a spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT”in “What To Do In Emergencies” for furtherinformation.

CAUTION!Because of the reduced ground clearance,do not take your vehicle through an auto-matic car wash with a compact, full size orlimited-use temporary spare installed. Dam-age to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped TireAnd Wheel — If EquippedYour vehicle may be equipped with a spare tireand wheel equivalent in look and function to theoriginal equipment tire and wheel found on thefront or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tiremay be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.If your vehicle has this option, refer to anauthorized tire dealer for the recommended tirerotation pattern.Compact Spare Tire — If EquippedThe compact spare is for temporary emergencyuse only. You can identify if your vehicle isequipped with a compact spare by looking atthe spare tire description on the Tire and Load-ing Information Placard located on the driver’sside door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.Compact spare tire descriptions begin with theletter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.Example: T145/80D18 103M.T, S = Temporary Spare TireSince this tire has limited tread life, the originalequipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first op-portunity.

258

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mounta conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,since the wheel is designed specifically for thecompact spare tire. Do not install more than onecompact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle atany given time.

WARNING!Compact spares are for temporary emer-gency use only. With these spares, do notdrive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Tempo-rary use spares have limited tread life. Whenthe tread is worn to the tread wear indicators,the temporary use spare tire needs to bereplaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,which apply to your spare. Failure to do socould result in spare tire failure and loss ofvehicle control.

Full Size Spare — If EquippedThe full size spare is for temporary emergencyuse only. This tire may look like the originallyequipped tire on the front or rear axle of yourvehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may havelimited tread life. When the tread is worn to thetread wear indicators, the temporary use fullsize spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it isnot the same as your original equipment tire,replace (or repair) the original equipment tireand reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu-nity.Limited-Use Spare — If EquippedThe limited-use spare tire is for temporaryemergency use only. This tire is identified by alabel located on the limited-use spare wheel.This label contains the driving limitations for thisspare. This tire may look like the originalequipped tire on the front or rear axle of yourvehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since itis not the same as your original equipment tire,replace (or repair) the original equipment tireand reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu-nity.

WARNING!Limited-use spares are for emergency useonly. Installation of this limited-use spare tireaffects vehicle handling. With this tire, do notdrive more than the speed listed on thelimit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to thecold tire inflation pressures listed on yourTire and Loading Information Placard lo-cated on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rearedge of the driver’s side door. Replace (orrepair) the original equipment tire at the firstopportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.Failure to do so could result in loss of vehiclecontrol.

Tire SpinningWhen stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-tions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 secondscontinuously without stopping.Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What ToDo In Emergencies” for further information.

259

WARNING!Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.Forces generated by excessive wheelspeeds may cause tire damage or failure. Atire could explode and injure someone. Donot spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 secondscontinuously when you are stuck, and do notlet anyone near a spinning wheel, no matterwhat the speed.

Tread Wear IndicatorsTread wear indicators are in the original equip-ment tires to help you in determining when yourtires should be replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom ofthe tread grooves. They will appear as bandswhen the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm).When the tread is worn to the tread wearindicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to“Replacement Tires” in this section for furtherinformation.

Life Of TireThe service life of a tire is dependent uponvarying factors including, but not limited to:• Driving style• Tire pressure• Distance driven• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of

V or higher, and summer tires typically havea reduced tread life. Rotation of these tiresper the vehicle maintenance schedule ishighly recommended.

WARNING!Tires and the spare tire should be replacedafter six years, regardless of the remainingtread. Failure to follow this warning canresult in sudden tire failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision resulting in seri-ous injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place withas little exposure to light as possible. Protecttires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

1 — Worn Tire2 — New Tire

260

Replacement TiresThe tires on your new vehicle provide a balanceof many characteristics. They should be in-spected regularly for wear and correct cold tireinflation pressure. The manufacturer stronglyrecommends that you use tires equivalent to theoriginals in size, quality and performance whenreplacement is needed. Refer to the paragraphon “Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tireand Loading Information placard or the VehicleCertification Label for the size designation ofyour tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol foryour tire will be found on the original equipmenttire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart examplefound in the Tire Safety Information section ofthis manual for more information relating to theLoad Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.It is recommended to replace the two front tiresor two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tirecan seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. Ifyou ever replace a wheel, make sure that thewheel’s specifications match those of the origi-nal wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorizedtire dealer or original equipment dealer with anyquestions you may have on tire specifications orcapability. Failure to use equivalent replace-ment tires may adversely affect the safety,handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other

than that specified for your vehicle. Somecombinations of unapproved tires andwheels may change suspension dimen-sions and performance characteristics, re-sulting in changes to steering, handling,and braking of your vehicle. This cancause unpredictable handling and stressto steering and suspension components.You could lose control and have a collisionresulting in serious injury or death. Useonly the tire and wheel sizes with loadratings approved for your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Never use a tire with a smaller load index

or capacity, other than what was originallyequipped on your vehicle. Using a tire witha smaller load index could result in tireoverloading and failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tireshaving adequate speed capability can re-sult in sudden tire failure and loss of ve-hicle control.

CAUTION!Replacing original tires with tires of a differ-ent size may result in false speedometer andodometer readings.

261

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTIONDEVICES)Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommenda-tions to guard against damage.• Traction device must be of proper size for the

tire, as recommended by the traction devicemanufacturer.

• Install on Rear Tires Only.• A 235/65R17 tire with the use of a traction

device that meets the SAE type “Class S”specification is recommended.

WARNING!Using tires of different size and type (M+S,Snow) between front and rear axles cancause unpredictable handling. You couldlose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,observe the following precautions:• Because of restricted traction device clear-

ance between tires and other suspensioncomponents, it is important that only trac-tion devices in good condition are used.Broken devices can cause serious dam-age. Stop the vehicle immediately if noiseoccurs that could indicate device break-age. Remove the damaged parts of thedevice before further use.

• Install device as tightly as possible andthen retighten after driving about ½ mile(0.8 km).

• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns

and large bumps, especially with a loadedvehicle.

• Do not drive for prolonged period on drypavement.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)• Observe the traction device manufactur-

er’s instructions on the method of installa-tion, operating speed, and conditions foruse. Always use the suggested operatingspeed of the device manufacturer’s if it isless than 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Do not use traction devices on a compactspare tire.

TIRE ROTATIONRECOMMENDATIONSThe tires on the front and rear of your vehicleoperate at different loads and perform differentsteering, handling, and braking functions. Forthese reasons, they wear at unequal rates.These effects can be reduced by timely rotationof tires. The benefits of rotation are especiallyworthwhile with aggressive tread designs suchas those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation willincrease tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,and wet traction levels, and contribute to asmooth, quiet ride.

262

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for theproper maintenance intervals. The reasons forany rapid or unusual wear should be correctedprior to rotation being performed.The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the following diagram.

CAUTION!Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehiclesdepends on tires of equal size, type andcircumference on each wheel. Any difference

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)in tire size can cause damage to the transfercase. Tire rotation schedule should be fol-lowed to balance tire wear.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORSYSTEM (TPMS)The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)will warn the driver of a low tire pressure basedon the vehicle recommended cold placard pres-sure.The tire pressure will vary with temperature byabout 1 psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).This means that when the outside temperaturedecreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tirepressure should always be set based on coldinflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tirepressure after a vehicle has not been driven formore than three hours, or driven less than1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. Referto “Tires – General Information” in “Startingand Operating” for information on how toproperly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire

pressure will also increase as the vehicle isdriven; this is normal and there should be noadjustment for this increased pressure.The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tirepressure if the tire pressure falls below the lowpressure warning threshold for any reason,including low temperature effects, or naturalpressure loss through the tire.The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of lowtire pressure as long as the condition exists,and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at orabove recommended cold placard pressure.Once the “Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight” has been illuminated, the tire pressuremust be increased to the recommended coldplacard pressure in order for the “Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light” to be turned OFF. Thesystem will automatically update and the “TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extin-guish once the updated tire pressures havebeen received. The vehicle may need to bedriven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h) to receive this information.

Tire Rotation

263

For example, your vehicle may have a recom-mended cold (parked for more than three hours)air pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambienttemperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measuredtire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a temperaturedrop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pres-sure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tirepressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ONthe “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressureto rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), butthe “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” willstill be ON. In this situation, the “Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only afterthe tires have been inflated to the vehicle’srecommended cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!• The TPMS has been optimized for the

original equipment tires and wheels. TheTPMS pressures have been establishedfor the tire size equipped on your vehicle.Undesirable system operation or sensordamage may result when using replace-ment equipment that is not of the samesize, type, and/or style. Aftermarketwheels can cause sensor damage. Usingaftermarket tire sealants may cause theTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)sensor to become inoperable. After usingan aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-mended that you take your vehicle to yourlocal dealership to have your sensor func-tion checked.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.This will prevent moisture and dirt fromentering the valve stem, which could dam-age the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace nor-mal tire care and maintenance, nor toprovide warning of a tire failure or condi-tion.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tirepressure gauge while adjusting your tirepressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for propertire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination ofthe “Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight.”

• Seasonal temperature changes will affecttire pressure, and the TPMS will monitorthe actual tire pressure in the tire.

264

Base SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)uses wireless technology with wheel rimmounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pres-sure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel aspart of the valve stem, transmit tire pressurereadings to the Receiver Module.NOTE:It is particularly important for you to checkthe tire pressure in all of your tires regularlyand to maintain the proper pressure.The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) con-sists of the following components:1. Receiver Module2. Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors3. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale LightA tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in thespare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with amatching full size spare wheel and tire assembly.The matching full size spare tire can be used inplace of any of the four road tires. A low spare tirewill not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-tale Light” to illuminate or the chime to soundwhile it is stored in the spare tire location.

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight” will illuminate in the instrumentcluster, a “Lo Tire” message will bedisplayed in the odometer display at 3

second intervals followed by the location(s) ofthe low tire(s) (RR, LR, RF, LF) displayed for 3second intervals each. This sequence shall berepeated for two complete cycles for each igni-tion “on” cycle. Following the second cycle, theodometer display shall revert back to the priordisplay preceding the low tire message an"Inflate to XX" message will be displayed and anaudible chime will be activated when one ormore of the four active road tire pressures arelow. Should this occur, you should stop as soonas possible, check the inflation pressure of eachtire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to thevehicle’s recommended cold placard pressurevalue shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Thesystem will automatically update and the “TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light” and “LOWTIRE” message will extinguish once the up-dated tire pressures have been received. Thevehicle may need to be driven for up to 20minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive thisinformation.

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” willflash on and off for 75 seconds, and will remainon solid when a system fault is detected. Thesystem fault will also sound a chime. If theignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,providing the system fault still exists. A systemfault can occur by any of the following sce-narios:1. Jamming due to electronic devices or drivingnext to facilities emitting the same Radio Fre-quencies as the TPM sensors.2. Installing some form of aftermarket windowtinting that affects radio wave signals.3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels orwheel housings.4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMsensors.

265

NOTE:

• If your vehicle is equipped with a match-ing full size spare wheel and tire assem-bly, it has a tire pressure monitoring sen-sor, and can be monitored by the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Inthe event that the matching full size sparetire is swapped with a low pressure roadtire, the next ignition key cycle will stillshow the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-tale Light” to be ON, a “LOW TIRE” mes-sage displayed for a minimum of fiveseconds, the �Inflate to XX� message dis-played and a chime to sound. Driving thevehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h) will turn OFF the “Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light” and “LOWTIRE” message as long as none of theroad tires are below the low pressurewarning threshold.

• If your vehicle is not equipped with amatching full size spare wheel and tireassembly, it does not have a tire pressuremonitoring sensor in the spare tire. TheTPMS will not be able to monitor the tirepressure. If you install the spare tire in

place of a road tire that has a pressurebelow the low-pressure warning limit,upon the next ignition key cycle, a chimewill sound and the “Tire Pressure Moni-toring Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE”message will turn ON. The �Inflate to XX�message will also be displayed. After driv-ing the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light” will flash onand off for 75 seconds and then remain onsolid. For each subsequent ignition keycycle, a chime will sound and the “TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light” willflash on and off for 75 seconds and thenremain on solid. Once you repair or re-place the original road tire, and reinstall iton the vehicle in place of the spare tire,the TPMS will update automatically andthe “Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight” will turn OFF, as long as no tirepressure is below the low-pressure warn-ing limit in any of the four active roadtires. The vehicle may need to be drivenfor up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receivethis information.

Premium System – If EquippedThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)uses wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pres-sure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel aspart of the valve stem, transmit tire pressurereadings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE:It is particularly important, for you to regu-larly check the tire pressure in all of yourtires and to maintain the proper pressure.

Tire Pressure Monitor Display

266

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) con-sists of the following components:• Receiver Module• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Messages, which display in the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC), and agraphic displaying tire pressures

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale LightA tire pressure monitoring sensor is located inthe spare wheel, if the vehicle is equipped witha matching full-size spare wheel and tire as-sembly. The matching full-size spare tire can beused in place of any of the four road tires.Tire Pressure Monitoring Low PressureWarnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight will illuminate in the instrumentcluster, and an audible chime will beactivated, when one or more of the

four active road tire pressures are low. In addi-tion, the EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE PRES-SURE” message for a minimum of five seconds.

An “Inflate to XX” message and a graphicdisplay of the pressure value(s) with the lowtire(s) “flashing” will also be displayed. Refer to“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.NOTE:Your system can be set to display pressureunits in PSI, kPa, or BAR.

Should a low tire condition occur on any of thefour active road tire(s), you should stop as soonas possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is“flashing” on the graphic display to the vehicle’s

recommended cold tire pressure inflation valueshown in the “Inflate to XX” message. Thesystem will automatically update, the graphicdisplay of the pressure value(s) will stop “flash-ing,” and the Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight will extinguish once the updated tire pres-sure(s) have been received. The vehicle mayneed to be driven for up to 20 minutes above15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.SERVICE TPM SYSTEM WarningThe “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” willflash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain onsolid when a system fault is detected. Thesystem fault will also sound a chime. The EVICwill display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-sage for a minimum of five seconds. This mes-sage is then followed by a graphic display, with“- -“ in place of the pressure value(s), indicatingwhich Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is notbeing received.NOTE:Your system can be set to display pressureunits in PSI, kPa, or BAR.

Tire Pressure Monitor Display

267

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence willrepeat, providing the system fault still exists. Ifthe system fault no longer exists, the “TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will no longerflash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" messagewill not be present, and a pressure value will bedisplayed instead of dashes. A system fault canoccur by any of the following:1. Jamming due to electronic devices or drivingnext to facilities emitting the same Radio Fre-quencies as the TPM sensors.2. Installing some form of aftermarket windowtinting that affects radio wave signals.3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels orwheel housings.4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMsensors.The EVIC will also display a "SERVICE TPMSYSTEM" message for a minimum of five sec-onds when a system fault is detected possiblyrelated to an incorrect sensor location fault. Inthis case, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" mes-sage is then followed by a graphic display, with

pressure values still shown. This indicates thepressure values are still being received from theTPM Sensors but they may not be located in thecorrect vehicle position. However, the systemstill needs to be serviced as long as the "SER-VICE TPM SYSTEM" message exists.NOTE:

• If your vehicle is equipped with a match-ing full-size spare wheel and tire assem-bly, it has a tire pressure monitoring sen-sor, and can be monitored by the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Inthe event that the matching full-size sparetire is swapped with a low pressure roadtire, the next ignition switch cycle will stillshow the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-tale Light” to be ON, a chime to sound, a“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message to ap-pear in the EVIC, and the graphic displaywill still show the �Inflate to XX� messageand the low tire pressure value “flashing.”Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutesabove 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”as long as none of road tires are belowthe low pressure warning threshold.

• If your vehicle is not equipped with amatching full-size spare wheel and tireassembly, it does not have a tire pressuremonitoring sensor in the spare tire. TheTPMS will not be able to monitor the tirepressure. If you install the spare tire inplace of a road tire that has a pressurebelow the low-pressure warning limit,upon the next ignition switch cycle, the“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”will remain ON, a chime will sound, andthe EVIC will still display the �Inflate toXX� message and a “flashing” pressurevalue in the graphic display. After drivingthe vehicle for up to 20 minutes above15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light” will flash onand off for 75 seconds and then remain onsolid. In addition, the EVIC will display a“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM� message for aminimum of five seconds and then dis-play dashes (- -) in place of the pressurevalue. For each subsequent ignitionswitch cycle, a chime will sound, the “TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light” willflash on and off for 75 seconds and thenremain on solid, and the EVIC will display

268

a �SERVICE TPM SYSTEM� message for aminimum of five seconds and then dis-play dashes (- -) in place of the pressurevalue.

Once you repair or replace the original roadtire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place ofthe spare tire, the TPMS will update auto-matically.In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-tale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in theEVIC will display a new pressure value insteadof dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure isbelow the low-pressure warning limit in any ofthe four active road tires. The vehicle may needto be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive thisinformation.

TPMS DeactivationThe TPMS can be deactivated if replacing allfour wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) withwheel and tire assemblies that do not haveTPMS Sensors, such as when installing winterwheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle Todeactivate the TPMS, first, replace all fourwheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires

not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring(TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMSwill chime, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash onand off for 75 seconds and then remain on andthe Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-TEM” message and then display dashes (--) inplace of the pressure values. Beginning with thenext ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will nolonger chime or display the “SERVICE TPMSYSTEM” message in the EVIC but dashes (--)will remain in place of the pressure values.To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheeland tire assemblies (road tires) with tiresequipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive thevehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “TPM TelltaleLight” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and thenturn off, and the Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) will display the “SERVICE TPMSYSTEM” message. The EVIC will also displaypressure values in place of the dashes. On thenext ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE TPMSYSTEM” message will no longer be displayed aslong as no system fault exists.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS —GASOLINE ENGINESThis engine is designed to meet all emissionsregulations and provide excellent fuel economyand performance when using high quality un-leaded gasoline with a minimum research oc-tane rating (RON) of 91. The use of premiumgasoline will not provide any benefit over regu-lar gasoline in these engines.Light spark knock at low engine speeds is notharmful to your engine. However, continuedheavy spark knock at high speeds can causedamage, and immediate service is required.Poor quality gasoline can cause problems suchas hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If youexperience these symptoms, try another brandof gasoline before considering service for thevehicle.

269

Over 40 auto manufacturer’s worldwide haveissued and endorsed consistent gasoline speci-fications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC)which define fuel properties necessary to de-liver enhanced emissions, performance, anddurability for your vehicle. The manufacturerrecommends the use of gasoline that meets theWWFC specifications if they are available.Poor quality gasoline can cause problems suchas hard starting, stalling and stumble. If youexperience these problems, try another brandof gasoline before considering service for thevehicle.

Methanol(Methyl) is used in a variety of concentrationswhen blended with unleaded gasoline. You mayfind fuels containing 3% or more methanolalong with other alcohols called cosolvents.Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline are not the responsibility of the manu-facturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate madefrom Methanol, it does not have the negativeeffects of Methanol.

CAUTION!Do not use gasolines containing Methanol.Use of these blends may result in startingand drivability problems and may damagecritical fuel system components.

EthanolThe manufacturer recommends that your ve-hicle be operated on fuel containing no morethan 10% ethanol. Purchasing your fuel from areputable supplier may reduce the risk of ex-ceeding this 10% limit and/or of receiving fuelwith abnormal properties. It should also benoted that an increase in fuel consumptionshould be expected when using ethanol-blended fuels, due to the lower energy contentof ethanol. Problems that result from usingmethanol/gasoline or E-85 ethanol blends arenot the responsibility of the manufacturer. WhileMTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, itdoes not have the negative effects of Methanol.

CAUTION!Use of fuel with Ethanol content higher than10% may result in engine malfunction, start-ing and operating difficulties, and materialsdegradation. These adverse effects couldresult in permanent damage to your vehicle.

Clean Air GasolineMany gasolines are now being blended thatcontribute to cleaner air, especially in thoseareas where air pollution levels are high. Thesenew blends provide a cleaner burning fuel andsome are referred to as “reformulated gasoline.”The manufacturer supports these efforts towardcleaner air. You can help by using these blendsas they become available.

MMT In GasolineMMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tri-carbonyl) is a manganese containing metallicadditive that is blended into some gasoline toincrease octane. Gasoline blended with MMTprovides no performance advantage beyondgasoline of the same octane number without

270

MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reducesspark plug life and reduces emission systemperformance in some vehicles. The manufac-turer recommends that gasoline without MMTbe used in your vehicle. The MMT content ofgasoline may not be indicated on the gasolinepump; therefore, you should ask your gasolineretailer whether or not his/her gasoline containsMMT.

Materials Added to FuelBesides using unleaded gasoline with theproper octane rating, gasolines that containdetergents, corrosion and stability additives arerecommended. Using gasolines that have theseadditives will help improve fuel economy, re-duce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-mance.Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaningagents should be avoided. Many of these ma-terials intended for gum and varnish removalmay contain active solvents or similar ingredi-ents. These can harm fuel system gasket anddiaphragm materials.

WARNING!Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases isdeadly. Follow the precautions below to pre-vent carbon monoxide poisoning:• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain

carbon monoxide, a colorless and odor-less gas which can kill. Never run theengine in a closed area, such as a garage,and never sit in a parked vehicle with theengine running for an extended period. Ifthe vehicle is stopped in an open area withthe engine running for more than a shortperiod, adjust the ventilation system toforce fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

• Guard against carbon monoxide withproper maintenance. Have the exhaustsystem inspected every time the vehicle israised. Have any abnormal conditions re-paired promptly. Until repaired, drive withall side windows fully open.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Keep the swing gate closed when driving

your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxideand other poisonous exhaust gases fromentering the vehicle.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS —DIESEL ENGINESUse Premium Quality Diesel fuels with a Cetanerating of 50 or higher, and meeting the EN590standard are highly recommended. See yourauthorized dealer for further information regard-ing fuels available in your area.

271

ADDING FUEL

Locking Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)The locking gas cap is located on the left side ofthe vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, besure the replacement cap is the correct one forthis vehicle.

1. Turn off engine.2. Insert the ignition key into the fuel cap andturn the key one-quarter turn to the right, thenrotate the fuel cap to the left to remove.

3. Rotate the ignition key back to the left toremove.4. To replace the cap, insert it into the filler neckand tighten to the right until at least three clicksare heard.

CAUTION!• Damage to the fuel system or emissions

control system could result from using animproper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap).

• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impuritiesinto the fuel system.

• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause theMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turnon.

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When thefuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fueltank is full.

WARNING!• Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap (gas

cap) slowly to prevent fuel spray from thefiller neck, which may cause injury.

• The volatility of some gasolines may causea buildup of pressure in the fuel tank thatmay increase while you drive. This pres-sure can result in a spray of gasolineand/or vapors when the cap is removedfrom a hot vehicle. Removing the capslowly allows the pressure to vent andprevents fuel spray.

• Never have any smoking materials lit in ornear the vehicle when the gas cap isremoved or the tank is being filled.

• Never add fuel to the vehicle when theengine is running.

• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped intoa portable container that is inside of avehicle. You could be burned. Alwaysplace gas containers on the ground whilefilling.

Fuel Filler Cap

272

NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,the fuel tank is full.

• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a“clicking” sound. This is an indicationthat the gas cap is tightened properly. TheMIL in the instrument cluster may turn onif the gas cap is not secured properly.Make sure that the gas cap is tightenedeach time the vehicle is refueled.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message (gASCAP)After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel filler cap ispossibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged.If the system detects a malfunction, the “gAS-CAP” message will display in the odometer dis-play. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound isheard. This is an indication that the gas cap isproperly tightened. Press the odometer reset but-ton to turn the message off. If the problem per-sists, the message will appear the next time thevehicle is started. This might indicate a damagedcap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, thesystem will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL). Resolving the problem will turn the MIL lightoff.

TRAILER TOWINGIn this section you will find safety tips andinformation on limits to the type of towing youcan reasonably do with your vehicle. Beforetowing a trailer, carefully review this informationto tow your load as efficiently and safely aspossible.To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warrantycoverage, follow the requirements and recom-mendations in this manual concerning vehiclesused for trailer towing.

Common Towing DefinitionsThe following trailer towing related definitionswill assist you in understanding the followinginformation:Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)The GVWR is the total allowable weight of yourvehicle. This includes driver, passengers,cargo, and tongue weight. The total load mustbe limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus theweight of all cargo, consumables and equip-ment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or onthe trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"condition. The recommended way to measureGTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on avehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailermust be supported by the scale.Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)The GCWR is the total permissible weight of yourvehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the frontand rear axles. Distribute the load over the frontand rear axles evenly. Make sure that you donot exceed either front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!It is important that you do not exceed themaximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerousdriving condition can result if either rating isexceeded. You could lose control of thevehicle and have an accident.

273

Tongue Weight (TW)The tongue weight is the downward force ex-erted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In mostcases, it should not be less than 10% of thetrailer load. You must consider tongue load aspart of the load on your vehicle.Frontal AreaThe frontal area is the maximum height multi-plied by the maximum width of the front of atrailer.Trailer Sway ControlThe trailer sway control is a telescoping link thatcan be installed between the hitch receiver andthe trailer tongue that typically provides adjust-able friction associated with the telescopingmotion to dampen any unwanted trailer swayingmotions while traveling.Weight-Carrying HitchA weight-carrying hitch supports the trailertongue weight, just as if it were luggage locatedat a hitch ball or some other connecting point ofthe vehicle. These kind of hitches are the mostpopular on the market today and they arecommonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.

Weight-Distributing HitchA weight-distributing system works by applyingleverage through spring (load) bars. They aretypically used for heavier loads, to distributetrailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle’s frontaxle and the trailer axle(s). When used in ac-cordance with the manufacturers directions, itprovides for a more level ride, offering moreconsistent steering and brake control therebyenhancing towing safety. The addition of afriction / hydraulic sway control also dampenssway caused by traffic and crosswinds andcontributes positively to tow vehicle and trailerstability. Trailer sway control and a weight dis-tributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom-mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) andmay be required depending on Vehicle andTrailer configuration / loading to comply withgross axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.

Breakaway Cable AttachmentEuropean braking regulations for braked trailersup to 7,700 lbs (3,500 kg) require trailers to befitted with either a secondary coupling or break-away cable.

The recommended location for attaching thenormal trailer’s breakaway cable is in thestamped slot located on the sidewall of the hitchreceiver.With Attachment Point• For detachable tow bar, pass the cable

through the attachment point and clip it backonto itself.

Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method

274

• For fixed ball tow bar, attach the clip directlyto the designated point. This alternative mustbe specifically permitted by the trailer manu-facturer since the clip may not be sufficientlystrong for use in this way.

Without Attachment Points• For detachable ball tow bar, you must follow

the recommended manufacturer or supplierprocedure.

• For fixed ball tow bar, loop the cable aroundthe neck of the tow ball. If you fit the cablelike this, use a single loop only.

Fixed Ball Clip Loop MethodDetachable Ball Neck Loop Method

Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method

275

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/Transmission Model Axle Ratio Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)3.6L/Manual Sport & Sahara

Two-Door3.21 2,205 lbs (1,000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg)

3.6L/Manual Sport & SaharaTwo-Door

3.73 2,205 lbs (1,000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg)

3.6L/Automatic Sport & SaharaTwo-Door

3.73 2,205 lbs (1,000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg)

2.8L/Manual Sport & SaharaTwo-Door

3.73 2,205 lbs (1,000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg)

2.8L/Automatic Sport & SaharaTwo-Door

3.73 2,205 lbs (1,000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg)

3.6L/Manual Rubicon Two-Door 4.10 2,205 lbs (1,000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg)3.6L/Automatic Rubicon Two-Door 4.10 2,205 lbs (1,000 kg) 220 lbs (100 kg)

3.6L/Manual Sport Four-Door 3.73 4,409 lbs (2,000 kg) 440 lbs (200 kg)3.6L/Automatic Sport & Sahara

Four-Door3.73 4,409 lbs (2,000 kg) 440 lbs (200 kg)

2.8L/Manual Sport & SaharaFour-Door

3.73 4,409 lbs (2,000 kg) 440 lbs (200 kg)

276

Engine/Transmission Model Axle Ratio Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)2.8L/Automatic Sport & Sahara

Four-Door3.73 4,409 lbs (2,000 kg) 440 lbs (200 kg)

3.6L/Manual Rubicon Four-Door

4.10 4,409 lbs (2,000 kg) 440 lbs (200 kg)

3.6L/Automatic Rubicon Four-Door

4.10 4,409 lbs (2,000 kg) 440 lbs (200 kg)

Maximum trailer towing speed is limited to 62 mph (100 km/h) unless local laws require a lower speed.

NOTE:The trailer tongue weight must be consid-ered as part of the combined weight ofoccupants and cargo, and should never ex-ceed the weight referenced on the Tire andLoading Information placard. Refer to “Tires– General Information” in “Starting and Op-erating” for further information.

Trailer And Tongue WeightAlways load a trailer with 60% of the weight inthe front of the trailer. This places 10% of theGross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch ofyour vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheelsor heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to

sway severely side to side which will cause lossof control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure toload trailers heavier in front is the cause ofmany trailer accidents.Never exceed the maximum tongue weightstamped on your trailer hitch.Consider the following items when computingthe weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:• The tongue weight of the trailer.• The weight of any other type of cargo or

equipment put in or on your vehicle.• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE:Remember that everything put into or on thetrailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,additional factory-installed options, ordealer-installed options, must be consid-ered as part of the total load on your vehicle.Refer to the Tire and Loading Informationplacard, located on the drivers door pillar,for the maximum combined weight of occu-pants and cargo for your vehicle.

277

Towing RequirementsTo promote proper break-in of your new vehicledrivetrain components, the following guidelinesare recommended:

CAUTION!• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first

500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle isdriven. The engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)that a trailer is towed, do not drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make startsat full throttle. This helps the engine andother parts of the vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

WARNING!Improper towing can lead to an injury acci-dent. Follow these guidelines to make yourtrailer towing as safe as possible:

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Make certain that the load is secured in the

trailer and will not shift during travel. Whentrailering cargo that is not fully secured,dynamic load shifts can occur that may bedifficult for the driver to control. You couldlose control of your vehicle and have anaccident.

• All trailer hitches should be professionallyinstalled on your vehicle.

• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, donot overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-loading can cause a loss of control, poorperformance or damage to the brakes,axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-pension, chassis structure or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used be-tween your vehicle and trailer. Always con-nect the chains to the frame or hook re-tainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross thechains under the trailer tongue and allowenough slack for turning corners.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked

on a grade. When parking, apply the park-ing brake on the tow vehicle. Put the towvehicle automatic transmission in PARK.Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceeded.• Total weight must be distributed be-tween the tow vehicle and the trailersuch that the following four ratings arenot exceeded:

1. GVWR

2. GTW

3. GAWR

4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitchutilized.

Towing Requirements – Tires• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a

compact spare tire.

278

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essentialfor the safe and satisfactory operation of yourvehicle. Refer to “Tires – General Informa-tion” in “Starting and Operating” for propertire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflationpressures before trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tiredamage before towing a trailer. Refer to“Tires – General Information” in “Starting andOperating” for the proper inspectionprocedure.

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – Gen-eral Information” in “Starting and Operating”for proper tire replacement procedures. Re-placing tires with a higher load carrying ca-pacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWRand GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake sys-

tem or vacuum system of your vehicle withthat of the trailer. This could cause inad-equate braking and possible personal injury.

• When towing a trailer equipped with a hy-draulic surge actuated brake system, anelectronic brake controller is not required.

• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailersover 1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required fortrailers in excess of 1,653 lbs (750 kg).

CAUTION!If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs(450 kg) loaded, it should have its ownbrakes and they should be of adequatecapacity. Failure to do this could lead toaccelerated brake lining wear, higher brakepedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehi-

cle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overloadyour brake system and cause it to fail. Youmight not have brakes when you needthem and could have an accident.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping

distance. When towing, you should allow foradditional space between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front of you. Failure to do socould result in an accident.

Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights AndWiringWhenever you pull a trailer, regardless of thetrailer size, stop lights and turn signals on thetrailer are required for motoring safety.The Trailer Tow Package may include a 7 or a13–pin wiring harness. Use a factory approvedtrailer harness and connector.NOTE:Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicleswiring harness.The electrical connections are all complete tothe vehicle but you must mate the harness to atrailer connector.

279

Pin Number Function Wire Color1 Left Turn

SignalYellow

2 Rear FogLight

Blue

3 Ground/CommonReturn

White

4 Right TurnSignal

Green

Pin Number Function Wire Color5 Right Rear

Position,Side MarkerLights, andRear Regis-tration PlateIlluminationDevice. b

Brown

6 Stop Lights Red7 Left Rear

Position,Side

MarkerLights, andRear Regis-tration PlateIlluminationDevice. b

Black

b The rear position registration plate illumi-nation device shall be connected such thatno light of the device has a common con-

nection with both pins 5 and 7.

Pin Number Function Wire Color1 Left Turn

SignalYellow

2 Rear FogLight

Blue

3 a Ground/CommonReturn forContacts(Pins) 1

and 2 and4 to 8

White

280

Pin Number Function Wire Color4 Right Turn

SignalGreen

5 Right RearPosition,

SideMarker

Lights, andRear Regis-tration PlateIlluminationDevice. b

Brown

6 Stop Lights Red7 Left Rear

Position,Side

MarkerLights, andRear Regis-tration PlateIlluminationDevice. b

Black

Pin Number Function Wire Color8 Reverse

lightsRed/Black

9 PermanentPower Sup-ply (+12V)

Brown/White

10 Power Sup-ply Con-trolled byIgnitionSwitch(+12V)

Red

11 a Return forContact(Pin) 10

White

12 Reserve forFuture Allo-

cation

Red/Blue

Pin Number Function Wire Color13 a Return for

Contact(Pin) 9

White

Note: The allocation pin 12 has beenchanged from “Coding for coupled Trailer” to

“Reserve for Future Allocation.”a The three return circuits shall not be con-

nected electrically in the trailer.b The rear position registration plate illumi-nation device shall be connected such thatno light of the device has a common con-

nection with both pins 5 and 7.

281

Towing TipsBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning,stopping and backing the trailer in an area awayfrom heavy traffic.Manual Transmission — If EquippedIf using a manual transmission vehicle for trailertowing, all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoidexcessive clutch slippage.Automatic Transmission — If EquippedThe DRIVE range can be selected when towing.The transmission controls include a drive strat-egy to avoid frequent shifting when towing.However, if frequent shifting does occur while inDRIVE, you can use the AutoStick® shift controlto manually select a lower gear.NOTE:Using a lower gear while operating the ve-hicle under heavy loading conditions willimprove performance and extend transmis-sion life by reducing excessive shifting andheat build up. This action will also providebetter engine braking.

If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than45 minutes of continuous operation, thenchange the transmission fluid and filter asspecified for "police, taxi, fleet, or frequenttrailer towing." Refer to the “MaintenanceSchedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.NOTE:Check the automatic transmission fluid levelbefore towing (gasoline engine only).AutoStick®• When using the AutoStick® shift control, se-

lect the highest gear that allows for adequateperformance and avoids frequent downshifts.For example, choose “4” if the desired speedcan be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” ifneeded to maintain the desired speed.

• To prevent excess heat generation, avoidcontinuous driving at high RPM. Reducevehicle speed as necessary to avoid ex-tended driving at high RPM. Return to ahigher gear or vehicle speed when grade androad conditions allow.

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.• When using the speed control, if you experi-

ence speed drops greater than 10 mph(16 km/h), disengage until you can get backto cruising speed.

• Use speed control in flat terrain and with lightloads to maximize fuel efficiency.

Cooling SystemTo reduce potential for engine and transmissionoverheating, take the following actions:City DrivingWhen stopped for short periods of time, shift thetransmission into NEUTRAL and increase en-gine idle speed.Highway DrivingReduce speed.Air ConditioningTurn off temporarily.

282

Trailer Hitch Attaching PointsYour vehicle will require extra equipment to towa trailer safely and efficiently. The trailer towhitch must be attached to your vehicle using theprovided attaching points on the vehicle’sframe. Refer to the following chart to determinethe accurate attaching points. Other equipment,such as trailer sway controls and braking equip-ment, trailer equalizing (leveling) equipmentand low profile mirrors, may also be required orstrongly recommended.

Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching Points AndOverhang Dimensions

A N/AB N/AC N/AD (maximumoverhang)

2.47 ft. (754 mm)

E 3.39 ft. (1032 mm)F 0.16 ft. (50 mm)

283

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models

Flat Tow NONE

See Instructions• Automatic transmission in PARK• Manual transmission in gear (NOT in

NEUTRAL [N])• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)• Tow in forward direction

Dolly TowFront NOT ALLOWEDRear NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer ALL OK

284

Recreational Towing — Four —Wheel Drive ModelsNOTE:The transfer case must be shifted into NEU-TRAL (N), automatic transmission must bein PARK, and manual transmission must bein gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreationaltowing.

CAUTION!• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Inter-

nal damage to the transmission or transfercase will occur if a dolly is used whenrecreational towing.

• Tow only in the forward direction. Towingthis vehicle backwards can cause severedamage to the transfer case.

• Automatic transmissions must be placed inPARK for recreational towing.

• Manual transmissions must be placed ingear (not in Neutral) for recreational tow-ing.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)• Before recreational towing, perform the

procedure outlined under “Shifting IntoNEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the trans-fer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Other-wise, internal damage will result.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of theabove requirements can cause severetransmission and/or transfer case dam-age. Damage from improper towing is notcovered under the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-ontow bar on your vehicle. The bumper facebar will be damaged.

Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)Use the following procedure to prepare yourvehicle for recreational towing.

WARNING!You or others could be injured or killed if youleave the vehicle unattended with the trans-fer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position with-out first fully engaging the parking brake. Thetransfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disen-gages both the front and rear driveshaftsfrom the powertrain and will allow the vehicleto move, even if the transmission is in PARK.The parking brake should always be appliedwhen the driver is not in the vehicle.

CAUTION!It is necessary to follow these steps to becertain that the transfer case is fully in NEU-TRAL (N) before recreational towing to pre-vent damage to internal parts.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.2. Press and hold the brake pedal.

285

3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEU-TRAL or depress the clutch pedal on a manualtransmission.4. Turn the engine OFF.5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEU-TRAL (N).6. Start the engine.7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedalon manual transmissions) for five seconds andensure that there is no vehicle movement.9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 with automatic trans-mission in DRIVE or manual transmission in firstgear.10. Turn the engine OFF and leave the ignitionswitch in the unlocked ACC position.11. Firmly apply the parking brake.12. Shift the transmission into PARK or placemanual transmission in gear (NOT in Neutral).

CAUTION!Damage to the transmission may occur if thetransmission is shifted into PARK with thetransfer case in NEUTRAL (N) and the en-gine running. With the transfer case in NEU-TRAL (N) ensure that the engine is OFFbefore shifting the transmission into PARK.

13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using asuitable tow bar.14. Release the parking brake.15. Disconnect the negative battery cable, andsecure it away from the negative battery post.Shifting Out of NEUTRAL (N)Use the following procedure to prepare yourvehicle for normal usage.1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leavingit connected to the tow vehicle.2. Firmly apply the parking brake.3. Reconnect the negative battery cable.4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN po-sition, but do not start the engine.6. Press and hold the brake pedal.7. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.8. Shift the transfer case lever to the desiredposition.NOTE:When shifting the transfer case out of NEU-TRAL (N), turning the engine OFF may berequired to avoid gear clash.

9. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK,or place manual transmission in Neutral.10. Release the brake pedal.11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.12. Start the engine.13. Press and hold the brake pedal.14. Release the parking brake.15. Shift the transmission into gear, release thebrake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual trans-missions), and check that the vehicle operatesnormally.

286

6WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

• HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288• IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288• WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . .289

• Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289• JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290

• Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290• Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291• Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291• Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291• Road Tire Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

• JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294• Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294• Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295

• FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296• TOW EYES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297• SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298• TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299

• Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300• Four–Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

287

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSThe Hazard Warning flasher switch is locatedon the instrument panel below the climatecontrols.

Press the switch to turn on the HazardWarning flasher. When the switch isactivated, all directional turn signals

will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic ofan emergency. Press the switch a second timeto turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.This is an emergency warning system and itshould not be used when the vehicle is inmotion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled andit is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis-tance, the Hazard Warning flashers will con-tinue to operate even though the ignition isplaced in the OFF position.NOTE:With extended use the Hazard Warningflashers may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATSIn any of the following situations, you canreduce the potential for overheating by takingthe appropriate action.• On the highways — slow down.• In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmis-

sion into NEUTRAL, but do not increaseengine idle speed.

CAUTION!Driving with a hot cooling system could dam-age your vehicle. If the temperature gaugereads HOT (H), pull over and stop the ve-hicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditionerturned off until the pointer drops back into thenormal range. If the pointer remains on HOT(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turnthe engine off immediately, and call for ser-vice.

NOTE:There are steps that you can take to slowdown an impending overheat condition:• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn itoff. The A/C system adds heat to theengine cooling system and turning theA/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature controlto maximum heat, the mode control tofloor and the blower control to high. Thisallows the heater core to act as a supple-ment to the radiator and aids in removingheat from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!You or others can be badly burned by hotengine coolant (antifreeze) or steam fromyour radiator. If you see or hear steam com-ing from under the hood, do not open thehood until the radiator has had time to cool.Never try to open a cooling system pressurecap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

288

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUESPECIFICATIONSProper lug nut/bolt torque is very important toensure that the wheel is properly mounted tothe vehicle. Any time a wheel has been re-moved and reinstalled on the vehicle the lugnuts/bolts should be torqued using a properlycalibrated torque wrench.

Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/BoltTorque

**LugNut/BoltSize

Lug Nut/BoltSocketSize

100 Ft-Lbs(135 N·m) 1/2” x 20 19 mm

**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil beforetightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior tomounting the tire and remove any corrosion orloose particles.

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern untileach nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolttorque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts areproperly seated against the wheel.

WARNING!To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off thejack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until thevehicle has been lowered. Failure to followthis warning may result in personal injury.

Wheel Mounting Surface

Torque Patterns

289

JACKING AND TIRECHANGING

WARNING!• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side

of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pullfar enough off the road to avoid the dangerof being hit when operating the jack orchanging the wheel.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is danger-ous. The vehicle could slip off the jack andfall on you. You could be crushed. Neverput any part of your body under a vehiclethat is on a jack. If you need to get under araised vehicle, take it to a service centerwhere it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while thevehicle is on a jack.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• The jack is designed to be used as a tool

for changing tires only. The jack should notbe used to lift the vehicle for service pur-poses. The vehicle should be jacked on afirm level surface only. Avoid ice or slipperyareas.

Jack LocationThe jack and lug wrench are located in the rearstorage compartment.

NOTE:Turn the black plastic wing nut counterclockwise to loosen the jack from the stor-age bin.

Jack Storage

Jack Wing Nut

290

Spare Tire RemovalTo remove the spare tire from the carrier, re-move the tire cover, if equipped, and removethe lug nuts with the lug wrench turning themcounterclockwise.NOTE:If you have added aftermarket accessoriesto the spare tire mounted carrier, it cannotexceed a gross weight of 50 lbs (23 kg)including the weight of the spare tire.

Preparations For Jacking1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice orslippery areas.

WARNING!Do not attempt to change a tire on the side ofthe vehicle close to moving traffic, pull farenough off the road to avoid being hit whenoperating the jack or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.3. Set the parking brake.

4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK,or a manual transmission into REVERSE.5. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

6. Block both the frontand rear of the wheeldiagonally opposite ofthe jacking position. Forexample, if changingthe right front tire, blockthe left rear wheel.

NOTE:Passengers should not remain in the vehiclewhen the vehicle is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!Carefully follow these tire changing warningsto help prevent personal injury or damage toyour vehicle:• Always park on a firm, level surface as far

from the edge of the roadway as possiblebefore raising the vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the

wheel to be raised.• Set the parking brake firmly and set an

automatic transmission in PARK; a manualtransmission in REVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine with thevehicle on a jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when itis on a jack.

(Continued)

291

WARNING! (Continued)• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on

a jack. If you need to get under a raisedvehicle, take it to a service center where itcan be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicatedand for lifting this vehicle during a tirechange.

• If working on or near a roadway, be ex-tremely careful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,are securely stowed, spares must bestowed with the valve stem facing theground.

CAUTION!Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jackingon locations other than those indicated in theJacking Instructions for this vehicle.

1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools fromthe stored location.2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lugnuts by turning them to the left one turn whilethe wheel is still on the ground.3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Con-nect the jack handle driver to the extension,then to the lug wrench.NOTE:Block the opposite tire you are changing, if itis the drivers rear then block the passengerfront.

4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear ofthe vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube,as shown. Do not raise the vehicle until youare sure the jack is fully engaged.

Jack Warning Label

Rear Jacking Location

292

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screwclockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tirejust clears the surface and enough clearance isobtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tirelift provides maximum stability.

WARNING!Raising the vehicle higher than necessary canmake the vehicle less stable and cause acollision. It could slip off the jack and hurtsomeone near it. Raise the vehicle onlyenough to remove the tire.

6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicleand install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped endtoward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nutsclockwise.


8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screwto the left, and remove the jack.9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down onthe wrench while tightening for increased lever-age. Alternate nuts until each nut has beentightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifica-tions” in this section for correct lug nut torque.10. Remove the jack assembly and wheelblocks.11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in theirproper locations.

WARNING!A loose tire or jack thrown forward in acollision or hard stop, could endanger theoccupants of the vehicle. Always stow thejack parts and the spare tire in the placesprovided.

Road Tire Installation1. Mount the road tire on the axle.2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the coneshaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightlytighten the lug nuts.


3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turningthe jack handle counterclockwise.

Front Jacking Location

293

4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down onthe wrench while at the end of the handle forincreased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in astar pattern until each nut has been tightenedtwice. For the correct lug nut torque refer toTorque Specifications in this section. If in doubtabout the correct tightness, have them checkedwith a torque wrench by your authorized dealeror service station.5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nuttorque with a torque wrench to ensure that alllug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.

JUMP-STARTINGPROCEDURESIf your vehicle has a discharged battery it can bejump-started using a set of jumper cables and abattery in another vehicle or by using a portablebattery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dan-gerous if done improperly so please follow theprocedures in this section carefully.

NOTE:When using a portable battery booster packfollow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-tions and precautions.

CAUTION!Do not use a portable battery booster pack orany other booster source with a systemvoltage greater than 12 Volts or damage tothe battery, starter motor, alternator or elec-trical system may occur.

WARNING!Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery isfrozen. It could rupture or explode and causepersonal injury.

Preparations For Jump-StartThe battery in your vehicle is located in the rightrear of the engine compartment, behind thePower Distribution Center.

WARNING!• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan

whenever the hood is raised. It can startanytime the ignition switch is ON. You canbe injured by moving fan blades.

(Continued)

Positive Battery Post

294

WARNING! (Continued)• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,

watch bands and bracelets that couldmake an inadvertent electrical contact.You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that canburn your skin or eyes and generate hy-drogen gas which is flammable and explo-sive. Keep open flames or sparks awayfrom the battery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatictransmission into PARK (manual transmissionin NEUTRAL) and turn the ignition to LOCK.2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unneces-sary electrical accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start thebattery, park the vehicle within the jumpercables reach, set the parking brake and makesure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!Do not allow vehicles to touch each other asthis could establish a ground connection andpersonal injury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!Failure to follow this procedure could resultin personal injury or property damage due tobattery explosion.

CAUTION!Failure to follow these procedures could re-sult in damage to the charging system of thebooster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumpercable to the positive (+) post of the dischargedvehicle.2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)jumper cable to the positive (+) post of thebooster battery.3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumpercable to the negative (-) post of the boosterbattery.4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposedmetal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine)away from the battery and the fuel injectionsystem.

295

WARNING!Do not connect the jumper cable to thenegative (-) post of the discharged battery.The resulting electrical spark could causethe battery to explode and could result inpersonal injury. Only use the specific groundpoint, do not use any other exposed metalparts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has thebooster battery, let the engine idle a few min-utes, and then start the engine in the vehiclewith the discharged battery.Once the engine is started, remove the jumpercables in the reverse sequence:6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cablefrom the engine ground of the vehicle with thedischarged battery.7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of thejumper cable from the negative (-) post of thebooster battery.

8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive(+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of thebooster battery.9. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumpercable from the positive (+) post of the dis-charged vehicle.If frequent jump-starting is required to start yourvehicle you should have the battery and charg-ing system inspected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!Accessories plugged into the vehicle poweroutlets draw power from the vehicle’s bat-tery, even when not in use (i.e., cellularphones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in longenough without engine operation, the vehi-cle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to de-grade battery life and/or prevent the enginefrom starting.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLEIf your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand orsnow, it can often be moved using a rockingmotion. Turn the steering wheel right and left toclear the area around the front wheels. Thenshift back and forth between DRIVE and RE-VERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2ndgear and REVERSE (with manual transmis-sion), while gently pressing the accelerator. Usethe least amount of accelerator pedal pressurethat will maintain the rocking motion, withoutspinning the wheels, or racing the engine.

CAUTION!Racing the engine or spinning the wheelsmay lead to transmission overheating andfailure. Allow the engine to idle with thetransmission in NEUTRAL for at least oneminute after every five rocking-motioncycles. This will minimize overheating andreduce the risk of transmission failure duringprolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

296

NOTE:Press the �ESC Off� switch, to place theElectronic Stability Control (ESC) system in�Partial Off� mode, before rocking the ve-hicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in“Starting And Operating” for further infor-mation. Once the vehicle has been freed,press the �ESC Off� switch again to restore�ESC On� mode.

CAUTION!• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting

between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE,do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may re-sult.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheelstoo fast may lead to transmission over-heating and failure. It can also damage thetires. Do not spin the wheels above30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-mission shifting occurring).

WARNING!Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.Forces generated by excessive wheelspeeds may cause damage, or even failure,of the axle and tires. A tire could explode andinjure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’swheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or forlonger than 30 seconds continuously withoutstopping when you are stuck and do not letanyone near a spinning wheel, no matterwhat the speed.

TOW EYESYour vehicle is equipped with tow eyes, whichare mounted in the front and the rear.

CAUTION!Tow eyes are for emergency use only, torescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do notuse tow eyes for tow truck hookup or high-way towing. You could damage your vehicle.Tow straps are recommended when towingthe vehicle; chains may cause vehicle dam-age.

WARNING!Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with toweyes. Tow straps and chains may break,causing serious injury.

297

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDEIf a malfunction occurs and the shift lever can-not be moved out of the PARK position, you canuse the following procedure to temporarilymove the shift lever:1. Turn the engine OFF.2. Firmly apply the parking brake.3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,remove the shift lever override access cover(located to the right of the shift lever).4. Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUNposition, but do not start the engine.

5. Press and maintain firm pressure on thebrake pedal.6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into theaccess port, and push and hold the overriderelease lever down.7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL posi-tion.8. The vehicle may then be started in NEU-TRAL.9. Reinstall the shift lever override accesscover.

Shift Lever Override Access Cover

298

TOWING A DISABLEDVEHICLEThis section describes procedures for towing adisabled vehicle using a commercial wreckerservice. If the transmission and drivetrain are

operable, disabled vehicles may also be towedas described under “Recreational Towing” in the“Starting And Operating” section.

Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground 4WD MODELS

Flat Tow NONE

See instructions under “Recreational Towing”• Automatic Transmission in PARK

• Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT in Neutral)• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL

• Tow in forward direction

Wheel Lift or Dolly TowFront NOT ALLOWEDRear NOT ALLOWED

Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required toprevent damage to your vehicle. Use only towbars and other equipment designed for thispurpose, following equipment manufacturer’sinstructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.Attach a tow bar or other towing device to mainstructural members of the vehicle, not to bum-

pers or associated brackets. State and locallaws regarding vehicles under tow must beobserved.If you must use the accessories (wipers, de-frosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignitionmust be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACCposition.

If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to“Shift Lever Override” in this section for instruc-tions on shifting the automatic transmission outof PARK for towing.

299

CAUTION!Do not use sling type equipment when tow-ing. When securing the vehicle to a flatbedtruck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-sion components. Damage to your vehiclemay result from improper towing.

Without The Ignition KeySpecial care must be taken when the vehicle istowed with the ignition in the LOCK position.The only approved method of towing without theignition key is with a flatbed truck. Proper towingequipment is necessary to prevent damage tothe vehicle.

Four–Wheel Drive ModelsThe manufacturer recommends towing with allwheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methodsare to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with oneend of the vehicle raised and the opposite endon a towing dolly.

If flatbed equipment is not available and thetransfer case is operable, the vehicle may betowed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheelson the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEU-TRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK (forautomatic transmissions) or in gear ( NOT inNEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operat-ing” for detailed instructions.

CAUTION!• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used.

Internal damage to the transmission ortransfer case will occur if a front or rearwheel lift is used when towing.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of theabove requirements can cause severetransmission and/or transfer case dam-age. Damage from improper towing is notcovered under the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

300

7MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303• ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.8L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304• ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . . . . . . . . . . .305

• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305• REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305• MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305

• Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306• Engine Oil — Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307• Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308• Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308• Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308• Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309• Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310• Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310• Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311• Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311• Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312• Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316• Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317

301

• Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319• Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission) — If Equipped . .319• Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320• Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320• Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . .320

• FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325• Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

• VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330• REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330• BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331

• Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331• Front Park/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331• Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331• Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332• Rear Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332• Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .332• Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332

• FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333• FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .334

• Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334• Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335

302

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

1 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir2 — Battery 8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Air Cleaner Filter4 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Under Engine Cover) 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap5 — Engine Oil Fill 11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

303

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.8L DIESEL

1 — Battery 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir2 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Air Cleaner Filter4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

304

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTICSYSTEM — OBD IIYour vehicle is equipped with a sophisticatedonboard diagnostic system called OBD II. Thissystem monitors the performance of the emis-sions, engine, and automatic transmission con-trol systems. When these systems are operat-ing properly, your vehicle will provide excellentperformance and fuel economy, as well asengine emissions well within current govern-ment regulations.If any of these systems require service, theOBD II system will turn on the “MalfunctionIndicator Light” (MIL). It will also store diagnos-tic codes and other information to assist yourservice technician in making repairs. Althoughyour vehicle will usually be drivable and notneed towing, see your authorized dealer forservice as soon as possible.

CAUTION!• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could

cause further damage to the emission con-trol system. It could also affect fueleconomy and driveability. The vehiclemust be serviced before any emissionstests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the engine isrunning, severe catalytic converter dam-age and power loss will soon occur. Imme-diate service is required.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageAfter fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic sys-tem can determine if the fuel filler cap is possi-bly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A“gASCAP” message will be displayed in theodometer. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking"sound is heard. This is an indication that the gascap is properly tightened. Press the odometerreset button to turn the message off. If theproblem persists, the message will appear the

next time the vehicle is started. This mightindicate a damaged cap. If the problem isdetected twice in a row, the system will turn onthe MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MILoff.

REPLACEMENT PARTSUse of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highlyrecommended to ensure the designed perfor-mance. Damage or failures caused by the useof non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance andrepairs will not be covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURESThe pages that follow contain the requiredmaintenance services determined by the engi-neers who designed your vehicle.Besides those maintenance items specified inthe fixed “Maintenance Schedule”, there areother components which may require servicingor replacement in the future.

305

CAUTION!• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or

perform repairs and service when neces-sary could result in more costly repairs,damage to other components or negativelyimpact vehicle performance. Immediatelyhave potential malfunctions examined byan authorized dealer or qualified repaircenter.

• Your vehicle has been built with improvedfluids that protect the performance anddurability of your vehicle and also allowextended maintenance intervals. Do notuse chemical flushes in these componentsas the chemicals can damage your engine,transmission, power steering or air condi-tioning. Such damage is not covered bythe New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If aflush is needed because of componentmalfunction, use only the specified fluid forthe flushing procedure.

Engine Oil — Gasoline EngineChecking Oil LevelTo assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’sengine, the engine oil must be maintained at thecorrect level. The engine oil level should bechecked five minutes after a warmed up enginehas been shut off.Checking the oil while the vehicle is on levelground will improve the accuracy of the oil levelreadings. Always maintain the oil level withinthe SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding onequart of oil when the reading is at the bottom ofthe SAFE zone will result in a reading at the topof the safe zone on these engines.

CAUTION!Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase willcause aeration or loss of oil pressure. Thiscould damage your engine.

Change Engine OilRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for theproper maintenance intervals.Engine Oil Selection — Non ACEACategoriesFor best performance and maximum protectionunder all types of operating conditions, themanufacturer only recommend engine oils thatare API certified and meet the requirements ofChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.American Petroleum Institute (API) EngineOil Identification Symbol

This symbol meansthat the oil hasbeen certified bythe American Pe-troleum Institute(API). The manu-facturer only rec-ommends API Cer-tified engine oils.

306

CAUTION!Do not use chemical flushes in your engineoil as the chemicals can damage your en-gine. Such damage is not covered by theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Engine Oil Selection — ACEA CategoriesFor countries that use the ACEA European OilCategories for Service Fill Oils, we recommendyou use engine oils that meet the requirementsof ACEA C3 and approved to Chrysler MS-6395or Fiat 9.55535–CR1.Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE GRADE)MOPAR® 5W-20 engine oil is recommended forall operating temperatures. This engine oil im-proves low temperature starting and vehicle fueleconomy.The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom-mended engine oil viscosity for your engine. Forinformation on engine oil filler cap location, referto “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining YourVehicle” for further information.

MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved toChrysler Material Standard MS-6395 or Fiat9.55535-CR1 may be used when SAE 5W-20engine oil is not available.

Engine Oil — Diesel EngineChecking Oil LevelTo assure proper engine lubrication, the engineoil must be maintained at the correct level.Check the oil level at regular intervals, such asevery fuel stop.For vehicles equipped with a Diesel ParticulateFilter (DPF), it is acceptable to have an oil levelup to 3/8 inch (10 mm) above the MAX line.Beyond 3/8 inch (10 mm) it is recommended tochange the oil.The best time to check the engine oil level isabout five minutes after a fully warmed engine isshut off.Checking the oil while the vehicle is on levelground will improve the accuracy of the oil levelreadings. Maintain the oil level between the MINand MAX markings on the dipstick. Adding

1 U.S. Quart (0.95 L) of oil when the reading isat the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading onthese engines.Engine Oil Selection — 2.8L Diesel EngineUse only Diesel Engine Oils conforming toChrysler Material Standard MS-11106 or Fiat9.55535-S1 or Fiat 9.55535-S3 that also meetthe requirements of ACEA C3.Engine Oil Viscosity — 2.8L Diesel EngineFor vehicles equipped with a Diesel ParticulateFilter (DPF), we recommend you use 5W-30ESP full synthetic, low ash oil that meets therequirements of Chrysler Material StandardMS-11106, or Fiat 9.55535-S3.For vehicles that are not equipped with a DieselParticulate Filter (DPF), we recommend youuse 0W-40 ESP full synthetic engine oil thatmeets Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725.Synthetic Engine OilsYou may use synthetic engine oils provided therecommended oil quality requirements are met,and the recommended maintenance intervalsfor oil and filter changes are followed.

307

Materials Added To Engine OilsDo not add any supplemental materials, otherthan leak detection dyes, to the engine oil.Engine oil is an engineered product and itsperformance may be impaired by supplementaladditives.Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And OilFiltersCare should be taken in disposing of usedengine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Usedoil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, canpresent a problem to the environment. Contactyour authorized dealer, service station or gov-ernmental agency for advice on how and whereused oil and oil filters can be safely discarded inyour area.

Engine Oil FilterThe engine oil filter should be replaced with anew filter at every engine oil change.Engine Oil Filter SelectionThis manufacturer’s engines have a full-flowtype oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-ment. The quality of replacement filters variesconsiderably. Only high quality filters should be

used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR®engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter andare recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner FilterRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for theproper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,etc.) can provide a measure of protection inthe case of engine backfire. Do not removethe air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,etc.) unless such removal is necessary forrepair or maintenance. Make sure that noone is near the engine compartment beforestarting the vehicle with the air inductionsystem (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.Failure to do so can result in serious per-sonal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter SelectionThe quality of replacement engine air cleanerfilters varies considerably. Only high qualityfilters should be used to assure most efficient

service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters area high quality filter and are recommended.

Maintenance-Free BatteryYour vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water,nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds.Always wash hands after handling the bat-tery.

CAUTION!It is essential when replacing the cables onthe battery that the positive cable is attachedto the positive post and the negative cable isattached to the negative post. Battery postsare marked (+) positive and negative (-) andare identified on the battery case. Also, if a“fast charger” is used while the battery is in

(Continued)308

CAUTION! (Continued)the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle batterycables before connecting the charger to thebattery. Do not use a “fast charger” to pro-vide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner MaintenanceFor best possible performance, your air condi-tioner should be checked and serviced by anauthorized dealer at the start of each warmseason. This service should include cleaning ofthe condenser fins and a performance test.Drive belt tension should also be checked atthis time.

CAUTION!Do not use chemical flushes in your airconditioning system as the chemicals candamage your air conditioning components.Such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!• Use only refrigerants and compressor lu-

bricants approved by the manufacturer foryour air conditioning system. Some unap-proved refrigerants are flammable and canexplode, injuring you. Other unapprovedrefrigerants or lubricants can cause thesystem to fail, requiring costly repairs.

• The air conditioning system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoid riskof personal injury or damage to the sys-tem, adding refrigerant or any repair re-quiring lines to be disconnected should bedone by an experienced repairman.

NOTE:Use only manufacturer approved A/C Sys-tem Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Con-ditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.Refrigerant Recovery And RecyclingR-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by theEnvironmental Protection Agency and is anozone-saving product. However, the manufac-

turer recommends that air conditioning servicebe performed by authorized dealer or otherservice facilities using recovery and recyclingequipment.NOTE:Use only manufacturer approved A/C sys-tem PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.A/C Air Filter

WARNING!Do not remove the A/C air filter while theblower is operating or personal injury mayresult.

The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inletbehind the glove box. Perform the followingprocedure to replace the filter:1. Open the glove compartment and remove allcontents.2. Push in on the sides of the glove compart-ment and lower the door.3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.

309

4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that securethe two air filter access doors to the HVAChousing.

5. Open the two air filter access doors.

6. Remove the two particulate air filters fromthe HVAC air inlet housing. Pull the filter ele-ments straight out of the housing, one at a time.7. Install the A/C air filter with the air filterposition indicators pointing in the same direc-tion as removal.

CAUTION!The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow toindicate airflow direction through the filter.Failure to properly install the filter will resultin the need to replace it more often.

8. Rotate the glove compartment door backinto position.Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for theproper maintenance intervals.

Body LubricationLocks and all body pivot points, including suchitems as seat tracks, door hinge pivot pointsand rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors andhood hinges, should be lubricated periodicallywith a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR®

Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-tion and to protect against rust and wear. Priorto the application of any lubricant, the partsconcerned should be wiped clean to removedust and grit; after lubricating excess oil andgrease should be removed. Particular attentionshould also be given to hood latching compo-nents to ensure proper function. When perform-ing other underhood services, the hood latch,release mechanism and safety catch should becleaned and lubricated.The external lock cylinders should be lubricatedtwice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring.Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant di-rectly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper BladesClean the rubber edges of the wiper blades andthe windshield periodically with a sponge or softcloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This willremove accumulations of salt or road film.Operation of the wipers on dry glass for longperiods may cause deterioration of the wiperblades. Always use washer fluid when using thewipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

310

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost orice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubberout of contact with petroleum products such asengine oil, gasoline, etc.NOTE:Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de-pending on geographical area and fre-quency of use. Poor performance of bladesmay be present with chattering, marks, wa-ter lines or wet spots. If any of these condi-tions are present, clean the wiper blades orreplace as necessary.

Adding Washer FluidThe fluid reservoir for the windshield washersand the rear window washer (if equipped) isshared. The fluid reservoir is located in theengine compartment. Be sure to check the fluidlevel at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir withwindshield washer solvent only (not radiatorantifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid res-ervoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to acloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades;this will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washersystem in cold weather, select a solution ormixture that meets or exceeds the temperaturerange of your climate. This rating informationcan be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!Commercial windshield washer solvents areflammable. They could ignite and burn you.Care must be exercised when filling or work-ing around the washer solution.

Exhaust SystemThe best protection against carbon monoxideentry into the vehicle body is a properly main-tained engine exhaust system.If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaustsystem; or if the exhaust fumes can be detectedinside the vehicle; or when the underside or rearof the vehicle is damaged; have an authorizedtechnician inspect the complete exhaust system

and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seamsor loose connections could permit exhaust fumesto seep into the passenger compartment. In ad-dition, inspect the exhaust system each time thevehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.Replace as required.

CAUTION!The catalytic converter requires the use ofunleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will de-stroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as anemissions control device and may seriouslyreduce engine performance and cause seri-ous damage to the engine.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalyticconverter will not require maintenance. How-ever, it is important to keep the engine properlytuned to assure proper catalyst operation andprevent possible catalyst damage.

311

CAUTION!Damage to the catalytic converter can resultif your vehicle is not kept in proper operatingcondition. In the event of engine malfunction,particularly involving engine misfire or otherapparent loss of performance, have yourvehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunctioncould cause the converter to overheat, re-sulting in possible damage to the converterand vehicle.

WARNING!A hot exhaust system can start a fire if youpark over materials that can burn. Suchmaterials might be grass or leaves cominginto contact with your exhaust system. Donot park or operate your vehicle in areaswhere your exhaust system can contact any-thing that can burn.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc-tioning engine operation, a scorching odor maysuggest severe and abnormal catalyst over-heating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn offthe engine and allow it to cool. Service, includ-ing a tune up to manufacturer’s specifications,should be obtained immediately.To minimize the possibility of catalytic converterdamage:• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the

ignition when the transmission is in gear andthe vehicle is in motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing ortowing the vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plugwires disconnected or removed, such aswhen diagnostic testing.

• Do not idle the engine for prolonged periodsduring very rough idle or malfunctioning op-erating conditions.

• Do not allow the vehicle to run out of fuel.

NOTE:Intentional tampering with emissions con-trol systems can result in civil penaltiesbeing assessed against you.

Cooling System

WARNING!You or others can be badly burned by hotengine coolant (antifreeze) or steam fromyour radiator. If you see or hear steam com-ing from under the hood, do not open thehood until the radiator has had time to cool.Never try to open a cooling system pressurecap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

Engine Coolant ChecksCheck the engine coolant (antifreeze) protec-tion every 12 months (before the onset offreezing weather, where applicable). If the en-gine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty inappearance, the system should be drained,flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant(antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C con-denser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumu-

312

lation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean bygently spraying water from a garden hose ver-tically down the face of the A/C condenser (ifequipped) or the back of the radiator core.Check the engine cooling system hoses forbrittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tight-ness of the connection at the coolant recoverybottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system forleaks.With the engine at normal operating tempera-ture (but not running), check the cooling systempressure cap for proper vacuum sealing bydraining a small amount of engine coolant (an-tifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. If the capis sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-freeze) will begin to drain from the coolantrecovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THECOOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THECOOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And RefillIf the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty orcontains visible sediment, have an authorizeddealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (anti-freeze) (conforming to MS-12106).Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for theproper maintenance intervals.NOTE:Some vehicles require special tools to addcoolant properly. Failure to fill these sys-tems properly could lead to severe internalengine damage. If any coolant is needed tobe added to the system please contact yourlocal authorized dealer.Selection Of CoolantRefer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-tion.

CAUTION!• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other

than specified Organic Additive Technol-ogy (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze),may result in engine damage and maydecrease corrosion protection. OrganicAdditive Technology (OAT) engine coolantis different and should not be mixed withHybrid Organic Additive Technology(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any“globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze).If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) isintroduced into the cooling system in anemergency, the cooling system will need tobe drained, flushed, and refilled with freshOAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), byan authorized dealer as soon as possible.

(Continued)

313

CAUTION! (Continued)• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based

engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Donot use additional rust inhibitors or antirustproducts, as they may not be compatiblewith the radiator engine coolant and mayplug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for usewith propylene glycol-based engine cool-ant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is notrecommended.

Adding CoolantYour vehicle has been built with an improvedengine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows extended maintenance inter-vals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be usedup to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)before replacement. To prevent reducing this ex-tended maintenance period, it is important thatyou use the same engine coolant (OAT coolantconforming to MS-12106) throughout the life ofyour vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for us-ing Organic Additive Technology (OAT) enginecoolant (antifreeze) that meets the require-ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/

Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT(Organic Additive Technology) that meets therequirements of Chrysler Material StandardMS-12106.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT enginecoolant that meets the requirements ofChrysler Material Standard MS-12106 anddistilled water. Use higher concentrations(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled ordeionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The useof lower quality water will reduce the amountof corrosion protection in the engine coolingsystem.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibilityto maintain the proper level of protectionagainst freezing according to the temperaturesoccurring in the area where the vehicle is oper-ated.NOTE:

• Some vehicles require special tools toadd coolant properly. Failure to fill thesesystems properly could lead to severeinternal engine damage. If any coolant isneeded to be added to the system pleasecontact your local authorized dealer.

• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) typesis not recommended and can result incooling system damage. If HOAT and OATcoolant are mixed in an emergency, havea authorized dealer drain, flush, and refillwith OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as possible.

Cooling System Pressure CapThe cap must be fully tightened to prevent lossof engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensurethat engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to theradiator from the coolant recovery tank.

314

The cap should be inspected and cleaned ifthere is any accumulation of foreign material onthe sealing surfaces.

WARNING!• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT”

on the cooling system pressure cap are asafety precaution. Never add engine cool-ant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-heated. Do not loosen or remove the capto cool an overheated engine. Heat causespressure to build up in the cooling system.To prevent scalding or injury, do not re-move the pressure cap while the system ishot or under pressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than theone specified for your vehicle. Personalinjury or engine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Engine CoolantUsed ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-freeze) is a regulated substance requiring properdisposal. Check with your local authorities todetermine the disposal rules for your community.To prevent ingestion by animals or children, donot store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant inopen containers or allow it to remain in puddles onthe ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seekemergency assistance immediately. Clean up anyground spills immediately.Engine Coolant LevelThe coolant bottle provides a quick visualmethod for determining that the coolant level isadequate. With the engine idling, and warm tonormal operating temperature, the level of theengine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle shouldbe between the ranges indicated on the bottle.The radiator normally remains completely full,so there is no need to remove the radiator capunless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze)freeze point or replacing engine coolant (anti-freeze). Advise your service attendant of this.As long as the engine operating temperature issatisfactory, the coolant bottle need only bechecked once a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) isneeded to maintain the proper level, it should beadded to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.Points To RememberNOTE:When the vehicle is stopped after a fewmiles/kilometers of operation, you may ob-serve vapor coming from the front of theengine compartment. This is normally a re-sult of moisture from rain, snow, or highhumidity accumulating on the radiator andbeing vaporized when the thermostat opens,allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) toenter the radiator.If an examination of your engine compartmentshows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor willsoon dissipate.• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator

and in the coolant expansion bottle. If enginecoolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, thecontents of the coolant expansion bottle mustalso be protected against freezing.

315

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-tions are required, the cooling system shouldbe pressure tested for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant(conforming to MS-12106) and distilled waterfor proper corrosion protection of your enginewhich contains aluminum components.

• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottleoverflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If yourvehicle is equipped with air conditioning,keep the front of the condenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer orWinter operation. If replacement is ever neces-sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.Other designs may result in unsatisfactoryengine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poorgas mileage, and increased emissions.

Brake SystemIn order to assure brake system performance,all brake system components should be in-spected periodically. Refer to the “MaintenanceSchedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!Riding the brakes can lead to brake failureand possibly an accident. Driving with yourfoot resting or riding on the brake pedal canresult in abnormally high brake tempera-tures, excessive lining wear, and possiblebrake damage. You would not have your fullbraking capacity in an emergency.

Power Disc BrakesDisc brakes do not require adjustment; how-ever, several hard stops during the break-inperiod are recommended to seat the linings andwear off any foreign material.

Brake Master CylinderThe fluid level in the master cylinders should bechecked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Ifnecessary, add fluid to bring level to the full levelmark on the side of the reservoir of the brakemaster cylinder. With disc brakes, fluid level canbe expected to fall as the brake pads wear. If thebrake fluid level is abnormally low, check sys-tem for leaks.Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!• Use only manufacturer’s recommended

brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants,and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining YourVehicle” for further information. Using thewrong type of brake fluid can severelydamage your brake system and/or impairits performance. The proper type of brakefluid for your vehicle is also identified onthe original factory installed hydraulic mas-ter cylinder reservoir.

(Continued)316

WARNING! (Continued)• To avoid contamination from foreign matter

or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluidthat has been in a tightly closed container.Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap se-cured at all times. Brake fluid in a opencontainer absorbs moisture from the air re-sulting in a lower boiling point. This maycause it to boil unexpectedly during hard orprolonged braking, resulting in sudden brakefailure. This could result in a accident.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir canresult in spilling brake fluid on hot engineparts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.Brake fluid can also damage painted andvinyl surfaces, care should be taken toavoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid tocontaminate the brake fluid. Brake sealcomponents could be damaged, causingpartial or complete brake failure. Thiscould result in an accident.

Automatic Transmission — IfEquippedSelection Of LubricantIt is important to use the proper transmissionfluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor-mance and life. Use only the manufacturer’sspecified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids,Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this sectionfor fluid specifications. It is important to maintainthe transmission fluid at the correct level usingthe recommended fluid.NOTE:No chemical flushes should be used in anytransmission; only the approved lubricantshould be used.

CAUTION!Using a transmission fluid other than themanufacturer’s recommended fluid maycause deterioration in transmission shiftquality and/or torque converter shudder, andwill require more frequent fluid and filter

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, andGenuine Parts” in this section for fluid speci-fications.

Special AdditivesThe manufacturer strongly recommends againstusing any special additives in the transmission.Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engi-neered product and its performance may beimpaired by supplemental additives. Therefore,do not add any fluid additives to the transmis-sion. The only exception to this policy is the useof special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoidusing transmission sealers as they may ad-versely affect seals.

CAUTION!Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis-sion as the chemicals can damage your trans-mission components. Such damage is notcovered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

317

Fluid Level Check — 3.6L EngineIt is best to check the fluid level when thetransmission is at normal operating temperature(approximately 180° F / 82° C). This occursafter at least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. Atnormal operating temperature, the fluid cannotbe held comfortably between the fingertips.Use the following procedure to check the trans-mission fluid level properly:1. Park the vehicle on level ground.2. Remove the engine cover by pulling it up offthe mounting studs.3. Run the engine at idle speed and normaloperating temperature.4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press thebrake pedal.5. Place the shift lever momentarily into eachgear position (allowing time for the transmissionto fully engage in each position), ending with thetransmission in PARK.

6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and rein-sert it until seated.7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluidlevel on both sides. The fluid level reading isonly valid if there is a solid coating of oil on bothsides of the dipstick. Note that the holes in thedipstick will be full of fluid if the actual level is ator above the hole. The fluid level should bebetween the HOT (upper) reference holes onthe dipstick at normal operating temperature. Ifthe fluid level is low, add fluid through thedipstick tube to bring it to the proper level. Donot overfill. Use ONLY the specified fluid (see"Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" for fluidspecifications). After adding any quantity of oilthrough the dipstick tube, wait a minimum of twominutes for the oil to fully drain into the trans-mission before rechecking the fluid level.

NOTE:If it is necessary to check the transmissionbelow the operating temperature, the fluidlevel should be between the two COLD (lower)holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approxi-mately 80° F (27° C). If the fluid level is cor-rectly established at 80° F (27° C), it should bebetween the HOT (upper) reference holeswhen the transmission reaches 180° F (82° C).Remember it is best to check the level at thenormal operating temperature.

CAUTION!If the fluid temperature is below 50° F(10° C), it may not register on the dipstick.Do not add fluid until the temperature iselevated enough to produce an accuratereading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, towarm the fluid.

8. Reinstall the engine cover and snap it downsecurely onto the mounting studs.

318

9. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.NOTE:To prevent dirt and water from entering thetransmission after checking or replenishingfluid, make sure that the dipstick cap isproperly reseated. It is normal for the dip-stick cap to spring back slightly from itsfully seated position, as long as its sealremains engaged in the dipstick tube.Fluid Level Check — 2.8L Diesel EngineThe fluid level is preset at the factory and doesnot require adjustment under normal operatingconditions. Routine fluid level checks are notrequired, therefore the transmission filler tube iscapped and no dipstick is provided. Your autho-rized dealer can check your transmission fluidlevel using a special service dipstick. If younotice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately tohave the transmission fluid level checked. Op-erating the vehicle with an improper fluid levelcan cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit yourauthorized dealer immediately. Severe trans-mission damage may occur. Your authorizeddealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluidlevel accurately.

Fluid And Filter ChangesRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for theproper maintenance intervals. In addition,change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomescontaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-mission is disassembled for any reason.

Manual Transmission — If EquippedSelection Of LubricantUse only manufacturer’s recommended manualtransmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants,and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Ve-hicle” for further information.Fluid Level CheckCheck the fluid level by removing the fill plug.The fluid level should be between the bottom of

the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 in(4.76 mm) below the bottom of the hole.Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the properlevel.Frequency Of Fluid ChangeUnder normal operating conditions, the fluidinstalled at the factory will give satisfactorylubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluidchanges are not necessary unless the lubricanthas become contaminated with water. If con-taminated with water, the fluid should bechanged immediately.

Clutch Hydraulic System (ManualTransmission) — If EquippedThe clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segre-gated volume of fluid within the brake systemmaster cylinder reservoir. In the event of leak-age or wear, use only the manufacturer’s rec-ommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubri-cants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining YourVehicle” for further information.

319

Transfer CaseFluid Level CheckThe fluid level should be to the bottom edge ofthe fill hole (A) when the vehicle is in a levelposition.

Adding FluidFluid should be added only at filler hole untilfluid begins to run out of the hole.DrainFirst remove the fill plug (B), then the drain plug(C). The recommended tightening torque for thedrain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).

CAUTION!When replacing the plugs, do not overtightenthem. You could damage them and causethem to leak.

Selection Of LubricantUse only manufacturer’s recommended fluid.Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-tion.

Front/Rear Axle FluidFluid Level CheckLubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oilfill hole.Adding FluidAdd lubricant only at the fill hole and only to thelevel specified above.Selection Of LubricantUse only manufacturer’s recommended fluid.Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-tion.

Appearance Care And ProtectionFrom CorrosionProtection Of Body And Paint FromCorrosionVehicle body care requirements vary accordingto geographic locations and usage. Chemicalsthat make roads passable in snow and ice andthose that are sprayed on trees and road sur-faces during other seasons are highly corrosiveto the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,which exposes your vehicle to airborne con-taminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle isoperated, extreme hot or cold weather andother extreme conditions will have an adverseeffect on paint, metal trim, and underbody pro-tection.The following maintenance recommendationswill enable you to obtain maximum benefit fromthe corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

320

What Causes Corrosion?Corrosion is the result of deterioration or re-moval of paint and protective coatings from yourvehicle.The most common causes are:• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.• Stone and gravel impact.• Insects, tree sap and tar.• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.Washing• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash

your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR®Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinsethe panels completely with clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits haveaccumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR®Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover toremove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such asMOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film,stains and to protect your paint finish. Takecare never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and powerbuffing that may diminish the gloss or thin outthe paint finish.

CAUTION!• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning

materials such as steel wool or scouringpowder that will scratch metal and paintedsurfaces.

• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Special Care• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you

drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-riage at least once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the loweredges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunkbe kept clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches inthe paint, touch them up immediately. Thecost of such repairs is considered the re-sponsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collisionor similar cause that destroys the paint andprotective coating, have your vehicle re-paired as soon as possible. The cost of suchrepairs is considered the responsibility of theowner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that suchmaterials are well packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,consider mud or stone shields behind eachwheel.

• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratchesas soon as possible. Your authorized dealerhas touch up paint to match the color of yourvehicle.

321

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care• All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi-

num and chrome plated wheels, should becleaned regularly with a mild soap and waterto prevent corrosion.

• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brakedust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.

NOTE:If your vehicle is equipped with Dark VaporChrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel clean-ers, abrasives or polishing compounds.They will permanently damage this finishand such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILDSOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.Used on a regular basis this is all that isrequired to maintain this finish.

CAUTION!Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, abristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)oven cleaner. These products may damagethe wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automaticcar washes that use acidic solutions or harshbrushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaneror equivalent is recommended.

Interior CareUse MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent toclean fabric upholstery and carpeting.Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with adamp cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® TotalClean or equivalent , then MOPAR® Spot &Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely nec-essary. Do not use harsh cleaners or ArmorAll®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent toclean vinyl upholstery.

WARNING!Do not use volatile solvents for cleaningpurposes. Many are potentially flammable

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)and, if used in closed areas, they may causerespiratory harm.

CAUTION!When installing hanging air fresheners inyour vehicle, read the installation instructionscarefully. Some air fresheners will damagethe finish of painted or decorated parts ifallowed to directly contact any surface.

Glass SurfacesAll glass surfaces should be cleaned on aregular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, orany commercial household-type glass cleaner.Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use cau-tion when cleaning the inside rear windowequipped with electric defrosters or the rightrear quarter window equipped with the radioantenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharpinstrument that may scratch the elements.

322

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spraycleaner on the towel or rag that you are using.Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster LensesThe lenses in front of the instruments in thisvehicle are molded in clear plastic. When clean-ing the lenses, care must be taken to avoidscratching the plastic.1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soapsolution may be used, but do not use highalcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap isused, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.2. Dry with a soft cloth.Seat Belt MaintenanceDo not bleach, dye, or clean the belts withchemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This willweaken the fabric. Sun damage can alsoweaken the fabric.If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® TotalClean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water.Do not remove the belts from the vehicle towash them. Dry with a soft cloth.Replace the belts if they appear frayed or wornor if the buckles do not work properly.

Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models

CAUTION!To maintain the appearance of your vehicle’sinterior trim and top, follow these precau-tions:

• Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended withthe top down, as exposure to sun or rain maydamage interior trim.

• Do not use harsh cleaners or bleachingagents on top material, as damage mayresult.

• Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run downand dry on the paint, leaving a streak.

• After cleaning your vehicle’s fabric top, al-ways make sure it is completely dry beforelowering.

• Be especially careful when washing the win-dows by following the directions for “Care ofFabric Top Windows.”

Washing – Use MOPAR® Car Wash or equiva-lent, or mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and abrush with soft bristles. If extra cleaning isrequired, use MOPAR® Convertible Cloth TopCleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaneron the entire top, but support the top fromunderneath.Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces ofcleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with cleanwater. Remember to allow the top to dry beforelowering it.

CAUTION!Failure to follow these cautions may causeinterior water damage, stains or mildew onthe top material:• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they

can damage the top material. Also, in-creased water pressure may force past theweather strips.

(Continued)

323

CAUTION! (Continued)• It is recommended that the top be free of


• Use care when washing the vehicle, waterpressure directed at the weather stripseals may cause water to leak into thevehicle’s interior.

• Careless handling and storage of the re-movable roof panels may damage theseals, causing water to leak into the vehi-cle’s interior.

• The front panel(s) must be positionedproperly to ensure sealing. Improper in-stallation can cause water to leak into thevehicle’s interior.

Care Of Fabric Top Windows

CAUTION!Your vehicle’s fabric top has pliable plasticwindows which can be scratched unlessspecial care is taken by following these di-rections:

1. Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. In-stead, use a microfiber towel or soft cottoncloth moistened with cold or warm, cleanwater, and wipe across the window, not upand down. MOPAR® Jeep Soft Glass WindowCleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plasticwindows without scratching. It removes finescratches to improve visibility and provides UVprotection to help prevent yellowing.2. When washing, never use hot water oranything stronger than a mild soap. Never usesolvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaningagents.3. Always rinse thoroughly with cold water,then wipe with a soft and slightly moist, cleancloth.

4. When removing frost, snow or ice, neveruse a scraper or de-icing chemicals. Usewarm water only if you must clean the windowquickly.5. Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road driving will have a major impact on zipperoperation. Even normal on-road driving and ve-hicle washing will eventually impact window zipperoperation. To maintain ease of use of the windowzippers, each window zipper should be cleanedand lubricated regularly. Use MOPAR® Soft TopZipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent toease zipper operation. Before applying, make surethe zipper teeth are clear of sand, mud, and othermaterials. Clean both sides of the zipper, not justone side. Rinse both zipper halves with freshwater and allow to dry. Aggressively work theMOPAR® Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricantor equivalent into the zipper teeth. If a stuck zipperslide is experienced, work the MOPAR® Soft TopZipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent intothe zipper slide. Several applications may berequired before the zipper comes free.6. Never paste stickers, gummed labels or anytape to the windows. Adhesives are hard toremove and may damage the windows.

324

FUSES

WARNING!• When replacing a blown fuse, always use

an appropriate replacement fuse with thesame amp rating as the original fuse.Never replace a fuse with another fuse ofhigher amp rating. Never replace a blownfuse with metal wires or any other material.Failure to use proper fuses may result inserious personal injury, fire and/or propertydamage.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that

the ignition is off and that all the otherservices are switched off and/or disen-gaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contactan authorized dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safety sys-tems (air bag system, braking system),power unit systems (engine system, gear-box system) or steering system blows,contact an authorized dealer.

Totally Integrated Power ModuleThe Totally Integrated Power Module is locatedin the engine compartment near the battery.This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fusesand relays. A label that identifies each compo-nent is printed on the inside of the cover.

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse DescriptionJ1 — —J2 30 Amp Pink Transfer Case ModuleJ3 — —

Totally Integrated Power Module

325

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse DescriptionJ4 25 Amp Natural Driver Door NodeJ5 25 Amp Natural Passenger Door NodeJ6 40 Amp Green Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump/Stability Control

SystemJ7 30 Amp Pink Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valve/Stability Control

SystemJ8 — —J9 40 Amp Green PZEV Sec Motor/Flex FuelJ10 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Wash Relay/Manifold Tuning ValveJ11 30 Amp Pink Sway BarJ12 30 Amp Pink Rear Blower Motor/Radiator FanJ13 60 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – MainJ14 40 Amp Green Rear DefrosterJ15 40 Amp Green Front BlowerJ17 40 Amp Green Starter SolenoidJ18 20 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Trans RangeJ19 60 Amp Yellow Radiator Fan

326

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse DescriptionJ20 30 Amp Pink Front Wiper LO/HIJ21 20 Amp Blue Front/Rear WasherJ22 — SpareM1 15 Amp Blue Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)/Switch Stop

Lamp FeedM2 20 Amp Yellow Relay Trailer Lighting (Stoplamp)M3 20 Amp Yellow Frt/Rear Axle Locker RelayM4 — —M5 25 Amp Natural Power Inverter – If EquippedM6 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #1/Rain SensorM7 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT)M8 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated SeatM9 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped

M10 15 Amp Blue Ignition Off Draw – Vehicle Entertainment System, Satel-lite Digital Audio Receiver (SDARS), DVD, Hands-Free

Module, RADIO, Antenna, Universal Garage DoorOpener, Vanity Lamp

327

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse DescriptionM11 10 Amp Red (Ignition Off Draw) Climate Control System, Underhood

LampM12 30 Amp Green AmplifierM13 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw – Cabin Compartment Node, Wireless

Control Module, SIREN, Multifunction Control SwitchM14 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow (Export Only)M15 20 Amp Yellow Climate Control System, Rear View Mirror, Cabin Com-

partment Node, Transfer Case Switch, Multi-FunctionControl Switch, Tire Pressure Monitor, Glow Plug Module

– Export Diesel OnlyM16 10 Amp Red Airbag ModuleM17 15 Amp Blue Left Tail/License/Park LampM18 15 Amp Blue Right Tail/Park/Run LampM19 25 Amp Natural Auto Shut Down (ASD #1 and #2)M20 15 Amp Blue Cabin Compartment Node Interior Light, Switch BankM21 20 Amp Yellow Auto Shut Down (ASD #3)M22 10 Amp Red Right Horn (HI/LOW)M23 10 Amp Red Left Horn (HI/LOW)

328

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse DescriptionM24 25 Amp Natural Rear WiperM25 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – Export OnlyM26 10 Amp Red Power Window Switch, Driver Window SwitchM27 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch Feed, Wireless ModuleM28 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control ModuleM29 10 Amp Red PowertrainM30 15 Amp Blue Wiper Motor Frt, J1962 Diagnostic FeedM31 20 Amp Yellow Backup LampsM32 10 Amp Red Airbag Controller, TT EUROPEM33 10 Amp Red Powertrain ControllerM34 10 Amp Red Park Assist, Climate Control System, Headlamp Wash,

CompassM35 10 Amp Red Heated MirrorsM36 20 Amp Yellow Power OutletM37 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake System, Electronic Stability Control,

Stop Lamp Switch, Fuel Pump RelayM38 25 Amp Natural Lock/Unlock Motors

329

CAUTION!• When installing the Integrated Power Mod-

ule cover, it is important to ensure thecover is properly positioned and fullylatched. Failure to do so may allow waterto get into the Integrated Power Module,and possibly result in an electrical systemfailure.

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is impor-tant to use only a fuse having the correctamperage rating. The use of a fuse with arating other than indicated may result in adangerous electrical system overload. If aproperly rated fuse continues to blow, itindicates a problem in the circuit that mustbe corrected.

VEHICLE STORAGEIf you are leaving your vehicle dormant for morethan 21 days, you may want to take steps toprotect your battery. You may:• Remove Cartridge fuse #J13 in the Power

Distribution Center (PDC) labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) and store it in a safe locationwithin the PDC.

• Or, disconnect the negative cable from thebattery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it outof service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks ormore, run the air conditioning system at idlefor about five minutes in the fresh air andhigh blower setting. This will ensure ad-equate system lubrication to minimize thepossibility of compressor damage when thesystem is started again.

REPLACEMENT BULBSInterior Lights Bulb TypeAuto. Trans. Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . .658Courtesy Lights, Under Dash (1) . . . . . .906Heater Control Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . .194Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear WindowDefogger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .**Soundbar Dome Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . .912** Bulbs only available from authorized dealer.Exterior Lights Bulb TypeBackup Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . .W16WCenter High-MountedStop Lamp (1) . . . . . . . . .LED (Serviced at

Authorized Dealer)Front Fog Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . .PSX24WRear Fog Lamps (2). . . . . . . . . . .P27/7WFront Direction Lamps (2). . . . . . . .P27/7WFront Side Repeaters/SideMarker Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . .W5WHeadlamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H4Front Position Lamps (2) . . . . . . . .12V14WStop/Rear Position Lamps (2) . . . . .P27/7W

330

Rear Direction Lamps (2) . . . . . . .PY27/7WLicense Lamp (2). . . . . . . . . . . . . .W5WNOTE:Numbers refer to commercial bulb typesthat can be purchased from your local au-thorized dealer.

BULB REPLACEMENTNOTE:Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-spheric conditions. This will usually clear asatmospheric conditions change to allow thecondensation to change back into a vapor.Turning the lamps on will usually acceleratethe clearing process.

Headlamp1. Open hood and support using prop rod.2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainersalong the top 1/4 turn counterclockwise andremove.3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting atone side and working toward the other.

4. Turn both park and turn signal socket as-semblies 1/4 turn counterclockwise and re-move.5. Remove the four screws holding the metalretaining ring.6. Remove the lamp from the collar.7. Remove the connector from the lamp, andremove the rubber seal.8. Unlatch the metal spring bulb retainer bypushing forward and outward on retaining legs.9. Pull the bulb from the housing.10. Install the bulb into the headlamp housing.

CAUTION!Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.Oil contamination will severely shorten bulblife. If the bulb comes in contact with any oilysurface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

11. Latch the metal spring retainer to headlampbulb.

12. Install the rubber seal and connector to theheadlamp bulb.13. Reinstall lamp to body with retaining ringand four screws.14. Reinstall park and turn signal connectors,and reinstall front grille.

Front Park/Turn Signal1. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainersalong the top 1/4 turn counterclockwise andremove.2. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting atone side and working toward the other.3. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn counter-clockwise and remove from housing. Pull thebulb straight from the socket to replace.

Front Side Marker1. Reach under the front fender flare and locatethe front side marker socket.2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise1/3 turn and remove it from the housing. Pull thebulb straight from the socket to replace.

331

Front Fog Lamp1. Reach under the vehicle to access the backof the front fog lamp.2. Disconnect the wire harness connector fromthe front fog lamp connector receptacle.3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch fea-tures and squeeze them together to unlock thebulb from the back of the front fog lamp housing.4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyedopening in the housing and then connect thereplacement bulb.

CAUTION!Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.Oil contamination will severely shorten bulblife. If the bulb comes in contact with any oilysurface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

Rear Fog Lamp1. Reach under the vehicle to access the backof the rear fog lamp.2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise1/4 turn and remove it from the housing. Pull thebulb straight from the socket to replace.

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, AndBackup Lamp1. Remove the two inboard screws attachingthe tail light housing to the body. DO NOTREMOVE THE OUTER SCREWS AT ANYTIME.

2. Separate the housing from the body bypushing the lamp inboard while pulling the lampaway from the body.3. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn coun-terclockwise, then remove it from the housing.4. Pull the bulb straight from the socket toreplace.

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp(CHMSL)The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket thatextends upward from the tailgate behind thespare tire. If service is needed, obtain theLED/Cover Assembly from your local autho-rized dealer.1. Remove the spare tire.2. Remove the four screws holding the lens/cover in place on the spare tire carrier.3. Disconnect the wire harness from the backof the LED cover.

332

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. MetricFuel (Approximate) — Two Door Models 18.5 Gallons 70 LitersFuel (Approximate) — Four Door Models 22.5 Gallons 85 LitersEngine Oil With Filter3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters2.8 Liter Diesel Engine - With Particulate Filter (SAE 5W-30 Synthetic, low ash) 7 Quarts 6.5 Liters2.8 Liter Diesel Engine - Without Particulate Filter (SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic) 7 Quarts 6.5 LitersCooling System *3.6 Liter Engine-MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT(Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler MaterialStandard MS-12106.

10.5 Quarts 9.9 Liters

2.8 Liter Diesel Engine-MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile For-mula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of ChryslerMaterial Standard MS-12106.

13 Quarts 12 Liters

* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

333

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartEngine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic

Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106, or anequivalent coolant.

Engine Oil – Gasoline (Non ACEA Categories) We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Mate-rial Standard MS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535-CR1. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Chrysler MS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1 may be used whenSAE 5W-20 engine oil is not available.

Engine Oil – Gasoline (ACEA Categories) For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, we recommend youuse 5W-20 engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 and approved to Chrysler MS–6395 orFiat 9.55535–CR1.SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Chrysler MS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1 may be used whenSAE 5W-20 engine oil is not available.

Engine Oil – Diesel (with Particulate Filter) We recommend you use SAE 5W-30 diesel engine oils conforming to API Quality CI-4 or CJ-4. Forcountries that use ACEA European oil categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils meeting therequirements of ACEA C3 (LOW ASH) and approved to Chrysler MS-11106 or Fiat 9.55535–S3.

334

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartEngine Oil – Diesel (without ParticulateFilter)

We recommend you use SAE 0W-40 diesel engine oils conforming to API Quality CI-4 or CJ-4. Forcountries that use ACEA European oil categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils meeting therequirements of ACEA C3 (LOW ASH) and approved to Chrysler MS-11106 or Fiat 9.55535–S3.

Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.Fuel Selection – Gasoline Engines Research Octane Number (RON) of 91Fuel Selection – Diesel Engines 50 Cetane or higher (Less than 50 ppm Sulfur)

Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartAutomatic Transmission – If Equipped Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or

performance of your transmission. We recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid.Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR® Manual Transmission Lubricant meeting the requirements of

Chrysler Material Standard MS-9224.Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.

335

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartAxle Differential (Front) We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5).Axle Differential (Rear) 226 RBI (Model 44) – We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API

GL-5) or equivalent. For trailer towing, use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W-140).Models equipped with Trac-Lok™ require an additive.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid isnot available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic TransmissionFluid.

336

8MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

• MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338• Maintenance Schedule — Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . .338• Maintenance Schedule — Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353

337

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Maintenance Schedule — GasolineEngineThe Scheduled Maintenance services listed inthis manual must be done at the times ormileages specified to protect your vehicle war-ranty and ensure the best vehicle performanceand reliability. More frequent maintenance maybe needed for vehicles in severe operatingconditions, such as dusty areas and very shorttrip driving. Inspection and service should alsobe done anytime a malfunction is suspected.The oil change indicator system will remind youthat it is time to take your vehicle in for sched-uled maintenance.On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “CHANgEOIL” will flash in the instrument cluster odom-eter and a single chime will sound, indicatingthat an oil change is necessary.

The oil change indicator message will illuminateapproximately 7,000 miles (11,200 km) after themost recent oil change was performed. Haveyour vehicle serviced as soon as possible,within 500 miles (800 km). However, an earlieroil change at 4,500 miles (7,500 km) may berequired if the vehicle is operated under “Se-vere Duty Conditions” later in this section.NOTE:

• The oil change indicator message will notmonitor the time since the last oil change.Change your vehicle’s oil if it has been 12months since your last oil change even ifthe oil change indicator message is NOTilluminated.

• Change your engine oil more often if youdrive your vehicle off-road for an ex-tended period of time.

• Under no circumstances should oilchange intervals exceed 7,500 miles(12,000 km) or 12 months, whichevercomes first.

Your dealer will reset the oil change indicatormessage after completing the scheduled oilchange. If this scheduled oil change is performedby someone other than your dealer, the messagecan be reset by referring to the steps describedunder “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.At Each Stop for Fuel• Check the engine oil level about five minutes

after a fully warmed engine is shut off.Checking the oil level while the vehicle is onlevel ground will improve the accuracy of theoil level reading. Add oil only when the levelis at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

• Check the windshield washer solvent andadd if required.

338

Once a Month• Check tire pressure and look for unusual

wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first signof irregular wear, even if it occurs before theoil indicator system turns on.

• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten theterminals as required.

• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir,brake master cylinder, power steering andautomatic transmission and add as needed.

• Check all lights and other electrical items forcorrect operation.

At Each Oil Change• Change the engine oil filter.• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

CAUTION!Failure to perform the required maintenanceitems may result in damage to the vehicle.

Required Maintenance IntervalsRefer to the Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages for the required maintenanceintervals.

339

7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 12 MonthsMaintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil fil-ter.††

❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence ofgrease, reapply if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center



❏ If using your vehicle for any of the fol-lowing: Dusty or off-road conditions. In-spect the engine air cleaner filter, replaceif necessary.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if neces-sary.

❏ Inspect exhaust system.




340

22,500 Miles (36,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect exhaust system.❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.




341

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.

❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailertowing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds dur-ing hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).

❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.









342

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect theengine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect exhaust system.❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.









343

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi,police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speedsduring hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).

❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailertowing.

❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.




344

67,500 Miles (108,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.❏ Inspect exhaust system.❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.❏ Replace the spark plugs. ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.




345

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect theengine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.




82,500 Miles (132,000 km) or 132 MonthsMaintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oilfilter.††





346

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.†❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect exhaust system.❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi,police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds dur-ing hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).





347

97,500 Miles (156,000 km) or 156 MonthsMaintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oilfilter.††






❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.




348

112,500 Miles (180,000 km) or 180 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.❏ Inspect exhaust system.❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.




349

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 192 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Replace accessory drive belt(s).❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi,police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds dur-ing hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).

❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid, and filter.




350

127,500 Miles (204,000 km) or204 Months Maintenance ServiceSchedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oilfilter.††






❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect exhaust system.❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.❏ Replace the spark plugs. ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.




351

142,500 Miles (228,000 km) or228 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oilfilter.††





150,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 240 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,off-road or frequent trailer towing.

❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailertowing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speedsduring hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).





352

† This maintenance is recommended by themanufacturer to the owner, but is not required tomaintain emissions warranty.

WARNING!You can be badly injured working on oraround a motor vehicle. Do only service workfor which you have the knowledge and theright equipment. If you have any doubt aboutyour ability to perform a service job, takeyour vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Severe Duty Conditions†† Change the engine oil and engine oil filter atevery 4500 miles (7,500 km) or 12 months ifusing your vehicle under any of the followingsevere duty conditions:• Stop and go driving.• Driving in dusty conditions.• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).• Trailer towing.

• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercialservice).

• Off-road or desert operation.

Maintenance Schedule — DieselEngineAt Each Stop for Fuel• Check the engine oil level about five minutes

after a fully warmed engine is shut off.Checking the oil level while the vehicle is onlevel ground will improve the accuracy of theoil level reading. Add oil only when the levelis at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

• Check the windshield washer solvent, add asrequired.

Once a Month• Check tire pressure and look for unusual

wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first signof irregular wear, even if it occurs before theoil indicator system turns on.

• Inspect the battery; clean and tighten theterminals as required.

• Check the fluid levels of engine coolant/antifreeze deaeration bottle, and brake mas-ter cylinder, add as needed.

• Check all lights and all other electrical itemsfor correct operation.

At Each Oil Change• Change the engine oil filter.• Inspect the exhaust system.• Inspect brake hoses.• Check the engine coolant/antifreeze level,

hoses, and clamps.• Inspect engine accessory drive belts. Re-

place as necessary.• Inspect for the presence of water in the fuel

filter/water separator unit.Inspection and service should be performedanytime a malfunction is observed or sus-pected. Retain all receipts.

353

Diesel Models with Diesel Particulate Filter(DPF)The oil change indicator system will remind youthat it is time to take your vehicle in for sched-uled maintenance.A “CHANgE OIL” message will flash in theinstrument cluster odometer and a single chimewill sound, indicating that an oil change isnecessary.Based on engine operation conditions, the oilchange indicator message will illuminate, thismeans that service is required for your vehicle.Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,within the next 500 miles (805 km).Your dealer will reset the oil change indicatormessage after completing the scheduled oilchange. If this scheduled oil change is performedby someone other than your dealer the messagecan be reset by referring to the steps describedunder “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in "Understanding Your Instru-ment Panel” for further information.

Required Maintenance IntervalsRefer to the Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages for the required maintenanceintervals.NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil changeintervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or12 months, whichever comes first.

354

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter,and replace if necessary.

❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.




355

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.❏ Replace engine air cleaner filter.❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.❏ Replace the fuel filter.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,off-road or frequent trailer towing.

❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.




356






357

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.❏ Replace engine air cleaner filter.❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.❏ Replace the fuel filter.❏ Replace the engine accessory drive belt.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using the vehicle for any of the following; police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.




358






359


❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.




360






361

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.❏ Replace engine air cleaner filter.❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.❏ Replace the fuel filter.❏ Replace the engine accessory drive belt.❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.❏ Change the transfer case if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.❏ Replace the engine timing belt, and timing belt tensioner.




362






363

WARNING!You can be badly injured working on oraround a motor vehicle. Do only that servicework for which you have the knowledge andthe right equipment. If you have any doubtabout your ability to perform a service job,take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.


❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant (antifreeze).




364

9IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

• IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368• ARGENTINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369• AUSTRALIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369• AUSTRIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369• BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370• BELGIUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370• BOLIVIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370• BRAZIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371• BULGARIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371• CHILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371• CHINA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372• COLOMBIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372• COSTA RICA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372• CROATIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373• CZECH REPUBLIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373• DENMARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373• DOMINICAN REPUBLIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374• ECUADOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374• EL SALVADOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

365

• ESTONIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375• FINLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375• FRANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375• GERMANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376• GREECE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376• GUATEMALA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376• HONDURAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377• HUNGARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377• IRELAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377• ITALY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378• LATVIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378• LITHUANIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378• LUXEMBURG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379• NETHERLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379• NEW ZEALAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379• NORWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380• PANAMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380• PARAGUAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380• PERU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381• POLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381• PORTUGAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381• PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGIN ISLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382• REUNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382• ROMANIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382• RUSSIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383• SLOVAKIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383• SLOVENIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383

366

• SPAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384• SWEDEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384• SWITZERLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384• TAIWAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385• TURKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385• UKRAINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385• UNITED KINGDOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386• URUGUAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386• VENEZUELA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386

367

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCEThe manufacturer distributors are vitally inter-ested in your satisfaction with their productsand services. If a servicing problem or otherdifficulty should occur, we recommend that youtake the following steps:Discuss the problem at the authorized dealerwith the dealer principal or the service manager.Management personnel at the authorizeddealer are in the best position to resolve theproblem.

When you contact the distributor please provideall of the following information:• Your name, address and phone number.• Vehicle Identification Number (this 17 digit

number is found on an etched plate or label,located on the left front corner of the instru-ment panel, visible through the windshield. Itis also available from your vehicle registra-tion or title).

• Selling and servicing authorized dealer.• Vehicle’s delivery date and current odometer

distance.• Service history of your vehicle.• An accurate description of the problem and

the conditions under which it occurs.

368

ARGENTINAChrysler Argentina S.ABoulevard Azucena Villaflor 435C1107CIIBuenos Aires, ArgentinaTel.: +54-11-4891 7900Fax: +54-11-4891 7901

AUSTRALIAChrysler Australia Pty. Ltd.ACN 124 956 505PO Box 23267, Docklands Victoria 3008Ph. (03) 8698-0200

AUSTRIAJeep Customer Service*

Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 0 426 5337Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 20 1741International Toll NumberTel: + 39 02 444 12 045

Chrysler Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 1692 1692Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 201745International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12046

Dodge Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 36343 000Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 201747International Toll NumberTel: Not Available

(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main Europeancountries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.

369

BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEANInteramericana Trading CorporationWarrens, St. MichaelBarbados, West IndiesBB22026, P0 Box 98Tel.: 246–417–8000Fax: 246–425–2888

BELGIUMJeep Customer Service*

Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 0 426 5337Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 55 888International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12 045

Chrysler Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 1692 1692Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 18 142International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12046

Dodge Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 36343 000Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 16 166International Toll NumberTel: Not Available

BOLIVIAOvando & Cia S.A.Av. Cristobal de Mendoza (2do Anillo) y CanalIsutoSanta Cruz, BoliviaPO Box 6852Tel.: (591-3) 336 3100Fax: (591-3) 334 0229


370

BRAZILChrysler do BrasilRua Funchal, 418 - 16º andar CJ 1601/1602,Vila Olímpia04551-060 Sao Paulo – S.P., BrazilTel: +5511 4949 3900Fax: +5511 4949 3905

BULGARIABALKAN STARResbarska Str. 51510 SofiaTel.: 359 2 91988Fax: 359 2 945 40 14

CHILEComercial Chrysler S.A.Av. Americo Vespucio 1601, QuilicuraSantiago, ChileZip Code 101931-7, 367-VTel.: +562 837 1300Fax: +562 6039196


371

CHINAChrysler Group (China) Sales Limited16F,Gemdale Plaza Tower ANo.91 Jian Guo RoadChaoyang DistrictBeijing 100022, P.R. ChinaChrysler Brand Tel: 400-650-1195Dodge Brand Tel: 400-650-0118

COLOMBIAChrysler Colombia S.A.Avenida Calle 26 # 70A-25Zip Code 110931Bogotá ColombiaTel: +57 1 745 5777Fax: +57 1 410 5667

COSTA RICAAutoStarLa Uruca, frente al Banco NacionalSan José, Costa RicaPO Box 705-1150Tel.: (506) 295 - 0000Fax: (506) 295 - 0052


372

CROATIAAutocommerce Hrvatska d.o.o.Jablanska 8010 000 ZagrebTel: 00 385 1 3869 001Fax: 00 385 1 3869 069

CZECH REPUBLICFiat CR s.r.o.Karolinska 650/1186 00 Praha 8 – KarlinCzech RepublicTel: +420 2 24806 111Fax: +420 2 24806 312

DENMARKJeep Customer Service*


Chrysler Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 1692 1692Local Toll Free NumberTel: 80 20 30 35International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12046

Dodge Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 36343 000Local Toll Free NumberTel: 80 20 30 36International Toll NumberTel: Not Available


373

DOMINICAN REPUBLICReid y CompañiaJohn F. Kennedy Casi Esq. Lope de VegaSanto Domingo, Dominican RepublicTel.: (809) 562–7211Fax: (809) 565-8774

ECUADORChrysler Jeep Automotriz del EcuadorAv. Juan Tanca Marengo km. 4.5Guayaquil, EcuadorTel.: +593 4 2244101Fax: +593 4 2244273

EL SALVADORGrupo Q del SalvadorAve. Las Amapolas (Autopista Sur)Blvd. Los Próceres y Avenida No. 1, Lomas deSan Francisco,San Salvador, El SalvadorZip Code 152Tel.: +503 2248 6400Fax: +503 278 5731


374

ESTONIASilberauto ASJärvevana tee 1111314 TallinnTel.: +372 53337946Tel.: 06 266 072Fax: 06 266 [email protected]

FINLANDAutoFennicaRistipellontie 500390 HELSINKITel: 020 54771Fax: 020 5477 485

FRANCEJeep Customer Service*





375

GERMANYJeep Customer Service*

Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 0 426 5337Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 0426533International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12 045



GREECEChrysler Jeep Dodge Hellas240-242 Kifisias Avenue15231 Halandri Athens, GreeceTel.: +30 210 6700800Fax: +30 210 6700820

GUATEMALAGrupo Q del GuatemalaKm 16 carretera a El Salvador, condado con-cepciónCiudad de Guatemala, GuatemalaZip Code 1004Tel.: +502 6685 9500


376

HONDURASGrupo Q de HondurasBlvd.. Centro América frente a Plaza Miraflores,Tegucigalpa, HondurasTel.: +504 2290 3700Fax: +504 2232 6564

HUNGARYFiat Hungary Co. Ltd.H-1123 BudapestAlkotás u. 53.Tel.:+36-1-458-3100Fax: +36-1-458-3148

IRELANDJeep Customer Service*





377

ITALYJeep Customer Service*




LATVIATC MOTORS LTD.41 Krasta Str.LV-1003 RigaTel.: +37167812 313Mob.: +371 29498662Fax: +371 67812313SIA “Autobrava”G.Astras street 5,LV-1084 RigaTel.: +371 67812312Mob.: +371 29498662Fax +371 671 462 56

LITHUANIASilberauto ASPirklių g. 9LT-02300 VilniusTel +370 52 665956, GSM +370 698 24950Fax +370 52 [email protected]


378

LUXEMBURGJeep Customer Service*




NETHERLANDSJeep Customer Service*




NEW ZEALANDChrysler New ZealandPrivate Bag 14907Panmure New ZealandTel: 09573 7800Fax: 09573 7808


379

NORWAYRSA BILØvre Eikervei 77N-3048 DrammenTel.: +47 32 21 88 00Fax: +47 32 82 60 99

PANAMAAutomotora Autostar S. A.Avenida Domingo Diaz, Via Tocumen, Frente ala Urbanizacion El CrisolPanamá, PanamáTel.: +507 233 7222Fax: +507 233 2843

PARAGUAYGarden Autolider S.AAv. República de Argentina esq. FacundoMachainAsuncion, ParaguayTel.: +595 21 664 580Fax: +595 21 664 579


380

PERUDivemotor S.A.Av. Canada 1160, Urb. Sta. CatalinaLima, PeruZip Code Lima 13Tel.: (51-1) 712 2000Fax: (51-1) 712 2002

POLANDFiat Auto Poland S.A.ul. M. Grażyńskiego 141,43-300 Bielsko-BiałaTel: +48 (033) 813-21-00, 813-51-00

PORTUGALChrysler Portugal S.A.Qta. da Fonte – Edif. Dª AméliaRua Victor Câmara, 2 1ªA2770-229 Paço de ArcosPortugalTel : +351 (0)21 323 91 00Fax: +351 (0)21 323 91 99


381

PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGINISLANDSChrysler International Services, S.A.Calle 1 lote 1 Suite 205, Metro Office ParkGuaynabo, Puerto RicoP.O. Box 191857San Juan 009191857Tel.: 7877825757Fax: 7877823345

REUNIONCOTRANS AUTOMOBILES17 Bd du Chaudron, 97490 Sainte ClotildeTel: 0262920000Fax: 0262488443

ROMANIAAUTO ITALIA IMPEX SRLBd. Timisoara nr. 60/DBucuresti, ROMANIATel: +40 (0)21.444.333.4Fax: +40 (0)21.444.2779www.autoitalia.ro


382

RUSSIAChrysler Russia SAOTestovskaya street, 10123317 Moscow,Tel +7(495)-745-26-36Fax +7(495)-745-26-37

SLOVAKIAFiat SR s.r.oDubravska cesta 2841 05 Bratislava 45SlovakiaTel: +421 2 593099 901Fax: +421 2 593099 911

SLOVENIAAvto Triglav d.o.o.Dunajska 1221000 LjubljanaTel: 01 5883 400Fax: 01 5883 487


383

SPAINJeep Customer Service*




SWEDENJeep Customer Service*




SWITZERLANDJeep Customer Service*





384

TAIWANChrysler Taiwan Co. , LTD.13th Floor Union Enterprise Plaza1109 Min Sheng East Road, Section 3Taipei Taiwan R.O.C.Tel.: 080081581Fax: 886225471871

TURKEYTofaş Türk Otomobil Fabrikasi A.S.Büyükdere Cad, No:145 Tofaş Han ZincirlikuyuISTAMBULTel: (0212) 444 5337Tel: (0212) 275 2960Telefax: (0212) 275 0357

UKRAINEPJSC “AUTOCAPITAL”Chervonoarmiyska Str. 15/201004 KyivTel : +380 44 206 8888+380 44 201 6060Fax: +380 44 206 8889


385

UNITED KINGDOMJeep Customer Service*




URUGUAYSEVEL Uruguay S. A.Convenio 820Montevideo, UruguayZip Code 11700Tel: +598 220 02980Fax: +598 2209-0116

VENEZUELAChrysler de Venezuela LLCAvenida Pancho Pepe Croquer. Zona IndustrialNorteValencia, Estado CaraboroTel: +(58) 241-613 2400Fax: +(58) 241-613 2538Fax: (58) 241-6132602(58) 241-6132438PO BOX: 1960Services And PartsZona Industrial II, Av. Norte-Sur 5 C/C CalleEste-OesteC.C LD Center Local B-2Valencia, Estado CaraboboTelf: (58) 241-6132757(58) 241-6132773Fax: (58) 241-6132743


386

10INDEX

389

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . .180, 244Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .314Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 58, 180Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner

Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . .309Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . .208, 309Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . .209Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . .309Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . .203Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . .15Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . .8Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . .313, 333

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . .244, 245Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .180Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . .15Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . .25

Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . .67Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . .192Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .203Automatic Transaxle

Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . .13Automatic Transmission . . . . .223, 317, 319

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . .319Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . .318, 319Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . .317

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . .106Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . .106Axle Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308Keyless Transmitter Replacement(RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 58Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . .310Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . .246Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . .245

Brake System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . .244, 245Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . .316Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . .223Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .330, 331Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . .189, 194Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333Caps, Filler

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .242Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . .314

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . .57Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 203Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . .332Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .290Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator

Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . .57Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

390

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Child Safety Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Cleaning

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . .216Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . .203Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .258Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . .186, 189, 193Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . .189, 194Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . .187, 194Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . .186, 193Connector

UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . .198

Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . .314Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .314Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .333Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . .315Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . .313Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312

Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . .315Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .313, 333

Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108Customer Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . .368

Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . .171Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . .58, 206Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . .102Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . .305Diesel Engine Maintenance . . . . . . . . .353Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271Diesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . .271Dipsticks

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . .299Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . .315Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . .23Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234Dual Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 112

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . .106Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . .106Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .67Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . .245

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . .246Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . .249Traction Control System . . . . . . . .246

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . .249Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . .104Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . .249Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . .186Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186, 190Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Emergency, In Case of

Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .179Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

EngineAir Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . .56Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 304Compartment Identification . . . .303, 304

391

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . .57Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . .216Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .333Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306, 333Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . .192, 306Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . .307, 333Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .181

Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .307Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . .307Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . .39Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . .16Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . .57Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 311Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322, 323Fabric Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323Filters

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . .208, 309Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . .308

FlashersHazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .288Turn Signal . . . . . . . .59, 178, 331, 332

Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . .216Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . .319Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . .334Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 332Fog Light Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332Fog Lights, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332Fold and Tumble Rear Seat . . . . . . . . .94Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95Folding Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . .288Four Wheel Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230Four Wheel Drive Operation. . . . . . . . .230Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .296Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . .320Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . .272Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . .272, 273, 305Gasoline, Clean Air. . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269Gauges

Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . .181Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224, 228Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . .298General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .14, 18Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322Glow Plug Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . .273

392

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . .273

Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . .68, 71Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Hard Top, Modular . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . .288Headlights

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .331High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . .99Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92Heater, Engine Block. . . . . . . . . . . . .221High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .179High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .254Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . .254Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . .12Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . .13Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 44Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . .190Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . .66Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . .175Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . .323Integrated Power Module (Fuses). . . . . .325Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . .322Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . .102Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4iPod®/USB/MP3 Control

Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . .88, 201

Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . .291Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . .290, 291, 292Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . .16Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . .13

Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . .178Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Leveling, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 97

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 58, 180Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .180Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . .97Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . .253Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .331Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . .332

393

Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . .184Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182Electronic Stability Program (ESP)Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185, 253Electronic Throttle Control Warning . .186Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 332Glow Plug Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .186Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .288Headlight Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . .100Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . .98Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .97High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 179High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . .179High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . .99Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . .254Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . .16Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .97Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .98Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179Rear Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .178

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . .181Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . .181Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . .182Traction Control . . . . . . . . . .185, 253Turn Signal . . . . .59, 98, 178, 331, 332Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178Warning (Instrument ClusterDescription) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Locking Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289

Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . .308Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . .305Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . .338, 353

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . .184Manual Transmission. . . . . . . . . .228, 319

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . .319

Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . .319Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . .316Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Methanol Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . .186, 193Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . .67Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . .67Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . .8Modular Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . .263Mopar Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . .97

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . .56

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . .269Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183, 186

Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182, 183, 186Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . .184, 192, 354

394

Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . .184, 192, 354Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333Change Interval . . . . . . . . . .192, 306Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . .306Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . .308Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .179Recommendation . . . . . . . . .307, 333Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307, 333

Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179Onboard Diagnostic System. . . . . . . . .305Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .305Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . .6Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .66Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . .227Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . .181, 288Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . .6

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320

Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Phone, Cellular. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®). . . . . . .68Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Power

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts. . . . . . .35Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . .291Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Programmable Electronic Features . . . . .197

Radial Ply Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . .314Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . .198Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . .320Rear Swing Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . .171Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . .171Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .284

Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . .285Shifting out of Transfer CaseNeutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286

Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Reminder, Lights On. . . . . . . . . . . . . .98Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Remote Control

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .16Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . .202Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . .330Replacement Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . .192Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Restraints, Infant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . .58Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . .59Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

395

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . .338, 353Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .323Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 58

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . .32And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . .35Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .32

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90Fold and Tumble Rear . . . . . . . . . .94Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .90Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 95Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . .90Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . .15Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . .15Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . .13Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . .14

Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .222Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . .228Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer CaseNeutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285Transfer Case, Shifting out of TransferCase Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . .286

Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . .298Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . .32Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . .208Signals, Turn . . . . . . .59, 98, 178, 331, 332Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . .262Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127, 145Sound Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . .198Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .258, 259, 291Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . .104Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .215Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . .221

Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . .216Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . .215

SteeringPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . .202Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . .109Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .208, 330Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .330Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296Sunrider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163, 165Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag. . .35Sway Bar Disconnect, Electronic . . . . . .233Swing Gate, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . .203Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . .181Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . .103Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215, 217Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 255

396

Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . .260Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .258General Information . . . . . . . . . . .255High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . .256Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290, 292Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .263Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .182Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . .260

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . .277To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273, 299

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .299Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276

Towing Eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297Traction Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246Traction Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . .185Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . .254Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . .282Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . .278Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . .277Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279

Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . .276Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276Transaxle

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320

Four-Wheel-Drive Operation . . . . . .230Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223, 317Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .182Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

Transmitter Battery Service (Remote KeylessEntry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .260Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

Trip Odometer Reset Button. . . . . . . . .182Turn Signals . . . . . . . . .98, 178, 331, 332

UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . .68

Making A Phone Call . . . . . . . . . . .74Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Universal Child Seat Position Chart . . . . .47Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)

Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . .32Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67Variance, Compass. . . . . . . . . . .187, 194Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . .8Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . .8Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . .208, 330Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .307Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . .86

Warning Lights (Instrument ClusterDescription) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . .311Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321Wheel and Wheel Trim. . . . . . . . . . . .322

397

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . .322Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . .58, 206Windshield, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . .167Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . .102, 311

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . .310Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . .310Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

398

Chrysler Group LLC

14JK72-126-EE-AAPrinted in Europe

14

2014-Jeep Wrangler Owner's Manual - Fiat

Documents

Transcript of 2014-Jeep Wrangler Owner's Manual - Fiat